:OSSFELD'S METHOD 'RENCH GRAMMAR A. P. HUGUENET. Stiiatu, Hem Ijmk N\ys A. D. Wkite^ "mummuamSZJH,?'^''''' method for lear olin.anx 3 1924 031 680 527 The original of tliis book is in tine Cornell University Library. There are no known copyright restrictions in the United States on the use of the text. http://www.archive.org/details/cu31 924031 680527 FRENCH GRAMMAR. HOSSFELD'S NEW METHOD. NEW PRACTICAL METHOD NTisrn 'I'TrTf * - ' FOR LEARNING THE French Language A. p. HUGUENET, OJjlcier d'Acadimie, Universite de France; Merribre de la SocUti Nationale des Professeurs de Frangais en Angleterre. Insimictor Royal Naval College, Greenwich; Examiner at Queen's College, London, £c. ; Occasional Examiner to Her Majesty's Civil Servic e Cominission ers. €1' ^4 Lr-i^ (^^r^^^JL P^^^*"^ NEW AND REVISED EDITION. ^onbon : HIESCHFELD BROTHERS, Beeams Buildings, Fetter Lane, E.(?. w /iASKlo(^g PRINTED BY A. BOOT AXD SOX, 24, OLD BAILEY, E.G. CONTEHrXS, Preface , French alphabet ... ... Accents and signs . , Pronunciation of the vowels Reading of words with vowels Componnd vowels. — Diphthongs Pronunciation of the nasal sounds Reading of words with compound vowels and diphthongs Reading of words with nasal sounds Pronunciation of the liquid sounds Pronunciation of the consonants Reading of words with liquid sounds Reading of words with consonants Linking of two words Reading exercise on the linking of words General exceptions to the rules of pronunciation Division of syllables Punctuation Parts of speech ■ Numhers Genders The article and the noun. — Definite article . . . pagi 3 6 5 6 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 14 15 16 18 18 18 19 19 20 II Formation of the plural of nouna 20 Indefinite article 28 Partitive article 32 Words wMcli are the same or nearly the same in English and French 36 The adjective 40 Qualifying adjectives. — Formation of the feminine ... 40 „ „ Formation of the plural ... 48 Degrees of comparison 48 Place of adjectives 52 Determinative adjectives. — Cardinal numeral adjectives 56 Ordinal numeral adjectives ,. 60 Demonstrative adjectives 64 Possessive adjectives 68 Indefinite adjectives 68 The pronoun. — Personal pronouns 72 Demonstrative pronouns 80 Possessive pronouns 88 Eelative and interrogative pronouns 92 Indefinite pronouns ... ... 96 Verhs 104 Adverbs. — Adverbs of manner ... ... 108 Adverbs of time 112 Adverbs of place 112 Adverbs of order 112 Adverbs of quantity 112 Adverbs of comparison 112 Adverbs of affirmation, negation and doubt 112 Adverbs of interrogation ... ... 112 Prepositions . . iig Conjunctions ... 120 Government of conjunctions ... ... ... ... 193 Interjections ... 12s Remarks on verbs 132 Words with aspirated 7i ... ... ... 135 Twenty Dialogues 141 A meeting, une rencontre About the way, or road, au sujet du chemm Visit, visite Railway journey, voyage en chemin defer » )> • it >t Sea journey, traiJers^e At a town, dans une ville Letting apartments, location d'appartements With a servant, avec un domestique Meals, repas To write a letter, pour ^crire une lettre . . At a money-changer's, ches un changeur Buying, acAttte ... Carriages, uoi^ures At table, d taftZe A walk, une promenade With a doctor, avec un doctev/r Paris Museums, ikfMs^es de Parts The Streets of Paris, les rues de Paris How to progress in French, comment faire des progrk en Frangais Syntax Construction of affirmative sciitciu'es Interrogative sentences Negative sentences Syntax of the article Syntax of the noun. — Rules how to ascertain the gender of French nouns by their signification Rtdes to ascertain the gender of French nouns by their endings Gender of several nouns Nouns which are of different gender according to their signification ... ... ... Feminine of some nouns ... ... Remarks on the number of nouns ... •.. ... Plural of compound nouns m ... pa(]e to 160 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 162 166 170 178 186 194 198 206 214 218 222 226 IV Syntax of the qualifying adjective.— Agreement of adjec- tives with nouns or pronouns Place of adjectives Adjectives of dimensions Syntax of the determinative adjectives. — Possessive ad- jectives Indeiinite adjectives Syntax of the pronoun. — Pergonal pronouns Demonstrative pronouns Indefinite pronouns Syntax of the verb. — Subject of the verb Complements of the verb Use of the auxiliary verbs Use of the tenses and moods Syntax of the participles. — Present participle Past participle Instructions, how to correspond in French with the aid of Hossfbld's Cominercial Correspondent ... 321- j)agt 230 238 242 246 250 254 266 270 274 282 286 286 298 298 -336 INDEX. Acute accent Adjectives (qualifying) Adjectives (place of ) Adjectives (complements of ; Affirmation, negation and doubt (adverbs of) Affirmative sentences (construction of) Agreement of adjectives with nouns or pronouns Agreement of participles Apostrophe Article (definite) ... „ (indefinite) „ (partitive) „ (syntax of the) Attribute Au, di la, cb V, OMX, to the Axu^urijifiul Auxiliary verba (use of) roQt 5 40,44,48 ... 52, 238 242 ... 112 166 s ... 230, 234 298, 302 5 20,24 28 32 186 162 24 68, 96, 250 • ■• 286 Ce, eel, cette, ces, this, that, these, those 64, 80, 84 Ce, ceci, celui, celui-ci, celui-ld, ceux-ci, ceux-ld,, dhc, this, that, these, those 80,84,266 Chaque, every, each ... .". 68 VI Chacun, every one CediUa Circumflex accent Collective nouns Comparison (adverbs of) „ (degrees of) Compound vowels (pronunciation of) „ nouns (plural of ) Complements of the verb Conjunctions Conjunctive personal pronouBt) Conversations (and on tlie 3rd page of each lesson) page 96, 270 5 5 278 112 48,52 8 226 282 120,124,128 72, 76, 254 22, 26, 30 Dem;mstrative adjectives „ pronouns Dialogues (twenty on subjects of everyday life) ... Diaeresis Dimensions (adjectives of) Diphthongs (pronunciation of) Disjunctive personal pronouns Dont, of whom, of which Du, de la, de V, des, of the E Elle, elles, &he, they .„ En, of him, of her, of it, of them, in, from thence Est-ce que, ia it thaX JJtta;, they, them Exercises (and on the 2nd page of each lesson) 64 80, 84 140 5 242 8 72, 76, 254 92 24,32 72 72,76,246,262 174 72 ... =21, 25, 29 F Feminine of adjectives Feminine of some nouns 40, 48 218 ni G Oenders „ (how to ascertain by the signification) „ (how to ascertain by the endings) General collective nouns Grave accent H H (aspirated) Hyphen pngn 19 194, 198 198, 202 278 5 136 5 /7, iZs, he, they Imperfect, past definite, past indefinite (use of the) . Indefinite adjectives ,, adjectives (syntax of) „ pronouns „ pronouns (syntax of) Interjections Interrogati<»- (adverbs of) ... Interrogative pronouns „ sentences 72 290 68 250 96, 100 270 128 112 92 'l74 i,I 72 Le, la, V, Us, the ie, fa, Z', Zcs, him, her, it, them Lew, leurs, theii i«i, Zear, he, to him, to her, to them Le mien, le tien, le sien, mine, thine, his, hers, its Le pen, de, the few, the want of Linking of words Liquid sounds (pronunciation of ) L'un, I'autre, Pun I'autre, I'un et Vautre, I'un ou I'autre, ni l'un, ni I'autre, the one, the other, each other, both, either, neither 20, 24 , 76, 258 ,246,278 , 76, 262 88 278 14 10 96, 270 VIII M Manner (adverbs of) 108 Jfe, me, to me 72 ikf^me, same, even, self •" ... 250 Moi,I,me 72 Mon, ma, mes, mj 68 Moods (use of ) 294 N Nasal sounds (pronunciation of) 8 Ne, ne ... pas, non, not, no 178, 182 Negative sentences 178 iVi, neither, nor 274 Nous, we, us 72 Nouns (plural of ) 20,24,28 „ (syntax of ) 194 „ (genders of several) 206,210,214 „ (remarks on the number of several) ... 222 Numeral adjectives (cardinal) 56 „ ,, (ordinal) 60 Numbers ... ... ... ... ... ... 19 o On, one, we, they, people 96,100 Order (adverbs of) 112 Om, or ... 274 P Participle (syntax of the) 298 Partitive collective nouns 278 Past participles (agreement of ) ... 298 302 Period 162 Personal pronouns 72 V6 „ ,) (syntax of) 254 Personne, nohodj ... ... gg 270 Place (adverbs of ) ... ... j^g IX Possessive adjectives " ), (syntax of) J, pronouns Plural of mouns „ of adjectives Pliisieurs, seYeial Prepositions T) . . '*' "* "'* "' •*• -^J-^ Pronunciation (exceptions to the rules of) ... le 17 -..._- ^^^ 18 Propositions Punctuation 68 246 88 20, 24, 28 48 68 116 112 68 68 96 68 96 Q QuaHfying adjectives 40,44,48 " )) (syntax of) 230 Quantity (adverbs of) Quel, wMch, what Quelconqiie, whatever Quiconque, whoever Qaelgue, some, any QueZgwW, somebody, anybody Questions on grammar 22 26 30 (and on the 3rd page of each lesson) "' ' ' Qui, que, quoi, who, whom, what oo Qui est-ce qui, qui est-oe qw, die, who, -whom, &c. ... 174 R Reading exercises oq 017 oi , , , , .... ... ... Zo,zi,6i. (and on the 4th page of each lesson) Relative pronouns g2 2Jic?i, nothing, anything 96,270 s S«( toi, himself, herself, themselve.s, one's self ... 72 76 262 iion sa, ses, leur, leurs, his, her, its, their ... 68 246 278 Speech (parts of ) ... 18 19 pagi Subject of the verb 162,274 Syllables (division of) ^^ Syntax ^^2 Te, thee, to tbee '^2 Tei, such 68 Tenses (use of ) 286,290 Toi, thou, thee 72 Time (adverbs of ) ... 112 Toui, all, every, whole, quite ... ... 68,96,250 Tm, thou 72 u f7m, M?ie, a, an, one 28,56 V Verbs (the whole of part 14, see special index) ... 104 „ (remarks on) ... ... 132 „ (syntax of) ' ... 274 Vocabularies 21, 2.% 29 (and on the 2nd page of each lesson) FoMS, you ... 72 Vowels (pronunciation of ) 6 w Words which are the same or nearly the same in English and French 36 K, to it, there 72,76,262 Index to the Pieces of Prose and Poetry to be found in this volume. PROSE. Lea jardins de Babylone, iJoZKw Histoire d'une servante (Extrait de 1'), Lamartine Immortalite de I'Sme, Jean Jacques Rousseau Combat de Tfldmaque, ^(^n/Zora Etudes de la nature (Extrait des), Bernardin de St. Pierre lia. conscience, CMteaubriand Lettre k sa fille, Madame de S4oign^ Lettre h, Madame Dupuy, Voltaire Adieux de Fontainebleau, iVespoZ/om J. Deux pens&s de Pascal Un reveille-matin, Xavier de Maistre Les Romains conqu^rants, Montesquieu Comment il faut causer, La Sruyere Prononciation de I'U, ikfoMere Conseils sur I'art d'^crire, Voltaire Pourquoi I'homme nait plus faible que les animaux, Saintinc La bosse de I'art mihtaire, Txpffer L'incendie de St. Sylvain, Jules Sandeau POESIES. LTiultre et Its plaideuj*, £o&aM La laitifere et le pot au lait, La Fontaine Le singe qui montre la lanterne magique, Florian La jeune captive, Andr^ Oh^nier Demiers moments d'un jeune pofete, Gilhnrt A. vjie ^e\a, Alfred de Musset Hymne, Victor Sugo ... lia iemil.e, Arnault Image de la vie, Madame Tastu Cbceur d'Atbalie, Racine phe Preuves de I'existence de Dieu, Racine fils page 241, 245 249, 253 257 261 265 269 27.3 277, 281 285 289 293 297 301 305 306 306 307 308 311 311 312 313 315 316 317 318 318 318 319 Abbreviations. In the first 19 Reading Exercises, nasal and liquid sounds ase in dicated by italics, and the linkiTig of word la indicated thus -^ m., masculine. /., feminine. p. or pi., plural. p. d., past definite. i. or M«p., imperfect. PREFAC E. To meet the requirements of a practical method for Schools, the Puljlishers have been frequently asked to publish a book on Hossfeld's Aletliod which would be at the same time a Grammar, a Book of Exercises, a Manual of Conversation, and a Reading- book, thus giving more development to the grammatical part and lengthening the exercises. The present publication will be found to meet this acknowledged want. The book is divided into 66 lessons, each of which consists of 4 pages. The first page is devoted to Grammar ; The secoTid contains Exercises on the Rules and Verbs given on the opposite page ; The third gives Questions on the same Rules destined for pupils who are preparing for an examination where they will have to answer similar questions ; and also Conversations in which these rules are illustrated ; he fourth page consists always of a graduated Reading Exercise, which must not only be read aloud, but also translated with the help of the indications given either bH"'eea the lines, or at the end of the page. It is by the careful translation of this Exercise, as well as by She reading and learning by heart of the Conversations and the Dialogues, that the student will become acquainted with tha idioms of the French Language. Lists of such idioms are dry and very soon forgotten by the pupil ; but when framed in useful conversations or pleasant anecdotes, they make a stronger im- pression on the mind and remaia fixed in the memory. "We specially recommend to masters the use of the Keys, printed on single leaves of strong paper— one lesson on each leaf. One of these leaves is to be given to each pupil after the exercises have been worked out, so that he may himself see and correct the mistakes (if any) he has made. This having been done, Cha corrected exercises and the Key should be returned to the master for revision. The correction by the pupil himself has been proved to be one of the most successful features of this method ; it obliges the pupil to go a second time over his work, and by this means the mistakes he has made are vividly brought before him. As a result, the same mistakes are less likely to recur, and the masters will be spared a long, tedious, and relatively fruitless work. At the end of the book 16 pages of Commercial Correspon- dence are given, by which the pupO. will in a very short tima learn to correspond in French under the guidance of the master, and with the assistance of Hossfbld's Commercial Corre- Bpandent, A. HUGUENET. FIRST DIVISION ELEMENTARY. THE FRENCH ALPHABET. The French Alphabet consists of 26 letters : A a all J j zhee S S es9 B b beh K k kah T t teh C C ceh L 1 ell U u ^Jjed ancient count perfume aucun fantaisie membre denree allemand nymphe no one fantasy member provisions German nymph faim gain etreinte friand experience citoyen hunger profit grasp dainty experience citizen moyen rompre citron defunt foin son gant means to break lemon deceased hay sound glove remplacer enchanter imparfait incandescent feint? to replace to orrhant imperfect white-hot pretence 10 Pronunciation of the liquid sounds. 11 and ill if preceded by a simple or compound vowel, liave a liquid sound and are pronounced like ee-y in the middle and ee at the end of words ; the vowels preceding il or ill keep their usual pronunciation, except e, which i pronounced like h : lail, caillou, bataille, soleil, meilleur, houteille, fauteuil, feuillet, feuille, fenouil, houillir, patrouille K and m before il and ill have the sound of the French m : (eil, oeillet, cercueil HI not preceded by a vowel has also a liquid sound, as in billet, famille, except in words which commence with ill, mill, vill, and a few others, ilUgale, mille, millimHre, ville, village, piller, fille, grille, habiller, mantille. Pronunciation of the Consonants. Consonants are generally pronounced as in English, but, as a rule, are not sounded at the end of words, c, /, I, r, however, when they occur as last letters of a word, are pronounced. But r is not pronounced in words of more than one syllable ending in er. Remarks on the Pronunciation op Consonants. C is pronounced like h ; but like sa before e and i, and also " before a, o, v,, when the cedilla is placed underneath : due, ceci, cela, cidre, pa, de'gu, fagade, regois CO is pronounced like Tcs before e and i, and like h before a, o, u or a consonant : acce'der, accident, vaccine, accorder, accr^diter, accumuler ch is pronounced like sh : cliasse, chat, charade, cheval, biche, chdteau but is pronounced like k before r, and in the greater number of words derived from the Greek : chrdme, chronique, choral, chaos, ^cho g is pronounced like g in gallop ; but it is pronounced like s in pleasure before e, i and y : gorge, galop, gelee,' genou, girafe, gymnase. 11 Reading of words with liquid sounds. Fataille cerfeuil carillon ceil bouilli/' canaille Battle chervil chime eye to boil rabble bouteille deuil mantille aillade brouillard citrouille bottle mourning mantilla garlic-sauce fog pumpkin feiTailleur caillot corbeille eoureuil drills ceillet figliter clot of blood basket squirrel fellow eyelet-hole quenouille eventail merveille fauteuil famille fouiller distaff fan marvel arm-chair family to search douillet taille soleil feuille fille grenouille travail soft waist sun leaf . daughter frog work vermeil seuil papillon rouille gargouille abeille rosy threshold butterfly rust gutter-spout bee pareil veille betail railler maille raillerie reveil alike eve cattle to banter stitch raillery awaking andouille treille soupirail detaillant treuil funerailles twist vine air-hole retailer vrindlass funeral ecueil tenailles cercueil ecaille eveille rock tongs coffln scale awakened Reading of words with consonants. Cheval(*)botto bal cabala clirome cela duo horse boot ball cabal chrome that duke ctair BBC celebre cbalet cbronique cadre celle flesh dry celebrated cottage chronicle frame this ecbec chaleur calice accelerer accaparer accorder check heat chalice to accelerate to forestall to grant dormir badaud fable beaucoup gelee galop to sleep cockney fable much frost gallop mois habile face petit genou riclie darder bord month clever face little knee rich to dai-t edge facteur ceoi germer gymnase aigre fortune postman this to germinate gymnasium sour fortune cerf lire papa poli laborieux passer nager palais stag to read papa polite industrious to pass to swim palace cavalerie demande bananier cliat cbameau dromadaire cavalry demand banana-tree cat camel dromedary badinage canon canif fatalite furie Cliine comete frolic cannon penknife fatality fury China comet (•) No farther Indications will bagiven when final consonants must be pronouncst 12 Pronunciation oir the Consonants (continued). gn is pronounced somewhat nasal and very mucii the same as ni in the English word companion : signe, agneau, campagne, gagner, Boulogne h. is generally silent, but if aspirated (usually indicated in dictionaries by 'h) its sound is but fa,intly heard : homme, hole, heureux, 'hSros, 'haricot j is always pronounced like s in pleasure: jambon, jardin, je, j'ubilS, jaune, Jeudi p is generally silent before t : hapteme, baptiser, sculpture. ph is pronounced like/.- phrase, physique, philosophe qu is pronounced like k ; quatre, requete, liquide, quai r is harder than in English, principally at the beginning of words, and when followed by another r : reproche, rale, brigade, drame, serre, horrible it is silent at the end of words of more than one syllable ending in er : abuser, gouter, charger, premier, mensonger S is pronounced hard at the beginning of words, and be- tween a vowel and a consonant : sable, serpe, passage; estime, reste, narcisse, masse It is pronounced soft like 2 between two vowels, ex- cept when it is the first letter of the second word in compound words : visage, ruse, asile, visible, phase; but belle-sceur, parasol, entresol, demi-siecle SC is pronounced like ss before e and i, and like sk before «, o, u, or a consonant : sceau, sceUrat, sciage, scission; scapulaire, scolastique, sculpture, scrupuleux is Reading of words with consonants. lire papa poli laboi'ieux honnete mal nous nager to read papa polite laborious honest evil we to swim palais bapteme phare quatre acoustique mercredi palact ftsptism light-hoase four ' acoustics Wednesday jaconas coup baptiser quietude eglise ans jaconet blow tc baptise quietude church years laisser laver quitter arroser radis rire mere car to leave to wash to leave to water radish to laugh mother for mer sable visage belle-soeur pas bras sceau sea sand face sister-in-law step arm seal scrofuleux reproolie marine clier cocker ruse frimas scrofulous reproach navy dear coachman cuiinlng rime baratte cirque cbarrette barbe choc ciseau machine chum circus cart beard shock chisel machine nicher papier drap compter pharmacie barrique to nestle paper cloth to reckon chemistry cask jardiuier nomade parade galop gateau phrase onze gardener wandering parade gallop cake phrase eleveu esclave sculpture priere former fleur passage table slave sculpture prayer to form flower passage table sol cygne 'heros quatorze que erreur amusement soil swan hero fourteen that error amusement pur quarante sur signe ■ paresse muse humeur pure forty upon sign laziness muse humour 'hideux bois poesie mur campagne eouvent qualificatif hideous wood poetry wall country often qualificative soigneux jaune histoire quoique salut fer digne careful yellow history though salute iron worthy qui ete quel quoi peu heure habitant qualite who summer which what little hour inhabitant quality prier magnifique 'hagard quel je plaigne 'hache to pray magniacent haggard which I may pity axe assurance habit querelle honneur 'honte re^u assurance coat quarrel honour shame received epargne ho:eime dose 'hauteur phrase sel 'haine saving man dose height phrase salt hatred usage ^us dignite 'hair humble Afrique. custom juice dignity to hate humble Africa 14 Peonunoiation of the Consonants (concluded), t is pronounced like s in the end syllable tie piecededby a vowel: diplomatic, minutie, prophStie also in the middle of words in the syllable ti followed by a vowel : partiel, ambitieux, nation, martial, beotien, impatience, factieux But t has its natural sound in the syllables and end- ings stion, xtion, tiS, tier, tiere, tieme, and in the end- ings tions and tiez of the tenses of verbs in ter : question, mixtion, amitiS, portier, litiere, giletiere, septieme, nous portions, vous portiez th is pronounced like a single t : theatre, theologie, thyrse X has the sound of gs at the beginning and in the middle of words : exercer, examiner, X^nophon, exemple it is pronounced like k when before ce and ci: exceder, excellence, excepter, exciper, exciter Linking of two words. The linking of two words is the pronouncing of the iast consonant of a word with the first syllable of the next word when it begins witha vowel or mute h. Linking only takes place between words closely connected by their meaning, as articles and nouns, adjectives and nouns, personal^ pronouns^ and verbs; Ex. : les'^amis, deux beaux'^oiseaux, ils'^ont parli. In linking d is^ pronounced like t, f like v, s and x like "'. ^^." '^ grand'^enfant, le mamais'^homme, neuf^ans, dix'^oiseaux. to staia distracted jeune the i ere young tea-pot valet troisieme servant third 15 Reading of Words with OoNSONAura. jet facade aristocratie laitier homme septieme thefltre throw front aristocracy milkman man seventh theatre tacher distrait que democratie portier cafetiere that democracy porter oollee-pot taffetas plat lit seditieux taffeta dish bed seditious exceder beaux assez zele to excede fine enough zeal vassal chaque zenitJi chez velours exercer quinze vassal every zenith at velvet to exercise fifteen maison excepter doux zephir nez Athenien house to except sweet zephyr nose Athenian impartial radieux isolement salade musician sultan impartial radiant loneliness salad musician sultan rat ambitieux imposant miserable collection superiorite rat ambitious imposing miserable collection superiority physique expedition radeau reussir escalade flux physics expedition raft to succeed scaling flow rassemblement hypocrite opposition crise majeste gathering hypocrite opposition crisis majesty Reading exercise on the linking of words. Nous^avons. Trois~oiseaux. Un petit*^ homme. We have Three birds A little man Ils'^eurent. Vous'^avez. Des^habits'^uses. Les^etats They had You have Some coats worn out The states Nous'^attendons^ Alfred. Ils^ont. Six'^heures. Est^elle We expect Alfred They have Six hours Is she ohez'^elle? Comment vous'^appelez-vous ? Deux^amis. at home How yourself do call you Two friends Il'^esf^ici. Mes'^enfants. Nos'^ennemis. Elles'^entrerent. He is here My children Our enemies They entered Un grand'^ami. II a neuf^ans. Avez-vous'^un mauvais'" A good friend He has nine years Have you a bad ouvrier ? workman 16 General Exceptions to the Rules of Pronunciation. (For reference, only.) 1. A is silent in— ao«M, Sa6ne, toosi (s/ pronounced. ) 2. B (final) is sounded in — club, nabab, rob. / 3. (final) is silent hi— accroc, banc, blanc, (^rc, eric, croc, icke^ escroi;, estomac, fianc, franc, lacs, marc, pgxfi, raccroc, (abac, tronc. Also in {He singular present o? the verbs vaincre and convaincre ; as in je vaincs, il convainc, etc. 4. & OH sound like g' in — second, drachme. . 5. D is sounded in — svd, Talmud. e. B is silent between g and a or o, when it serves to give tbe g the soft sound ; as in vengeance, pigeon, etc. 7. E sounds like i, if the first letter of a word, and followed by a double consonant; and in all words beginning vfithdess, as in. efi'acer, essarter, dessicher, etc., also in the word et (and). 8. E sounds like a at the beginning of the adverbial- termination em- ment, as in prudeinme nt, etc. ; e has also the sound of a in the- words/emme, sotennelya.ni their derivatives. 9. F (final) is silent in — imifs, cerf, cerf -volant, chef-d'oeuvre, clef,. (or cle), nerfs, ceufs. "^ 10. G (final) is soMuSfA in— grog, .zigzag. 11. o is silent iii.—doigt,T^s, signet, vingt. 12. "gn is pronounced har3 g^Wtn^^-agnat, cognat, gnSme, gndmon, igni, ignition,ignicole,impr6gnation,in^xpugnable,stagnant,stagnation. 13. L is silent in. — baril, chenil, coutil, fusil, gentil, outil, persil, sourcil. "~ "N 14. M is silent in—damner, condamner, auiomne. 15. P is sounded in — cap, cep, croup, group, hanap, jalap, julep, sale}]/ also in se^tembre, septuple. 16. p is silent in — corps, temps', printemps. 17. K is sounded in the end syllable er {e pronounced t:) of the following words of more than one syllable : — amer, belvMer, cancer, cuiller, cutter, enfer, fier, fraler, hier, hiver, magister, outremer, paler, and in proper names. 18. K is silent in — monsieur, messieurs. 19. s (final) is sounded in — atlas, biceps, bis, cassis, chorus, fll& (pronounce Jiss), gratis, iadis . l^, TncOs, rnars, mceurs, oasis, obus, omnibus, ours, papyrus, prospectus, rebus, tourn'evis, typhiis, vis, and in all nouns in us derived from the Latin. 20. T (final) is sounded in — abject, aconit, brut, Christ, chut, contact, correct, cobalt, difidt, dist/Hgt, direct, dot, est~{east), exact, fat, incorrect, indirect, infect, intellect, lest, mat, net, ouest, post,, prilirit, rip, strict, suspect, test, transit. 21. T in tie sounds like t in — ipizoolie, rdtie, sotie. 22. T in ti sounds like t in — chrUien, entretien, maintien, soittien ; and in bestial, bestiaire, vestiaire, galimatias, and their derivatives. 23. T in tier sounds like s in all the tenses 'of verbs in tier (except chdtier) ; as in balbutier, balbutiant, nous balbutions, etc. 17 24. ST is silent in— est (is) and Ji^ Christ, but is pronounced in Christ. 25. TH is sijent in — asthme, asthmatique, isthme. 26. U after qic, or 5'«, is sounded in — iquestre, iquidislant, 4quilaUral, Equitation, liqfMcr, qficsteur, quintuple, — argucr, aiguille, gkise, inextingXible, linguistique, and in all words derived from tne adjective aigu; as, aiguiser, etc. 27. U in qua sounds like the French ou in — aquarelle, aquatique, iquateur, Equation, quatuor, quatemaire, qinnquaginaire, and their derivatives ; and in all words beginning with quadr; as, quadrupide. 28. X (final) is sounded in — Aix, inde x, lynx, prifix, ailex, sphynx. 29. X sounds like z in — deuxiime, dixiime, sixi&me. 30. X sounds like ss in — Auxonne, Bruxelles, Cadix, soixante. 31. z is sounded in — gaz, and in words of foreign origin — Bodez, Susz, Cortez, Fernandez. 32. Etr sounds like the French u in the tenses of the verb avoir; as in,. feus, eu, quefeusse. 3. OB & oi, sound like (the French) oi in — mqelle, polle. 34. 01 sounds like o in — encoignure, oignon, ,empoigner, poignardr poignet. "^ ',' ~\ 35. ILL is not liquid but fully sounded in — Achille, codicille, distiller, inibicilliti, Lille, osdller, pupille, scintiller, titiller, tranquille, vadller. .; • " "" " 36. IL is liquid in — eutml, idbil, p4ril, grisil, gentilhomme, and some- times in cil and'g'nZ." ' ' "^ -37. AM, EM, IM, UM at the end of words are not nasal, and the m is sounded; as in — Abraham, album, etc. but they remain nasal in — Adam, dam, quidam, pq/rfum. 38. EMM at the beginning of words is nasal and sounds Kke en-m; as in emminager, emmener, etc. 39. BNT in the 3rd person plural of verbs is silent ; as in — ils parlent, elles parleraient. 40. EN is nasal in — enivrer, ennoblir, enorgucillir, ennui (and its de- rivatives). \ 41. EN sounds like aiTi (nasal) in — Benjamin, examen, m^tj^or, menwnlo. 42. EN sounds like inn in — abdomen, amen, Eden, gluten, gramen. Hymen, lichen. ~" 43. lEN (not ienn) in the tenses of the verbs venir and tenir, and their derivatives sounds like i-ain (nasal) ; as m—je mens, noui tiendroTis, etc. ~ 44. AEN & AON sound like an (nasal) m—Caen,faon,paon, taon, (some- times pronounced ton). Note : The nasal sound is generally wi-itten with m before p and h ; as in, empire, rompre, impirial. Consonants at the end of foreign proper names are generally pronounced, as in — Alep, Bagdad, FiricUs. 18 Division of Syllables. In Frenoli words are divided into syllables according to the following principal rules : 1. A consonant between two vowels commences the new syllable ; as, i-nu-ti-le, a-mi, pd-re, a-ca-dS-mie 2. When there are two consonants between two vowels one of them belongs to the first and the other to the second sylluble; as, ex-cep-ter, e-xer-cer, col-lec-tion, in-cor-po-ra-tion 3. Consonants however followed by Z or r are not added to the first syllable but commence the second; thus, ta-bleau, fa-ble, li-vre, oeu-vre Punctuation. The signs of punctuation are the same as in English, viz: (,) virgule, comma; (.) point, period; (;) point-et- virgnle, semi-colon ; ( : ) deux points, colon ; ( ! ) point d'ex- •cZama^i'on, note of exclamation; (?) point d'interrogation, note of interrogation. Parts of Speech. The rrench language contains ten parts of speech. Six are flexible : le substantif ov nom, the noun; l' article, the article; I'adjectif, the adjective; le pronom, the pro- noun; le verbe, the v^-b; and le participe, the participle. Four are inflexible: I'adverbe, the adverb; la proposition, the preposition; la co«/onc<«ow, the conjunction ; and Z'j'n- terjection, the interjection. Definition of the Parts of Speech. The Article (Particle) is a word used before nouns to limit or define their application; as, the man, Vhomme; the house, la maison a man, uii homme; a house, une maison, The Noun (le nom) is the name of anything which exists, or which we can conceive to exist, whether material or immaterial ; as, man, homme; house, nunson; virtue, vertu The Adjective (I'adjectif) is a word added to a noun to qualify or determine it ; there are two kinds of adjectives in ITrenoh : — 1. the qualifying adjective as in English ; as, a good boy, un bon gar<;o7i; the young girl, la jeune Jille ■2. the determinative adjective, in English ordinarily called pronoun; as, this boy, ca gar gen; which girl, quelle fiUe; my son, mon fits 19 A PnoNOUN (un pronom) is a word used instead of a novin ; as, ffe (John) is ricli, il (Jean) est riche; this is gooJ, ceci est bon The Verb (le verbe) is a word by which we affirm — 1. What a'lybody or anything does; 2. What is done to him or to it; 3. In what state he or it exists ; as, the man works, Vhomme travaille ; the boy was punished, U gargoH fut puni; the child sleeps, I'enfant dort The Pakticiplb (le participe) is so called because it partakes of the nature of the verb from which it is derived, and as- sumes in part the nature of an adjective ; as, a son protecting his mother, un fils protegeant sa mere; a hurnt house, une maison incendiee ; your letter is badly written., voire letlre est mal ecrite An Adverb (un adverbe) is a word which modifies a verb, an adverb, or an adjective ; as, he wrote well, il -icrivait Men ; he will be here soon, il sera bientSt ici ; my sister is as pretty, ma soeur est aussi jolie The Preposition (la proposition) serves to show the relation of a noun or pronoun to some other word in the sentence ; as, the book is on the table, le livre est sur la table; he sat behind me, il itait assis dcrriere moi A Conjunction (une conjonction) is a word which serves to connect the different parts of an extended sentence ; as, John and Jacob went out yesterday, Jean et Jacob sortirent hier; I cannot come, because I am ill, je ne puis pas venir, par- ceque je suis malade The Interjection (V interjection) is a word which, expresses any sudden desire or violent emotion ; as, Hushl^aiz/ chull ah! ah! alas! hilast \)ia,vo<. fort bien/ Numbers. There are two numbers in French the singular and the plural; the singular refers to one person or thing, the plural to more than one. Genders. There are but two genders in French, the masculine and the feminine; therefore things which are neuter in Eno-lish are in French either masculine or feminine. ° Eules to ascertain the gender of inanimate objects will be given laier on ; but we advise etudents never to learn a noun without placing either the definite or indefinite article before it, as this is by far the best plan for fixing the proper gender in the memory. FiEST Lesson. Premiere Legon. The ARTICLE and the NOUN. The Definite Article the is translated: le before a masculine singular noun beginning with a con- sonant; as. — lifrhre, the brother; U Uvre, the book. la before a feminine singular noun beginning with a con- sonant; as, — la saeur, the sister; laporte, the door. V before masculine or feminine nouns in the singular, when they begin with a vowel or h mute; as, — I'onch, the uncle; l'h6tel,{m.*) the hotel; Viglise, (f.*) the church; I'hdtesse, the landlady. les before masculine or feminine nouns in the plural; as, lesfrires, the brothers ; les sceurs, the sisters ; les Mtels («i.), the hotels ; les iglises (/.), the churches. FOKMATION OF THE PlUKAL OF NoUNS. 1 . — The plural of nouns is formed by adding s to the singular; as, — le Uvre, the book, les livres, the bookd ; le chat, the cat, les chats, the cats ; la sceur, the sister, les sosurs, the sisters ; la maison, the house, les maisons, the houses. 2. — ^Nouns ending in s, x, z do not change in the plural ; as, le Iras, the arm, les hras, the arms ; la voix, the voice, les mix, the voices ; le nez, the nose, les nez, the noses. The Verbs being of the utmost importance we shall add a portion of them to each lesson, independently of the other rules. The auxiliary verb avoir, to have. SiNGtrLAE. Indicative Present. Singular. 1st Person j'ai,(**) I have 2nd ,, tu as, thou hast „ J f il a, (m. ) he has '^'^^ " I elle a., (f.) she has Plural. 1st Person nous avons, we have 2nd ,, vous avez, you have 3rd filsont,(m.) 'ItJiey ' ' X elles ont, (/'. } j have ai-je, have I?{f) as-tu, hast thoui a-t-il, Aas he} a-t-elle, has she ? Plukal. avons-nous, have wet avez- vous, have yout ont-eiles, } ^"■'" ^^^^ (*) We Indicate the gender of nouns either by placing le before or m. (masculine) after a masculine noun, la before or/, (feminine) after a feminine noun. (**) je, ne, me, qiie, ce, se, etc. before a vowel become f, it', m', qu', c', s', etc. (t) In tlie interrogative form the pronoun is place! after the verb and a hyphen inserted; if the 3id pi^rson singular ends in a vowel, for euphony's sake, a ( placed between two hyphens is inserted (-t-). 21 The Vocabulary 1b to be learned by heart as these words will not be given again nose, nez m. price, prize, prix m. sir, 'monsieur m. (*) sister, sceur f. uncle, oncle m. voice, voixf. who, whom, qui yes, owi and, el (*) arm, Iras in. (**) book, livre m. brother, frire to. cat, chat m. church, iglisef. dog, chien m. door, jjorfe /.(*•) hand, mainf. herring, 'hareng m.(t) hotel, hdtcl m. house, maisonf. landlady, hdtessef. madam, madamef. mouse, sourisf. no, non Exercise No. 1. Translate the Singular and plural of the following nouns and artieles. 1. The brother, the brothers, — the dog, the dogs, — the nail {clou m.), the nails, — the sister, the sisters, — the cow (vachef), the cows, — the hand, the hands, — the child {enfant m.), the children, — the hotel, the hotels, — the church, the churches, — the story {histoire f), the stories, — the month {mois in.), the months, — the mouse, the mice, — the price, the prices, — the nut {noixf), the nuts, — the nose, the noses, — the book, the books, — the landlady, the landladies, — the herring, the herrings, — the voice, the voices, — the cat, the cats,— the fan {^ven- tail m.), the fans, — the arm, the arms, — the door, the doors, — the un- cle, the uncles, — the coat {haiit m.), the coats. He has, — have we? — have I? — you have, — have they (/.)? — thou hast, — has she? — they have, — we have, — has he? — have you? — 1 have, — have they? — she has, — they (/.) have. 2. Les frferes et les sceurs. Le chat et la souris. L'h6tesse a le chien. lis ont entendu^ la voix. Avez-vous lu' le livre ? Nous avons les maisons. J'ai vu^ I'^lise. A-t-il vu' rh6tel? Qui a les harengs ? Le bras et la main. L'oncle a donne'' le prix. Elle a deux' hotels. La maison a deux' portes. The cats and the mice. Have we the hooks ? He has two' uncles. The arms and the hands. 'VVho has seen' the hotels ? Have you the dogs ? The sister Las given* the prizes. Who has seen' the chur- ches? Has she the hemng ? The landlady has two^ houses. Who has heard^ the voices? The brother has the hotel. Has he the dog ? Yes, he has the dog. Have you seen' the cat, sir ? No, madam. (*) ProTi ounce ef — e; monstsur — me-si-eu (**) Students should always place the article before a noun they are learning, this being the best way to remember the proper gender : le hrcw, la forte, etc. (t) The fi when aspirated, i.e. to be pronounced, is indicated by an apostrophe ('h) and in this c^se le or la must he used and not V. I entendu, heard 2 lu, read 3 mi, seen 4 donn', given 5 devx, two 22 Questions on Grammar. 1. How is the definite artiole tJie rendered in French! %. When" is U used, when la, when V, and when lest 3. How is the translated before 'h (aspirated) ? 4. Vf'hat is the gender of a noun preceded by Z«, w?at when precedwl by lat. 5. What is the first and general rule for the formation of the plural -oi nouns? 6 . Which nouns do not change in the plural ? 7. When is the e oije Slided and an apostrophe placed instead? 8. What is the place ol the pronoun subject in the interrogative fonu of verbs in French ? 9. When is a t between two hyphens inserted after the verb f Conversation. Good morning, \ . Good day, J ^"^• Good evening, madam. Thanks, (thank you). Have you the book, madam ? No, sir, hisf'm^sisterhas the book. Has he seen {vu) his (son) uncle? Yes, sir. Has she the cat? So, madam, she has the dog. What {que) have they in {dcms) their Qeurs) hands ? They have four (quatrej herrings. Who has bought {achete) the hotel ? His (son) brother has bought the hotel. Has the dog (translate : the dog has he) the mouse ? No, it is (c'est) the cat which (qv4,) has the mouse. Have you heard (entendu) the voice ? Yes, I liave heard the voice. Has the church (translate: the church has she) two doors? No, the church has three doors, and tlie house has two doors. Has he paid {pay 6) the price asked (damandi) for (powrj the dog? Yes, he has paid the price. Bonjour, monsieur. Bonsoir, madame. Merci (je vous remercie). Avez-vous le livre, madame ? Non, monsieur, sa soeur a le livre, A-t-il vu son oncle ? Oui, monsieur. A-t-elle le chat? Non, madame, elle a le chien. Qu'ont-ils dans leurs mains! lis ont quatre harengs. Qui a acheti I'hdtel? Son fr^re a achete I'hdtel. Le chien a-t-il la souris? Non, c'est le chat qui a la soori* Avez-vous entendu la voix ? Oui, j'ai entendu la voix. L'^glise a-t-elle deux portes i Non, r^lise a trois portes, et la maison a deux portes. A-t-il paye le prix demande pour le chien ? Oui, 11 a paye le prix. 23 Reading Exercise ('■'') No. 1. Tout commencement est(24t)clifficile.Qu'avez-vouscla)is AB commencement is difficult What have you in votre main? J'ai un journal ivangaia. Qu'est-ce? A your hand I have a newspaper French What is that To qui appartiemt(43t)cela?Sor!t-ils riches? Etes-vous pauvre? whom belongs that Are they rich Are you poor II fait froid. Fait-il olaaud? Qui est la? Bonjour. It makes " cold Makes it warm Who is there Good day Bomsoir. Bonne nuit. Ou etiez-vous"hier(17)? J'etais'^a la Good evening Good night Where were you yesterday I was at the campagne. Je n'ai pas d'argent. Oiiest-il? Notre chat country I ,, have not of money Where is he Our cat a pris'^une souris. Parlez-vous fraiijais? Oui, un peu. has caught a mouse Speak you French Yes a little Pouvez-vous me comprendre? Pas du tout. Que desirez- Can you me understand Not at all What wish Tous? Vem'ZZez me donner mon chapeau? Je vous you Will me give my hat I you remercie. Sortirez-vous cette apres-midi? No«; je thank Will go out you this afternoon No I resterai chez moi. Le tej)ips(16)'^est trop froid. Aujourd'hui shallremain at me The weather is too cold To-day il fait tres chaud. Quelle heure est^il? II est dix'^heures. it makes very warm What hour is it It is ten hours Pourquoi venez-vous si tard ? J'ai manque le tra«m. Hon Why come you so late I have missed the train My frere ctait^aujourd'hui au theatre. Veut'Hez prendre un brother was to-day at the theatre Will take a tioge. N'oubliez pas de venir oe soir. Demai'ra soir scat „ Forget not to come this evening To-monow evening iious'^irons'^an concert. . Avez-vous deja dine ? Non, nous we sh.ill go to the concert Have you already dined No we ue dlii.iiis pas'^avant six'^heures. A demai'n. dine not before six hours To to-morrow (^) In order to assist the student in practising these exercises nasal and liquid sounds are ininted in italics, and the linking is indicated by a curved line, (t) The figure in parenthesis indicates the group amongst which the word is ii.rlduc'd un I'agns Ifi and 17. 21 Sboond Lesson. Deuxieme Legon. The Aetiole and the Noun (continued). The article is frequently preceded by prepositions as in Englisli; but the artiQles le and les, can never be pre- ceded by de, (of or from), or d (to or at), and the following contractions are used: du instead of de Ze") before a masculine singular noun be- au „ „ a Ze) ginning with a consonant; as — dufrire, of the brother. aufrlre, to the brother. du livre, of the book. au livre, to the book. des instead of de Zes\before masculine and feminine aux „ ,, a Zes/uomis in the plural ; as, — desfrires, of the brothers. auxfrircs, to the brothers. des sceurs, of the sisters . aux soeiirs, to the sisters. des oncles, of the uncles. aux ondes, to the uncles. des hdtesses, of the landladies. aux Mtesses, to the landladies. Obsekvation : la and I' are never contracted ; as — de la smur, of the sister. A la sxur, to the sister. de I'oncle, of the uncle. A Vonele, to the uncle. The form of the English Possessive : the father s hat, the girl'sbon- nits, Charles' book, etc. , must be altered when translating into French thus : the hat of the father, le chapeau du p^re ; tlie bonnets of the girl, les chapeaux de la fille ; the book of Charles, le livre de Charles etc. Formation of the Plukal of Nouns (continued). 3. — Nouns ending in au and eu talce x in the plural instead 01 S ; as, — le chayeau, the hat, les chapeaux, the hats. le neveu, the nephew, les neveux, the nephews. 4. — Nouns ending in al change this termination into aux; as, — le cheval, the horse, les ehcvaux, the horses. Vanimal, the animal, les animaux, the animals. The auxiliary verb Ure, to be. Iiidicative Present. je suis, lam i suis-jp, am It t\\ es, thou art I es-tu, art thou t il, elleest,, he, she is I est-il, est-eUe, is he, is she t nous sommes, we are I somnies-nous, are we ? vous Stes, you are gtes-vous, are you ? ils, elles sont, tteii.' are i sont-ils (elles), are they! Interrogative sentences, as : Has the aunt read the book? Are tM soldiers in the house! etc., must be changed in form, when trans- lating into French, thus : The aunt has she read the book, la tante a- t-ellc hi le livre! the soUieva are they hi tlie house, les soldats sont-ilsdans la maison! animal, aniinal m. aunt, tantef. tird, oiseau m. chair, chaise f. curtain, rideau m. fire, feu m. general, giiUral m. 25 hat (bonnet), chapeau ; officer, qfflcier m, horse, cheval m. [m. ' on, sur in, dans room, chambre f. knife, couteau m. I soldier, soldat m. nephew, neveu m. | street, ruef. newspaper, jour/Ml m. ] table, table/. niece, niicef. I where, o«. Exercise No. S. 1. Of the soldier, to the soldier, — of the dog, to the nog, — of the arms, to the arms, — of the rooms, to the rooms,— of the hotels, to the hotels, — of the churches, to the churches, — of the table, at{*)the table, of the hotel, at the hotel, — of the church, to the church, — the brother's book, — the aunt's cat, — the ofiSoer's dogs, — the landlady's chairs, — the sisters' house, — the curtain, the curtains, — of the knife, of the knives, — to the fire, to the fires, — the general, the generals, — of the news- paper, of the newspapers, — to the horse, to the horses, — the niece's bonnets, — to the animal, to the animals, — to the street, to the streets, — of the bird, to the birds. He is, — are we? — am I?^you are, — are they (/.)? — thou art, — is she? — they are, — is he? — have you? — I am, — has he? — are you? — we have, — we are, — I have, — she is. 2. La scEur a-t-elle vu^ le chien de la tante ? Les soldats du gene- ral sont dans la rue. J'ai deux^ neveux. C'est' le cheval de I'officier. Les journaux sont-ils dans la chambre? Nous sommes les nieces de rh6tesse. Avez-vous parle* au frere 1 C'est' le prix des chapeaux. Les livres sont sur la table. Le general a-t-il ^crit^ aux officiers ? J'ai parle^ k la soeur du soldat. Oii sont les rideaux? A-t-elle deux^ chiens? Avez-vous ecrit^ a I'hdtesse de I'oncle ? . L'offi c;er a-t-il va} les cheyaux ? Avez-vous vu' le livre sur la table? Has the aunt the uncle's knives? Are you the soldier's brother? Have you seen' the generals ? We have spoken' to the landlady's nephew. Has the officer seen' the newspapers ? Are the general's horses in the street? I have written' to the officer's niece. He has tvvo^ nephews. I have given* the birds to the soldier. The aunt's bonnet is on the chair. We have given' the curtains to the officer's sisters. Where are the aunt's cats? We have seen' the soldiers. I have written' to the uncle. Is she in the room ? Has the general's nephew given* the knife to the officer ? (*) at must be translated like to. I vUf seen 2 dmx, two 3 c'est, that is 4 parle, spoken 5 ecrit, written 6 donni given. as Questions on Grammar. 1. How are of the and to ike translated iDefore a masculine singular notm commencing with a consonant ? 2. How are of the and to the translated before a feminine singular noun commencing with a consonant ? 3. How are of the and to the translated before a singular noun, whether masculine or feminine, commencing with a vowel or h mute ? 4. How are of the and to the translated before a noun in the plural ? 5. Can the prepositions de or a precede the articles le or lest if not, what must he used instead? 6. What nouns form their plural by adding x ? 7. What nouns form their plural by changing their termination into aux'i 8. How do you translate into French, the brother's book, the dog's nose, the uncle's voice, Charles' hatl Conversation. Where is the uncle's hook ? The uncle's hook is on the chair. Who is in the father's room ? The aunt is in the father's room. Have yon seen the niece's bird? Yes, sir, the niece's bird is on the table. Has the landlady's nephew the knife? Yes, madam, he has the kuife. Have you read i}u) the paper, madam ? Yes, sir, I have read the papers which (qui) are on the chaii-. Is your brothe: (an) oflBcer ? Yes, madam, he is [a] general. Where have you seen (vu) the sister's bonnet ? We have seen her {son) bonnet in the brother's room. Is the soldier's dog in the street? No, madam, he is in the house. Hast thou seen the mouse in the room? Yes, I have seen the cat and the mouse. To whom {qui) have you given {domii) the curtains? I have given the curtains to the woman. Oh est le livre de I'oncle? Le livre de I'oncle est sur la chaise. Qui est dans la chambre du pere? La tante est dans la chambre du ( pere. Avez-vous vu I'oiseau de la nitee ? Oui, monsieur, I'oiseau de la nifeee est sur la table. Le neveu de I'liStesse a-t-il le cou- teau? Oui, madame, il a le couteau. Avez-vous lu le journal, madame ? Oui, monsieur, j'ai lu les joumaux qui sont sur la chaise. Votre frfere est-il officier ? Oui, madame, il est general. Oil avez-vous vu le chapeau de la sceur ? Nous avons vu son chapeau dans la chambre du frere. Le cliien du soldat est-il dans la i-ue? Non, madame, il est dans la maison. As-tu vu la souris dans la chambre? Oui, j'ai vu le chat et la souris. A qui avez-vous donne les rideaux? J'ai donne les rideaux alafemme. 27 Reading Exercise No. 2. Tout ce qui hrille n'est pas'^or. Ouvrez la fenetre. All thatwbicli glitters „ is not gold Open the window Fermez la porte. Oil demeurez-vous ? Nous demeuroMS Shnt the door Where live you We live &ans cette jolie maison. Qucmd'^avez-vous'^acliete cef^ in this pretty house Wlien have you bought this habit? Ou est votre soeur? EUe esf^allee se promener coat Where is your sister She is gone herself to walk avec sa tamte. Les jours'^augmejitent(39)semsiblement. Le with her aunt Tho days increase sensibly The temps(16Petaittres beau avawf^hierCl?). II ne fait pas'~~aussi weather was very fine thedaybeforeyesterday It „ makes not so froid^'en^jingrleterre que dcms le Nord de la Frowce. J'ai cold in England as in the North of the France I have oublie d'acbeter des ga«ts. Comment s'appellent(39)les sept forgotten to buy some gloves How themselves call the seven jours de la semaine? lis s'appellent: luwdi, mardi, days of the week They themselves call Monday Tuesday mercredi, jeudi, Teredredi, samedi et dimaiicbe. Quels Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday and Sunday What soJit les noms des mois de I'annee? Jawvier, fevrier, are the Tiames of the months of the year January February mars(19), avril,(36)mai,jm», jui'Het, aoiat(l), septeTObre(15), March April May June July August September ootobre, novembre et decembre. Lisez-vous des livres October November and December Bead you any books frangais? Oui, quelquefois. Lisez-vous'^a haute voix? French Tes sometimes Read you at loud voice Oui, toujours; car mo» professeur m'a dit que c'etait la Tea always for my professor me has said that this was the seule maniere d'acquerir une pronowoiatiore correote. only manner of to acquire a pronunciation correct Pouvez-voiis me compreiidre quand je parle frangais? Can you me understand wlien I speak French Oui, qtrarid yous ne parlez pas trop vita. Pourriez-vous Tea when you ., speak not too quick Could you suivre une conversation? Non, monsieur; mon^oreiZZe n'est follow a conversation No Sir my ear „ is pas'^assez^habituee a la prononciation de Yotre langue. not enough accustomed to the pronunciation of your language 28 Third Lesson. Troisieme Leqon. The Aetiole (continued) and the Noun (concluded). The Indefinite Article a or an is translated: -un before masculine singular nouns ; as, — unfrire, a brother; un animal, an animal. une before feminine singular nouns; as, — une Mtesse, a landlady ; une parte, a door. Note. — de before a vowel or h mute becomes d' ; thus, cCun, d'une, of a or of an Formation or the Plural of Nouns (concluded). Exceptions to the formation of the, Plural of Nouns. Exceptions to Rule 1. — a). Seven nouns ending in ou add x in the plural ; viz : fe Wjou, the jewel ; le caillou, the pebble ; le chou, the cabbage ; le genou, the knee ; le hibou, the owl ; le joujou, the toy ; le pou, the louse. — Plural: les bijoux, les cailloux; die. b). Seven nouns ending in ail form their plural by changing that termination into aux; viz : le bail, the lease ; le corail, the coral; I imail (m. ), the enamel ; le soupirail, the air hole ; le travail, the work ; le vantail, the leaf of a folding door ; le vitrail, the stained glass- window. — Plural; lesbaux, les coraux, eta. Exceptions to Kule 4. — Five nouns ending in al aids in the plu- ral ; viz : le bal, the ball ; le rigal, the feast ; le carnaval, the carnival ; iechacal, the jackal ; le nopal, the cactus. — Plural : lesbals, lesrigals, etc. The following four nouns form their plural irregularly ; viz : — Valeul Cm.), the ancestor; Plural: les aieux le del, the heaven ; ,, les deux I'ceilfm.), the eje; ,, les yeux le biiail, the cattle ; ,, les bestiaux However dels is used when it means skies, and in a few componnd nouns ; osils is used in (eils de bmuf, oval window, and cdls de chat, cat's eyes (jewels) ; aUuls is used in the meaning of grandfathers. The Auxiliary Verbs avoir, to have, and Sire, to be. I'm2Krfect. j'avais, I had | j'etais, I mas tu avals, thou hadst I tu ftais, thou wast il, elle avait, he, she had nous avions, we had ' vous aviez, you had lis, elles avalent, (*) they had il, elle etait, he, she was nous etions, we were vous 6tiez, you were ils, elles etaient,(*) they were Observation : Whenever negations, as : pas, not, rien, nothing, jamais, never, etc. are used with a verb, the particle ne is also reijulred. Ne can only be used with verbs, and must always precede the verb, as; je n'ai pas, I have not. ne suis-je pas, am I not ? n'avais-je pas, had I not? je n' Uais pas, 1 via.¬. <*) eni of all verbs in the Srd person plural is mute, (vide Exception 39.) ' 29 The ball, la balls plur ; les balles ,, ball (festival), le hal ; plur : les ials „ boy, le garfmi ,, child, V enfant m. „ daughter or girl, la fille the eye, I'ceil m ; plur : les yeux ,, father, le pire ,, garden, lejardin „ knee, le genou; plur . les genoux ,, letter, la lettre ,, man, I'homme m. the mother, ZamSrefm. ,, parents, lesparents-- „ pen, la plume ,, pencil, le crayon ,, son, lejils ,, watch, la montre ,, woman, to/cOTm« lor, pour or, o« Exercise No. 3. 1. A father, — a mother, — a pencil, — a pen, — of a son, — ofadau' French before every noun taken in a partitive (^) sense ; some or any is the translation of the partitive article, which is often omitted in English. The partitive article is in reality the definite article with the pre- position de (of) and is used in the same manner, viz. : du before a mascidine noun singular 1 commencing with-a de la ,, „ feminine ,, ,, ) consonant del' ,, any noun singular commencing with a vowel or h mute des ., ,, ,, plural ; as, — du rill (rti.), some or any wine de la viande (/.), some or any meat de I'ariedt {m.), ,, ,, money des plumes (J.), „ „ pens Give me some bread, meat, water, and apples. Donnez-moi du pain, de la vianJe, de I'eau, el ies pojiimes. De or d' takes the place of the partitive article du, d« la, de l\ des before a noun in the singular or plural : — 1. After a negation ; as, pas de viande, no or not any meat pas d^oiseaux, no or not any birds 2. After adverbs of quantity (like enough, much, etc.); as — assez d'hutk, enough oil combien de soldats ? how many soldiers 3. After nouns expressing a quantity, weight, measui-e, etc. (like a f/his.i, a cup, a pound, a dozen, two yards, etc.), corresponding here exactly with the the English of; as, — un verre de vin, a glass of wine une livre de viande, a pound of meat uiie couple d'oiseaux, a couple of birds 4. This is also generally the case if the noun in French is preceded by an adjective ; as, de bon vin, (some or any) good wine dejolis oiseaux, (some or any) pretty birds The Auxiliary Verbs avoir, to have, Hre, to be. Future. j'aurai, IsMll have [ je serai, I shall be tu auras, thou icill liave tu seras, thou wilt be il, elle aura, he, she will have il, die sera, U, she will be nous aurons, we shall have nous serons, we shall he vous aurez, you will have vous serez, you will be ils, ellee auront, they will have j ils, elles seront, they will be {•) the wovd paHiUve implies the idea of an indeflnite mrt of anvthin^ ■ Fv Give me >yme ireuil; here some ftrcati means a part or a portion of i)rp.-ifl° Vf ,'L youannpens? here any pens means an indefinite number of pens. Buy sonie ti'r coffee, sugar and apples, i.e some coffee, some sugar, some apples, means ■ Bay \ 2Zber^of apples! ^^^ °°^^ °^ *'"' °' ™'^''' °' ™S»^' "''^ ^ ^definite 33 the applij, la pomme ■ „ beer, la Mire , , tottle, la bouteilU „ bread, lepain ,, coffee, le cafi __^ cup, la tass^ enough, assez „ glass, le verre how much (how many), combien ' the ink, I'encref. ,, meat, la viande „ money, I'argentm. ,, oil, I'huile f. ,, paper, U papier the peur, la pain ,, pound, la livre ,f salt, le sel ,, sugar, h sitcrt ,, tea, le th6 ,, water, I'eauf, „ wine, U vin Ex.ercise No. 4. 1. Some (any) bread, — some (any) paper, — some (any) beer, — some (any) meat, — some (any) money, — some (any) ink, — some (any) books, — some (any) apples, — some cofifee, meat, oil, and pears, — paper, ink, and pens, — cups, bottles, andglasses, — beer, coffee, andmeat, — notany bi'ead, no* beer, — not any money, — no sons,— (some or any) good (6o»»e)ink, — (some or any) bad (mauvais) tea, — enough wine, — how much sugar J — many {heaucoup) pears, — a glass of water, — a cup of coffee, — a dozen (douzaine f.) of chairs, — enough paper, — some water, — a bottle of beer, — some books, — a pound of salt, — some (any) sugar and bread, — some newspapers, — no tables, — some (any) oil, — no beer, — some children. 'We shall have, — shall I have ? — he will have, — will they (/. ) have ? - -you will have, — wilt thou have? — will she be! — they will be, — thou wilt be, — will you be ? — I shall be, — shall we be ? — I shall not have, — I have not; — shall we not be? — we were not, — you have, — you will not have,— will you be? — we are not, — they will have,— were they(/.)? 2. Achetez^ une livre de sucre et une bouteille de vin. Aurons- nous du cafe? lis n'auront pas de the. Avez-vous de I'encre et des plumes? La m^re a assez de poires. Donnez-moi^ un verre Ac 1i:ere. J'aurai de bonne (good) huile. Voilii^ de I'eau et du vin. Combien d'argent a I'officier ? Qui a du sel? Combien de chaises avez-vous dans la chambre? J'ai de la viaude et du pain. Nous avons vu* des oi.seaax dans le jardin. Avez-vous de la hihxe, du vin, ou dii cafe? We shall have some coffee. Officers and soldiers are in the hoiise. Have they any money? Has he any apples and pears, bread and salt? Give me" a cup of coffee and a glass of water. I have not enough sugar. He has not any bread. How many cups of tea have you? There are* paper and ink. Has the general any bad {mauvais) horses? The father ■will be in the garden. Buy^ a bottle of oil and a pound of meat. Havi' you not any ink? Has she some pencils? Have you seen^ any animals! I have cot any beer. There is' a glass of wine. (*) So as well as not must be translated pas. 1 aehitez, buy 2 dfrnnez-mm, give me 8 ixAla, there is, th«re in 4 i™ i French, Gframmar 34 Questions on Grammar. What is the partitive article in French ? Is the partitive article similar to the definite article ? "What words in English are the translation of du, de la, etc. Are these words always expressed in English ? When must the partitive article be used ? What is the meaning of partitive ? How ia the partitive article rendered after a negation or an adverb of quantity, or before an adjective ? When is de used instead of the partitive article ? Conversation. What (que) have you in your (the) hand? I have a pear and some bread in my (the) hand. How much tea did you buy (have you bought (acTieM) ? We did not buy any tea, but (mais) we have bought a bottle of wine, two (deux) pounds of meat, some coffee, some ink and some paper. Do you prefer (prifirez-vcms) a cup of coffee to a glass of wine ? Thank you, madam ; we prefer {nous prifiTOns) coffee. Have you seen (mi) the uncle's knife ? Yes, madam, I have seen the uncle's knife on the table. Who has given (donni) some oil to the \iVo\&' {petit) boy ? I have not given any oil to the boy. What have you done (fait) with (avec) the money ? We have bought some apples, some sugar, and some salt. Has the officer's son some pens ?- No, sir, he has no pens, but some pencils. To whom have you given a watch ? I have given a watch to the woman's niece. For whom have you bought a garden ? {have not bought any garden, but we have bought a house. Qu'avez-vous dans la main ? J'ai une poire et du pain dans la main. Combien de th^ avez-vous aohete ? Nous n'avons pas acheti de the, mais nous avons aohete une bouteille de vin, deux livres de viande, du cafe, de I'encre et du papier. Pr6ferez-vous une tasse de caf^ h. un verre de vin ? Merci, madame; nous pref&ons du cafe. Avez-vous vu le couteau de I'oucle? Oui, madame, j'ai vu le couteau de I'oncle sur la table. Qui a donne de I'huile au petit gargon ? Je n'ai pas donne d'huile au petit gargon. Qu'avez-vous fait avec I'argent ? Nous avons achet^ des pommes, du Sucre et du sel. Le fils de I'ofiicier a-t-il des plumes ? Non, monsieur, il n'a pas de plumes, mais des crayons. A qui avez-Tous donn^ une montre? J'ai donne une montre k la niece de la femme, Pour qui avez-vous achet(5 un jardin ? Nous n'avons pasachete de jardin mais nous avons aohete une maison. 35 Reading Exercise No. 4. Translate this and the following anecdotes. Words which the student has already learnt are omitted and indicated by a . and those which are the same or nearly the same in English as in French, are indicated by- a — Esope et le piiton. .^sop . . foot-passenger Esope, le cdlfebre fabuliste, dtait tr& pauvre. II faisait iEsop . celebrated fabulist . very poor . made sowvenf^k pied des'^excuraions d'une ville i, I'autre. II oXteu on foot . — . town . another rencontia, un jour un piston : celui-ci I'arreta et lui dit : met . day . foot passenger this him stopped . to him said " Voudriez-vous me dire quelle distance me s^pare de la "Would . — tell what — ^ separates . ville qui est sur la ooUine." Esope prit"tt«'^air stupide et town which . . . hill ^sop took . — stupid repondit : " Vous n'avez qp.'k marcher, et vous^y arriverez." answered . „ but to walk . . there will arrive L'etramger sourit et dit : " J'e sais parfaitememt cela ; mais . stranger smiled said . know perfectly that but je d&irerais savoir cambien. de temps il me faudra pour should wish to know . . time — wiU be necessary for faiie le chemm." Esqpe parut s'offenser et vi^ita, les make . way ^sop appeared himself to offend repeated memes paroles. " Cet'~'liomme n'est pas tout k fait lucide : same words This man „ . . quite lucid il ne me dira riem," pmsa le pietom ; et il continua sow „ — wiU tell nothing thought . foot-passenger . . continued his cherain. Quelques minutes plus tard il emtendit qu'om way Some — later . heard that one I'appelait : il se retourna et vif^Esope que le suivait. him called . himself turned round . saw iEsop him followed " Que me voulez-vous," lui demanda-t-il ? " Je veux voua "What from me wish . to him demanded . . wish dire, dif^Esope, que vous serez'^k la ville daras^une lieure et to say said ^sop that . will be . . town . hour demie." "Et pourquoi ne m'avez-voua pas r^pondu imm^- a half . why „ me . . < answered irami diatemewt." " O'est parce qu'il toit n&essaire que je visse diately. This . because it , necessary that should see comment vous maroLiez.'' how > walked 36 Fifth Lesson. Cinquieme Le^on, Words wMch are the same or nearly the ^ame in Englisb and French. Words which are the ending as follows : in al Ex, in ble „ same, are nearly all nouns or adjeotivea,. in ce in ade in ude central, filial table, visible distance, vice sirinade, parade habitude, solitiide in age in uge in ent in ion Ex.: dge, village dduge, refuge prudent, diligint nation, station^ commission Remark. — Letters which are accented in French drop their accent in English* Words which undergo a slight modification. change that ter- /ary ruination into aire ory oire cy ce English ty t6 words ous ... ^ ... eux ending our en .0-^ ... eur in or eur io ive ir Man ien Ex. : solitary — solitaire. glory — gloire clemency — cUmence- charity — chariti pious — pieux favour —faveur doctor —docteur comic — comiqui active —actif historian — historien Many English verbs ending in ise, ize or use, end in French in iser, user. — Examples: realise, rialiser; exercise, exercer; abuse^. abuser; amuse, amv^er. J change this Verbs end- | ate ' ending into er ingin tfy fier moderate — modirer modify — modifier Note. — There are few exceptions to the above rules; they will greatly ass''.iifc the student in rapidly acquiring a large number of words. Verbs avoir, to have, and Hre, to be. Present Conditional, je serais, I should be j'aurais, I should have tu aurais, thou wouldst have il, ello aurait, he, she would have nous aurions, wc should have vous auriez, you would have ils, elles auraient, they ivotild have tu serais, thou, wouldst be il, oUe serait, he, she would ba nous serions, we should be vous seriez, i/ou would be ils, elles seraient, they would b« ■apppentice, apprenti m. ass, driG m. boot, bottef. cousin, cousin m, ■«ousui(f.), coitsine/. day, jour m. foot, pied m. frieud, ami m. 87 great, grand here, ici large, graiid master, maitre m. morning, maim m. pair, pairef. shoe, Soulier m. [m. shoemaker, cordonnier small, petit there, la time, leinps (16) m. to-morrow, demain trade, inetier m. useful, utile very, tris work, travail m. Exercise No. 5. 1. Geaeral(")(*) — respectable — conscienee — es'talade— aptitude— TieritageC) — febrifuge(') - accident — admiration — military — history — decencyC) — beauty — curious — ardour— horror — aquatic — adjective — co- median(') — to idealize(') —to refuse — to accelerate(")— to stupefy (') — moral— anniversary — honorable — captivity — musical — obligatory — similitude — adversary — city — pretentious(') — to analyse — evidence — (') — firmament — naval— original — capable — inactive — illusion — to mo- derate(') — lion — charitable — calamity — visage — motion — direction — vanity - instrument — to iudemnize — colonnade — rage — imprudence — ' notary — civic — notable— adversity. Tou would have— I should be — would he hstvel — they would be — thou wouldst be — I should have— she would not be— ^we should not have — we should be — should we have ? — ^would you be ? — we should have — thou wouldst have— she would be— he would have — would they (f.J have! — you would be —he would have —we should not be— wouldst thou have? — should I be — we should not be — she would have — -Iheyfrn. Jwould have. 2. Les bottes et les souliers de votre^ ami sont k la station. Nous aurions attendu'' mon' cousin. Ceci'' est obligatoire. Cette {this) ca- pitulation serait honorable. Votre action u'est pas charitable. Vous ne seriez pas sur' le rivage. Seraient-ils dans la cite. Je ne se rais pas capable de^ refuser. The instrument is very useful. The boots of the general are in the room. He has a large foot. This' would be a great (grande) im- prudence (/.). It would have a great {grande) importance (/.) My* friend would be impatient. The shoemaker would not have finished' the boots. We should have a good master. You would be capable to'" simplify the question. His'' apprentice was very laborious. Your'^ cousin has a very good trade. You will have a pair of boots and his" •cousin (/.) a pair of shoes. "Would he have the time ? He would not be there. We should be here to-morrow morning. His charity is im- mense. The ass is an animal which" is very useful. 1 voire, yours 2 attendu, waited for 3 ?>io?i, my 4 ceci, this 5 sur, on 6 de, to 7 tliis, ce 8my,mo7l9finishe(l,/i7iil0to,Toud, fire; premier, first, premiire; singulier, singular, singidiire The Auxiliary Verbs avoir, to have and Hre, to be. Pa,st Indefinite. (Compound tenses in French are formed with the tenses of an auxiliary verb and the past participle). J'ai eu, I have had tu as eu, thou hast had il, elle a eu, he, she has had nous avons eu, we have had vous avez eu, you have had Us, elles ont eu, ihey have had J'ai ete, I have been tu as et^, t!wu hast been h, elle a ete, he, she has been nous avons ete, we have been vous avi'z ete, you have been ils, elles ont ete, they have been ad^ncp, avis m alone, spaU L anxiou s, anxieux 'bad, m auvais courageous, co^tragcux ■embarrassment, ambar- ^rnigfori -nnp, inforhmef. eood, Sore [ras m. andwritingj^criiitre/. 41 hard, dnr honest, Itonv^te impossible, impossible lame, boitextx last, dernier neighbour, voisin m. news, nouvellef. no, 7!on old, vintx person, pcrsminc/. positi\'e, pnsi/.if prudent, prudent small, p'tii too, trap town, villef. Exercise No. 6. Write the feminine of the following adjectives. 1. Patient — savant — ^gal— obtus — renomm^ — ardu — hardi — agresto — mignon — coquet — solennel — vermeil — ^payen — secret — audacieux — doux — r^oreatif — dernier — rond — ^malade — sujet — obstin^ — fameux — faux — opulent — inactif — ^vieux — content — dur — ^lourd — actuel — facile — net — vertueux — roux — r&erve — comiqiie — laborieux — serein — com- plet^'droit — triste — naturel — ^boiteux — habile — lent — religieux — plein — ^juste — ancien — lib&al — vicieux — discret — incline — intelligent. We have been — I have not had — ^they (/.) have been — have we had ? — I have not been — he has not had — ^we have not had — thou lias*, bad — ^he has had — thou hast been — have you not had ? — you have not had — have they (m. ) had? — has she been? — have they (/. ) had? — ^you have been — ^have I not been? — ^have we had? — have they (m. ) not been! — they (m.) have been — we have not been. 2. La maison est grande. La ville est petite. Ma' mfere 4tait seule. J'ai ^te prudente. Nous avons eu le courage. Sa^ sceur est boiteuse. Cette' chambre ne serait pas trop grande. Elle a ete gen^- reuse(*). Cette' ville est tr^ vieille. La nouvelle est positive. Son* ecriture est tr^s mauvaise. Cette personne ^tait trfes honnete. Mon' eeriture n'etait pas bonne. II est impossible (de) refuser un avis h. notre* voisin dans son* embarras et dans son iufortune La demi&re nouvelle est bonne. Gene vlaade est dure. Cette personne est trte discrete. She has been happy. My' room is not very large. He had had patience. This^ woman is old. Our" sister is good. His'" misfortune IB great. This^ person is anxious to see*' the town. My mother was alo le in her'^ large room. This handwriting is very bad. You have been prudent (/.) in your^' advice. She was very courageous in her'* mbarrassments. The news is too positive. The old woman is lame. Is this^ person honest and discreet? (*) Some adjectives which are not found in the vocaT)ulai7 must he looked for oa the opposite page. I ma, my 2 sa, his 3 celte, this 4 son, his 5 mon, my 6 Twtre, our 7 my, ma 8 this, cette 9 our, noire 10 his, son 11 to 8«e, de voir 12 her, sa IS yoiu:, V08 14 her, ses ^YPMrK frff * 2* 42 Questions on Grammar. 1. How many kinds of adjectives are there in French ? 2. Whatisthe difference between qualifyinganddeterminativeadjectivest 3. How do adjectives agree with the nouns they qualify or determine f 4. How do adjectives form their feminine in French? 5. How do adjectives ending in e mute form their feminine ? 6. What are the endings of adjectives which double their final consonant in the feminine ? 7. Give the adjectives in et which form their feminine by changing that ending into ete t 8. How do adjectives ending in x form the feminiaet 9. Gire the exceptions to the above rule. 10. How do adjectives ending in / form the feminine! 11. How do adjectives ending in er form the feminine t Conversation. Who (ju») has written {ierit) this (eetU) letter! My {man) friend has written the letter. To whom has ibis letter been (it£) written {(criU)% It (<2{s) has been written to my father. Is the handwriting of your {votre) friend very bad? No, it is very good. Is it possible to write (ctcertre) a letter with (atec) this bad pen ? No, it (c') is impossible. Is it (j7) possible that the old shoe- maker should come (vienru) to- morrow? It {ce) would he possible if (s") he were {itait) not lame. Have you seen {vu) this news iu the last newspaper! Yes, I have seen the news in the newspaper which (qrie) the postman (facteur) brought (a apporU) this (ce) morning. Is the news positive? Yes, it (elle) is quite {tend d/aii) ti'ue {vraie). Qui a eerit cette lettref Mon ami a ecrit la lettre. A qui cette lettre a-t-elle 6be ecrite? Elle a ete ecrite k mon pjre. L'ecriture de votre ami est-eUe tres mauvaise ? Xon, die est ti«s bonne. Est-E possible d'eCTire une lettro avec cette mauvaise plume? Non, c'est impossible. Est-U possible que le vieux cor- dounier vienne demain? Ce serait possible s'il n'dtait pas boiteux. Avez-vous vu cette nouvelle dans le dernier journal ? Oui, j'ai vu la nouveUe dans le journal que le facteur a apporte ce matin. La nouvelle est-elle positive ! Oui, elle est tout a fait vraie. 43 Reading Exercise No. 6. UnThomme avait reiju une lettre et voulaif^y repowdre ■ received . . wished to it to answer Pour son malheur il ne pouvait pas'^eorire et il se trouva his misfortune . ,. could . write . . himself found dans I'embarras. II alia voir un de ses voisins et lui . embarrassment . went too see . . his . , him demanda consei7. "Allez chez notre vieux sacristain" lui asied . go to . . sexton to him dit le vois4«; "il ecrit souvewt des lettres pour d'autres said • . . writes often . . . . other gens." L'homme suivit son'^avis, alia chez le sacristara people . . followed his advice went to . sexton et lui expliqua soii"~embarras. " Je suis faohe de ne pas . him explained his embarrassment . . sorry of ,, pouYoir ecrire votre lettre " repondit le sacristajn ; " je to be able to write your . answered . sexton Buis toiteux." L'komme fut^etonne. " Vous^Stes boiteux," astonished . . , dit-il, " et cela vous^empeclie d'ecrire ma lettre ! ecrivez- Baid . . that you prevents . to write my . write vous done avec le pied?" "'Non," repliqna le sacrista«n then with . . no replied . sexton "j'ecris^avec la raain ; mais mon'^eoriture est si raauvaise . write with . . but my . .so que je puis seul la lire. Les gens'^etaient^obligesdem'en- that . can , it read . people . obliged . me to voyer cbercber pour que je lusse les lettres que j'avais send fetch for that I should read. . which . ecrites. Maintenaret, comme je suis paralyse, il m'est written now as . . paralyzed . tome . impossible d'aller trouver ceux qui ont refu mes lettres ; — to go to find those who . received my et comme la personne a qui vous voulez'^ecrire habite una as . — . whom . wish to write inhabits autre ville, elle ne pourrait pas venir daws ma maisow. other . . „ could . come . my n est done mpossible que j'ecrive votre lettre, comme then — . . maywrite your , as VOUS me le demandez." — It ask a Sevbnth Lesson. Septi&me Legon. Qualifying Adjectives (.eontmued). Formation of the Feminine [continued). Rule VII. — Adjectives ending in eur and derived from E resent participles by changing ant into eur form their feminine y changing r into se; as, trompaur, deceptive, trompeuse; menteur, liar, meiiieuse. Exceptions. — Femg'cttr, avenger ; enchanteur, eiLcha,ntei ; p6cheur, sinner, and some adjectives used only as law terms as, demandeur, plaintiff &c., although derived from present participles, have for their feminines vengeresse, encTianteresse, picAeresse and demanderesse. Rule VIII. — Adjectives ending in ^rieur form their fem- inine by the simple addition of e to the masculine; as, s^i/pirieur, superior, supirieure; infirieur, inferior, infirle/wn Remark. — Majewr, major; mineur, minor and meilUur, better follow the same rule. Rule IX. — Adjectives ending in teur not derived from present participles form their feminines by changing tewr into trioe ; as, admirateur, admirer, admiratrice; criaieur, creator, criatrice Rule X. — Adjectives in au and ou form their feminines by changing au into elle, and ou into olle; as, leau, beautiful, lelU; nouveau, new, nouvelle ; mou, soft, moUe Eemark. — ieau, nouveau, mou, fou (mad) and cieMa; become 6eZ, ouvd, mol, fol and vieil before a masculine noun beginning with a jwel or mute A. Rule XI. — The following adjectives double the final con- sonant and add an e to the masculine : nul void nnlU | gros large grossR | ^ais thick ipaisse sot silly sottit gras fat grasae Uls tired tasse gentil nice gentille ] has low basse I exprls express exprissc Rule XII. — The following adjectives are irregular long long Umgue public public puhliquz caduc decrepit caduque turc Turkish turque grec Greek grecque Mbreu Hebrew liebraique - aigu* acute aigue frais fresh fraiche tec dry s^che blaihc white blanche franc fi-ank francKe tiers third tierce favari favorite favorite devin guesser devineresse malin malicious ma^tpne binin benign bhiigne coi still coite iraUre treacherous traitresse Present Indicative of the verb donner, to give, (First Conjugation, including all verbs ending in er. ) je donn-e,(t) I give donni-je, do I give! tu donn-es, tliou givest donnes-tu, dost thou give il donn-e, he gives donne-t-il, does he give nous donn-ons, we give donnons-nous, do we give f vous donn-ez, you give donnez-vous, do you givef ils donn-ent, they give donnent-ils, do they give ? je ne donne pas, I da not give tune donnes pas, th,ou dost not — il ne donne pas, he does not — nousnedonnonspas,wed07io(— vous ne donnez pas, youdo not— ils ne donnent pas, (A«y (Jo itoi— (*) All adjectives ending in gu take the diseresis on the e (ej in the feminine. (t) The oidlngs have been separated from the root by a hyphen and niuiit bo placed after the root of any verb of the same conjug,ition ; as, —je varl-e 1 suoak ■ tu nuxrch-es, thou walkest; U chant-e, he sirgs. &c. 'ft 45 answer, r^ponsef, clever, habile cow, vachef. doctor, doikeivr m. dress, roief. vj exercise, exercice m. gentleman, monsieur nealth, santif. ill, inalade lady, damef. lesson, lc(}onf, nothing, rien physician, midecin m. pretty, joli quick, vite red, rouge song, chanson f. to-day, aujoiird'hui to like, to love, aimt, to sing, chanter to speak, parler to walk, -marcher visit, visits f. well. Hen with, avec Exercise No. 7. Write the feminine of the following adjectivet. 1. Eieur — int&ieur — gte&ateur — jumeau — fou — reclameur — ven- geur — majeur — consolateur — beau — sot — blanc — aigu — malin — uul — frais — caduo — contigu — enchanteur^gentil — joueur — expr^a — see — henin — gros — favori — mineiir — mon — las — gras — blanc — p&heur — ^pais — franc — public — devin — ^meilleur — bas — ambigu — nouveau-long. We give — do I give? — you do not give — do they (/.) give? — he gives — thou givest — they (/.) do not give — it (/.) gives — does he give! — I speak — we like — I give — do we give ? — they (m. ) do not give — do you give? — I do not give— you give — she walks — they (/.) sing — she does not give— do we speak ? — they (m. ) give — doest thou give ? — do they (m.) give? — ^we do not give — do they (m.) sing? — she gives — she likes. 2. La dame a eu une visite. Le medecin parle hien. Vous mar- chez vite. Mon^ pfere donne une robeK*) blanche" h ma^ petite cousine. Ma voisine est la scBurJ jumelle" de ce' monsieur. Donuez-voua une meilleure pomme h votre* fr^re ? Je ne donne pas la grosse poire au petit garfon. Avez-vous une vache!" grasse" ? Nous chantons au- jourd'hui. Dounent-ils leurs^ exercices au professeur? Qu'%vez-voua dans votre main ? — Rien. Leur' vaohe est malade. EUe chante bien. We sing to-day with your^ sister. My' cousin walks very quickly. Myi" dress is white and red. They (m.) give some large apples to the little girl. She was a great friend of my^" aunt. This^^ is my favorite^'D songa. Her^^ answer was ambiguous. Do you give this^' long lesson to the little boy? This^' girl is very clever. You speak well. The lady is ill ; she has received" the visit of the physician. My^" mother gives these^' apples and these pears to the little boy and to the pretty little girl. Oh.. a indicate that tlie word marked a must be placed before tlie word marked & 1 mon, my 2 met, my 3 ee, tliia 4 votre, your 5 lenrs, their 6qu', what 7 Uwr, their 8 your, votre 9 my, mo7i 10 my, ma 11 this, cette 14 received, regu 15 my, ma 16 tliese, ces 12 her, sa 13 this. 46 Questions on Grammar. How do adjectives ending in eur derived from present participles form the feminine ? Give the adjectives which change eur into eresse in the feminine. Which are the adjectives ending in ewr which form the feminine hy adding « to the masculine ? How do adjectives ending in teur, not derived from present participles, form the feminine ? How do adjectives in au and ou fonn the feminine 1 Give the forms used instead of heau, nouveau, mou,foiL and vieux before masculine nouns beginning with a vowel or a mute h. Give the feminine of gentil, gros, gras, ipais, sot, nul. Give the feminine of frais, sec, blane, long, public, favori, malin. What is the sign which must be placed on the final e of the feminine form of adjectives ending in j'm in the masculine ? Conversation. Where (o4) is the lady ? The lady is in the i-oom with the physician. Is she ill ! No {non); but {mats) she wishes (d^re) to have his {son) advice on (sur) the health of her (so) daughter. Is the doctor clever ? Yes ; a gentleman told me (m'a dit) that he was very clever. Do you like the dress of this (cette) little girl ! Yes, I likes it" (f ) (very) much (beaucoup). Do you walk quickly ? No, I do not walk very quickly. Have you seen iyu) my {rrum) neighbour's cow ? Yes, it is very pretty ; it is brown and white. Have you received (repw) an an- swer from your brother ? Yes, sir ; he is in very good health. Is he always {toujours) with your (voire) sister in the country (d la campagne) ? No, he is alone now. Oi est la dame ? La dame est dans la chambre aveo le medecin. Est-elle malade? Non, mais elle desire avoir son avis sur la sant^ de sa fille. Le docteur est-il habile ? Oui ; un monsieur m'a dit qu'U etait tris habile. Aimez-vous la robe de cette petite fille? Oui ; je I'aime beaucoup. Marchez-vous vite ? Non, je ne marche pas trhs vite. Avez-vous vu la vache de mon voisin ? Oui, elle est trte jolie ; elle est brune et blanche. Avez-vous refu une reponse de votre frere ? Oui, monsieur; il est en trfes bonne sante. Est-il toujours aveo votre sreur ^ la campagne ? Non, il est seul maintenant. 47 Reading Exercise No. 7. tine dame avaifun soin exager^ de sa aanti. Elle a care exaggerated . her ^tait dans la plus grande -inquietude, au sujet de la plus greatest uneasiness on the subject . . most i^gfere mdisposition et envoyait'^immddiatement diercher slight — . sent immediately to fetch le docteuT. Ce midecin ^tait^Mn'^homme tres habile et — this . . . , . clever . avait consdqueniment'^ine grande clientele. 11 lui dtait consequently . , practice to him done trfes d&agr&vble d'etre d&ange inutilemsnt de ses'^ then . disagreeahle . to be disturbed uselessly from his autres'^occupations. II rdsolut de corriger oette dame de other — . resolved to correct sa manie. Un jour qu'elle avait remarqu^ une taclie rouge her mania . . that . . remarl^ed . spot sur sa maim, elle le fit'^ausgitot'^appeler. II vint, regarda on her . . him made at once call . came looked at la main et dit : " vons^avez trfes bien fait de me faire venir . said , . . well done of — to- make come aujourd'liui." La dame fuf^epouvantee en I'entendant frightened on him hearing parler^ainsi et lui demanda si elle 6tait dangereusement speak thus . him asked if . . dangerously malade. "Pas le moi»s du monde," r^pondit le docteur. least . world answered . — "Mais si vous'^aviez'^attendu jusqu'i demain, la taclie but if . . waited till to-morrow . spot aurait certainement diaparu sans mon traitemerat et j'aurais certainly disappeared without any treatment perdu le prix de cette visite." La dame comprit probable- lost . . . this visit . . understood probably ment la legon, car le m^deci'n, aprfes'^avoir raoontd cette , , for . . after . related this anecdote, ajoutait que la dame ne I'avait jamais fait^ — added that . . ,, him . never made appeler, depuis ce jour-li, sinon lorsqu'elle ^tait r^ellement call since that - there but when , . really malade. 48 Eighth Lesson. Huitieme I,ef0i>- Qualifying Adjectives (continued). FOKMATION OF THE PLURAL. Rule.— Adjectives form their plural according to the rvJea giYen for nouns. (Lessons 1, 2 & 3.) Exception 1. — Adjectives ending in eu take s in the plural instead of taking an x ; as,— bleu, blue, bleus; feu, defunct, /erts 2. — The following adjectives ending in al take s in the plural instead of changing aJinto aux; they are very seldom used in the plural. /atal fatal I glacial glacial I natal natal fined final | jovial jovial | naval naval aad a few othen very little used. Degrees of Comparison. There are three degrees of comparison of adjectives : the positive, the comparative and superlative. The positive is the adjective it'ielf, without any comparison between the noun which it qualifies and any other noun ; as, cet homme est pauvre, this man is poor The comparative is the degree which indicates that a com- parison is made between the object qualified by the adjective and one or several other objects of the same kind. Comparatives are formed in French by placing the adverbs piws, more, moins, less, aussi, as, before the adjectives. cet homme est phis gmiretuc que mm, this man is more generous than I cet homme est Tnoiiis ginereux que moi, this man is less generous than I cet homme est aussi gitUreux que moi, this man is as generous as I It may be seen from these examples that than, as well as as, at the beginning of the second term of the comparison is translated que. The superlative is the degree which indicates that the object qualified by the adjective possesses the quality in a very high degree {superlative absolute) or in the highest degree [supeniative relative). The superlative absolute is formed by placing tres, fort or bien, veij before the adjective ; as, cet homme est tr^ pauvre, this man is very poor The superlative relative is formed by placing the article le, la, let before the comparative ; as, cet homme est le plus g&n&reux, this man is the most generous les hcmmes les plus sages, the wisest men Imperfect of the verb donner, to give. Je donn-ais, I gave or I was gicing tu donn-ais, t!wu gavest il donn-ait, ho gave nous donn-ions, we gave vous donn-iez, you gave ils donn-aient, they gave doxijaeiis-je,didIgiveoT teas I giving donnais-tu, didst thou give donnait-il, did he give donnions-nous, did we give donniez-vous, did we give donnaient-ils, did they give beautiful, beau blue, bleu coat, habit m. debt, detief. end, bout m. finf. family, fam ilUf. flower, j^ei«- /. glove, gant m. 49 London, Londres m. month, mois in. new, nouveau painter, peintre. m. painting, tableau m. perfect, parfait poor, pauvre ribbon, ruian m. liah, riche soon, bientdt sound, son m. ^um, somme f. tall, grand to give, donntr wide, large young, jeune Exercise No. 8. 1. The tall* men" — the talP women" — the beautiful flowers: — someblue* coats" — someblue* dresses" — the beautiful gardens— the- nasals sounds" — alarger street— the largesthouse— a wide* river" — the widesti rivers" — a more intelligent!' gentleman"— some more intelligenti- ladies" — a very rich* friend"— some very old bats — the bad debts — the poor'' families" — some beautiful flowers — some richer'' men". He gave — we did not give — did I give ? — she did not give — he^ sang— did we give ? — thougavest — he hid not give — you did not sing — they (m.) walked — they (m.) did not sing — we gave— didst thou give?— did you speak ? — you did not give — did he give ! — I gave— we walked — did you give ?— they (/.) did not give — I spoke — you gave — did she- speak ? — they (m.) gave — thou didst not give — did they if.) give? — I did not give. 2. Le peintre a envoye' de tr^s beaux tableaux k mon'' ami. Ma'- soeur aime les rubans bleus. Les nouveaux regiments ont des habits- rouges. Mon^ p^re a des chevaux moins beaux quo les vStres. * Les- maisons de la nouvelle rue sont trfes belles. Les rues du uouveau Paris sont plus larges que les rues de Londres. Les fleurs de votre' jardin sont d'une parfaite beaute. Mes^ frferes donnaient (des) avis k leurs'' amis, Les couteaux que* vous donniez a mes^ sceurs etaient aussi bons. que les miens.^ Donniez-vous des^" fleurs k mon^ ami. . He will pay^^ his^^ debts at the end of the month. These^' flowers- will soon* be" perfect. These^^ paintings are less beautiful than those. ^^- My^^ brother is as rich as I.^* My^^ father was the tallest of the family.. The sounds of my^^ instrument are more beautiful than those." Lon- don is larger than Paris. These^^ gentlemen" are very rich. The songs, which^* he sang were very pretty. We did not give any blue* ribbonsa- to the youngest girl. She will pay this^° sum* soon". They (m) gave their™ old coats to the poor. These" gloves are less pretty than those, i* This^' painter is very young. _ !, sent 2 man, my 3 ma, my 4 Us votres, yours 5 voire, your, 6 mes^ my 7 leurs, their 8 que, which 9 les miens, mine 10 des, any 11 will pay, paiera 12 his, ses 13 these, ces 14 those, eetta-lct 15 my, mow 16 I, Ttwi- 17 gentlemen, mesneurs 18 which, qu' 19 this, cette 20 their, leurs, 21 this, ce^ 60 Questions on Grammar. 1. How do adjectives form the plural? 2. How do adjectives ending in eu form the plural? 3. Give some adjectives ending in al which take s when used in the plural. i. How many degrees of comparison are there in adjectives? 5. Give an example of an adjective used in the positive ? 6. What does the comparative of an adjective indicate! 7. How are comparatives formed in French ? 8. AVhat does the superlative indicate? 9. How is the superlative ahsolute of an adjective formed in French 10. How is the superlative relative formed in French 1 Conversation. "Where does the painter live (demeii/re) ? The painter lives in the new street. Has the painter finished {fini) your {voire) portrait ? Yes, it is {c'est) a veiy good paint- ing. In which {guelle) room is your portrait 1 It is {il est) in my father's room. When (quand) will you be in (4) London? ^ I shall beS therea (y) at the end of the month. Will you be in Paris* soono ? I shall be there in twelve (douze) days and your brother in a month. t&ie his {ses) ribbons blue or red J They are blue, white (blancs)- ajxi. red. He will pay (jiaiera) a large sum of money to my father. How much will he pay? Two thousand {deux mille) francs. Is he richer than you ? ^o, I am much {beaucoup) richer than he {lui). Oh. demeure le peintre ? Le peintre demeure dans la nou- velle rue. Le peintre a-t-il fini votre portrait? Oui, c'est un tris bon tableau. Dans queUe chambre est votre portrait ? n est dans la chambre de mon pfere. Quand serez-vous k Londres! J'y serai k la fin du mois, Serez-vous bientdt h, Paris ? J'y serai dans douze jours et votre fr^re dans un mois. Sesrubanssont-ils hieus on rouges? lis sont bleus, blanos et rouges. II paiera uno grosse somme d'ar- gent k mon pere. Combien paiera-t-il! Deux mille francs. Est-il plus riche que voua? Non, je suis beaucoup plus riche que lui. 51 Reading Exercise No. 8. Cn'^homme, trfes riche mais'^aussi avare que riche, but . miaerly desiranf^avoir son portrait, s'adressa h Mra'~"artiste de wishing . his — himself addressed . . — talent et lui promit de le payer genereusement si !• — . him promised of Mm to pay generously if portrait etait d'une ressemblance satisfaisante. Le peintre — ... lesemblance satisfactory . painter se mif^a I'ouvrage et, au bout de quelques mois, il avait^ himself put . . .... some acheve un tableau qui ne laissait rien^a desirer, ni pour finished . . which „ left nothing . desire neither le fini du trava«7, ni pour la ressemblance qui etait parfaite. . finishing . . nor . . resemblance which . perfect Mais roriginal essaya d'obtenir une diminution sur le prix but . — tried of to obtain . — on . . convenu, et voyant que I'artiste etait resolu a ne pas cedar, a^eed . seeing . . artist . resolute . „ . to .yield il lui declara qu'il pouvait garder son tableau : car il se him declared . . could keep his . for .to himself disait que, ne pouvant le vendre a personno, le peintre said . not being able it to sell . nobody serait bien^oblige de le lui donner vaeillenr marobe. Que well obliged to it him . cheaper what fit le pej'ntre? II fif^encadrer le portrait, y mit^une did . painter . made frame . — on it put inscription : " je suis^ioi pares que je ne paie pas mes — . . here because . „■ pay my dettes," et le plaga au-dessus de la porte de sa maison. . It placed above . . . .his Or, I'original etait connu de tout le monde et bientof^il jiOTP , — . known . all . world . soon etait devenu la risee de la ville entiere. Alors le Croesus become . derision . . . entire Then . — ne put resistor au ridicule et se hata de payer la somme not could resist . — . himself hastened to pay . . qu'il avait refusee auparavant. which. . refused before 52 Ninth Lesson. Neuvieme Legon. Qualifying Adjectives C concluded). Dbgkees of Comparison of Adjectives (concluded). There are three adjectives in French which form their comparatives and superlatives irregularly, viz : Ion good mcilleur better le meilleur the best jnoMvaisiiaA . j>jV« worse Upire___Ji!a&JSiSsi, petit little, small moindre less, smaller le moindre the smallest The corresponding adverbs are also irregular ia the for- mation of their comparatives and superlatives: iien well mieux better le mieux the best 9?utZ badly pis ^ worse lepis^ — ihejsais^ j?«M little moijis less fe moijts the least Eemaek 1. — The regular comparatives and superlatives of mau- vais, petit and mat are also used. Ex.: ce pain-d est plv^ mauvais que Vaiiire, this bread is worse than the other ce livre est le plus petit, this book is the smallest il icrit plus mal que moi, he writes worse than I 2. It must be noticed that meilleur and mieux are both translated better; pire and pis, petit and peu, moindre and mains also translate the same English words worse, little and less. In order to know when he has to use either of these words, the student must refer to the definitions of the parts of speech. Meilleur, pire, petit and moindre are adjectives and consequently must be be used when better, worse, little and less qualify nouns. Ex. : ce pain est meilleur que le vdtre, this bread is better than yours ce livre-d est pire que celui-ld,, this book is worse than that cet endroit est plv^ petit que celui-lA, this place is smaller than that mA)n chapeau est petit, my hat is small --_ jlfieira, i)is, ^cii and moi?M are adverbs and will be used when JeWer-, worse, little and less determine verbs, adjectives or adverbs. Ex. : il lit mieux que inoi, he reads better than I il chantejplus mal que son frlre, he sings worse than his brother il parte peu, he^speaks little nous voyageons mains souvent que vous, we travel less often than you Place of Adjectives. The place of adjectives in French is generally after the nouns. However some adjectives, principally those which are of one or two syllables, like hon, grand, beau, joli, petit, mau- vais are placed iDefore the noun. As a rule, the longer word is placed last. Future of the Verb donner, to give (continued). je donn-erai, I shall give tu donn-eras, thou wilt give il donn-era, he will give nous donn-erons, we shall give vous donn-erez, you will give Us donn-eront, they vrill give donnerai-je, shall I give douneras-tu, wilt thou give donnera-t-il, will he give donnerons-nous, shall we give donnerez-vous, will you gioe donneront-ils, mil they give bed, lit m. business, affaire f. care, sfmei m. clerk, coTnmis m. climate, climat m. contented, content country, pays m. dish, plat m. S3 grape, raisin m. \ gun, f%isil m. '}oy,joief. joyful, joyewK 'kind, esp&cef. laziness, paressef. milk, lait m. ' o'clock, heuref. parcel, paquet m. reason, raisonf. salary, salaire m. thing, chose f, to eat, manger to find, trouver I ^c e, vice m. workman, ouvrier m. Exercise No. 9. 1. A better dish — the best milk — a worse climate — the worst weather — a smaller book — the least care — he speaks better — you sing the best — she dances badly — she sings worse — he sings the best — I walk little — we speak less — they (m. ) walk the least — the best workmen — a better gun — the best dish — a smaller bed — 1 eat very little. We shall give — ^wiU you give? — ^he wiU not give — I shall walk- shall we sing ? — he will love — thou wilt give — shall I give ? — we shall not give — will he speak ? — wUl he give ? — you will not give — I shall give —win you sing? — he will walk — I shall not give — will you walk? — you will give — will they (/. ) give ? — wilt thou give ? — they (m. ) will not give — she wiU not sing — he will give — they (m. ) will give — shall we give ? — ^thou wilt not give — we shall not speak. 2. Nous donnerons la meilleure plume i votre^ fils. II donnera la plus mauvaise pomme i son^ fr^re. II sera content de' la moindre chose. II avait un* des meilleurs chevaux. 11 est de la pire esp^ce. II mange peu. Vous donnerez moins k votre^ voisin. II chante le inieux de tous' ses* amis. Get' oiseau mange moins que le n6tre'. La paresse est le pire de tons" les vices. Cette' maison est plus petite que la vfltre'". Je donnerai le meilleur de mes" fusils Ji mon''' cousin. Nous marcherons moins demain qu'aujourd'hui. Cef enfant est trfes petit. She wiU sing better to-morrow. He was better than his" brother She spoke little of that" business. She will dance less in that" town. Will you speak a little with me^' t She wUl not speak to your^' cousin. 1 shall give less to my'' new clerk. The apples are better in your'* country. He will give his'^ best grapes to our'" uncle. His'* reasons are worse than ever^". His'' bed is better than mine^'. This^^ work, man had the least salary. We shall eat little : the least thing will be sufficient^. This^ parcel is very small. He gives less than I-^ Give me^* some better wine. 1 voire, your 2 son, his 3 de, with 4 «», one 5 tows, all 6 ses, his 7 cet, thia 8 fe 7i6ire, cil;: 9 cette, this 10 le, la vdtre, yours 11 mes, my 12 mon, my 13 his. so7( 14 that, eelte 15 me, moi 16 your, voire 17 my, mon 18 his, ses 19 our, noire 20 ever, jamais 21 itiine, V mUn 22 this,' cei 28 will be sufficient, sujira 24 this re 25 I, moi 2d give me. donn/:z-nwl. 54 Questions on Grammar. 1. Wliat are the three French adjectives which form tieir comparatives and superlatives irregularly 1 2. Give the comparatives of those three adi'eotives? 3. What are the three adverhs which are irregular in the formation 7f their comparatives and superlatives ? 4. Give the superlative of those three adverhs? 5. What are the adjectives and adverhs of which the regular forms of comparatives and superlatives can also he used? 6. What are the English words which are hoth adjectives and adverbs and are translated by two different words in French ? 7. When must meilleur, pire, petit and moindre be used? 8. When must mieux, pis, peu and mains he used? 9. What is generally the place of adjectives in French? 10. What are the adjectives which are placed before the nouns ? Conversation. Where did you find this parcel? found this parcel in the street. Where was it ? It was before (devant) the door of my (num) father's house. Was the money upon (sv/r) the bed ? No ; it was upon the table. Is your (votre) father's clerk con- tented with {de) his {son) salary? Yes ; he is very contented. What {qu') have you eaten at dinner {dtner)? I have eaten some meat, some bread, apples and grapes. Why (pourqum) is the workman so (si) joyful? Because he has earned (gagn^ a good salary. At what (qtielle) o'clock will yon eat this evening ? At sti (six) o'clock, if {si) my father has (tst) arrived {arrimS). Will your brother be here (ici)t I hope (espire) so (que oui I Ou avez-vons tronv^ ce paquet ? J'ai trouve ce paquet dans la rue. Ou^tait-il? II itait devant la porte de la maison de mon p^re. L'argent ^tait-il snr le lit ? Non ; il ^tait sur la table. Le commis de votre pire est-il content de son salaire ? Oui ; n est trfa content. Qu'avez-voixs mange k diner? J'ai mang^ de la viande, da pain, des pommes et des raisins. Pourquoi I'ouvrier est-il si joyeux ? Parcequ'il a gagne un bon salaire. A quelle heure mangerez-vous ce Boir? A six henres, si mon pere est ar- rive. Votre frire sera-t-il ' J'espfere que 66 Reading Exercise No. 9. Un'^ouvrier avait deux fils : I'un d'eux^etait wnTentant * . two . the ODe . them bow et diligewt qui se levait tous les mati'ws h six~lieures ; — who himself raised all . . at six I'autre, qui etait paresseux, restait dans son lit jusqii'a . other who . lazy remained . his . . until dix'^heures. Un matin I'enfant laborieux trouva devant ten . .... — found before la porte de la maison un paquet oontenant dix'^eous ; et containing ten crowns naturellement il en fut tree joyeux et apporta I'argent'''^ naturally . ofit . . . . brought son pere, qui partagea sa joie. Celui-ci alia directemenf^ his . who shared his . this one went directly h, la ohambre de ses^enfants et y trouva le paresseux qui . . . . his . . there found . lazy who etait^encore couche. II I'evei'ZZa, lui montra rargent'~'et still laid down . him awoke him showed . money lui dit: "Kegarde ce que ton frere a trouve dans la rue. him said look that which thy . . found Mais pourquoi est-il si heureux ? c'est parce qu'il se leve but why . . so happy tliis is because . himself raises chaque matin a six'^h.eures. Tu ne trouveras jamais rien every . . six . , „ wilt find never nothing de semblable, puisque, h dix'^heures, tu es'^enoore dans of similar since , ten , . . still ton lit." Le jeune gar5on qui n'etait pas'^encore parfaite- thy . . , . who ,, . . yet perfectly ment Teveille, se frotta les yeux'^et repondit: "Vous awaken to himself rubbed . . . answered avez tout a fait raison, mon pere, et je ne vous contredirai altogether right my . . . „ you shall contradict pas. Mais, ne croyez-vous pas que celui qui a perdu le but „ believe ... he who . lost paquet qui contenait son'^argent aurait bien mieux fait de which contained his . . much , done to rester comme moi dans son lit. II serait plus ricbe de remain like me . his . • . . , , dix'^ecus." ten crowns 56 Tenth Lesson. Dixihme Legon. Determinative Adjectives. NUMEKAL AdJEOTIVBS. Numeral adjectives are of two kinds : the Cardinal Numeral •adjectives and the Ordinal. Cardinal Numeral Adjectives. Cardinal Numeral adjectives merely indicate the quantity; as inngt hommes, twenty men; trente-dx Uvres, thirty-six books. They are called Cardinal because they are the principal, those from which others are derived. 1 Vh, one 2 Deux, two ■3 Trois, three 4 Quatrt, four 6 Cinq, five •G Six, six 7 Sept, seven 8 Suit, eight 9 Neitf, nine 10 Dix, ten 11 Onze, eleven 12 Douze, twelve 13 Treize, thirteen 14 Quaterze, fourteen 15 Quinze, fifteen 16 Seize, sixteen 17 Dix-sept, seventeen 18 Dix-huU, eighteen 19 Dix-neuf, nineteen 20 Fingt, twenty 21 ViTigf et un, twenty-one 22 Vingtdeux, twenty-two 23 Vingt trois, twenty-three, &c. 30 Trente, thirty 31 Trente et un, ttc. , thirty-one, &c. 40 Quarante, forty 50 Oinquante, fifty 60 Soixante, sixty 70 Soixante-dix, seventy 71 Soixante et onze, seventy-one 72 Soixante-douze, seventy-two &c. 80 Quatre-mngt, eighty > 81 Quatre-vinqt-un, eig^hty-one^&c. 90 Quatre-vingt-dix, ninety 91 Quatre-vingt-onze, ninety-one 92 Qtiatre-vingt-douze,niaetj-twoSiO 100 Cent, one hundred 101 Cem<-M», onehundredandone, &c 1000 Mille, one thousand 1,000,000 Un million, one million Remarks — 1. Cardinal numbers are invariable except quatre-vingt, eighty, and cent, hundred, multiplied by another number, when not followed by another number. — Ex. : quatre-jyingts hommes, eighty men ; 4rois cents soldats, three hundred soldiers. Exceptions. — Cent et vingt are invariable at the end of dates, Ex. : Van mil huit cent, the year 1800. 12. Mille, only takes an s in the plural when it means miles. Ex, : il y a trois milles d'ici, it is three miles from here t 3. Million and milliard are considered as nouns, and always take J an 5 in the plural. — Ex. : deux millions d'hommes, two millions of men ; cinq Tnilliards de francs, five milliards of francs. 4. Mil is used instead of mille in dates. Ex. : Van mil-huit cent-quatre-vingt-deux, the year 1882. Conjugation of donner, to give Jedorm-eTdiisC), I should give, de viande." — "Et qui done lui avait donne cette vian "e ?" . . ■ who then to it . given this r — " Personne, si ce n'est vos pauvres chevaux." — ' Kod. nobody if this . . your . . oui clievaUx aussi s/jnt-ils done morts ? Expliquez-vou ." — also are . then . explain yours If " Certainement; les pauvres'^animaux sont morts de fa igiia certainly , . . . ■ — pour avoir trop porte d'eau." — " Et a quoi cette eau etait- too much carried . . .to what this elle destinee ? " — " A eteindre I'lncendie de votre maisom. " — destined to extinguish . fire . your "L'tncendie de notre maison!" — "Oui, vraiment; parsnito Are . our . . indeed by consequeneu. de la negligence de la servante, qui avaifoublie d'eteimdre- — . . maidservant who . forgotten to put out les torches."— "De quelles torches voulez-vous parler?" — — . what — wish " De celles qui avaient servi aux funeraiHes de votre mere."' those which . served . funeral . your " Que dites-vous ? ma mere est morte ! et vous ne me le- what say . my . . dead . . ■. — disiez pas'^immediatement 1" said . immediately 60 Eleventh Lesson. Onzieme Leqon. Numeral Adjectives (concluded). Ordinal Numeral Adjectives. Ordinal numeral adjectives are so called because they in- •dioate the order or the rank of persons or things. They are formed in French by adding ikme to the cardinal numbers ; as, troisiime, third formed from trois, three ; dixiime, tenth from dix, ten. Exbept : premier, first and second, second. Uhiivie can only be used after vingt, trente, quarante, cinqucmte, soixante, quaire-vingt, cent and mille. The / of neuf, nine, is changed into v in neuviime, ninth. The final e of cardinal numbers is suppressed in ordinal adjectives ; as, — quatriime, fourth from quatre, four ; irentiime, thirtieth from trente, thirty ; a M is added after the q of cinq, five : cinquitme, fifth. The following is a list of Ordinal Numeral Abjeotivbs. .Premier,-itre (f.) first J)euxi^me or second, -e (f) TrdsUme, third [second QvMritnw, fourth ■CinquUine, fifth ^ixikne sixth SeptUme, seventh Huitiiime. eighth NeuvUme, ninth JJixiime -' tenth OnzUme, eleventh Douziime, twelfth TreizUme, thirteenth Qaatorziime, fourteenth ■Quinziime, fifteenth SeiziiTne, sixteenth ZHx-septi^me &c., seventeenth Vingtiime, twentieth Vingt-et-unUme Exercise No. 11. 1. The second volume^the sixth house — the ninth chapter — the- twelfth tree — the fifteenth letter — the nineteenth line — the twentieth year — the thirty-second carriage — the forty-fifth book^the fifty-first birthday — the sixteenth of May — the seventy-first regiment — the eightieth battalion — the ninety-third day — the hundredth anniversary — the thousandth part — the second of January — the third of March^ the first of AprU — Charles the second — Henry the first. He has given — we have spoken — they (f.) had walked — have you spoken? — they (wi.) will not have sung — I shall have given — we should have spoken — had she walked ? — they (m. ) would have given — we shall have spoken — has he given ? — he would not have given — shall we have spoken? — you had sung — would she have found — we had not found. — we had given — have you walked? — I had not given. 2. Ma^ deuxifeme sceur etait avec mon^ frfere h, Paris. J'ai donne- le premier volume Ji votre' cousin. II etait dans sa* quarante-septifeme- annee. J'avais trouve votre' oncle dans la vingt-septi^me avenue. Le seizi^me chapitre de ce^ livre est tr^s bien &rit^. Vous trouverez cela'^ k la viugt-huiti^me ligne. La cinquifeme maison de cette^ rue est trfes belle. Henri quatre a ete un trfes grand roi de France. Je verrai* votre^ mfere le'° trois AvriL We had walked the first day. I shall see'' his'^ aunt (on) the se- cond of January. I like the tenth chapter of the book ; but I do not like the(*) eleventh. I was then'^ in my'* fortieth year. I have served''' in the ninety-ninth regiment. It is'" her" thirty-first birth- day. Have you read of '^ the death of Charles the first. I shall come'^ (on ) the third of March. Four is the fifth part of twenty. He came-' yesterday^' for the third time^^. 1 ma, my 2 mi, it is L Ge is also used to translate it and they when the verb Stre is- foUowed by an adjective, when this adjective refers to an idea mentioned precedingly, but not to a noun. Apprenez d, nager, a' est tris utile, learn how to swim, it is very useful. II. — Geci, this, and cela that, are formed from the same demonstrative pronoun ce, to which the adverbs ci, here, and Id,, there, have been added, in the same way as they are to nouns, preceded by demonstrative adjectives (See page 64). Ceci me plait plus que cela, this pleases me more than that. Je vous donnerai ceci ; mais vous me donnerez cela, 1 will give you this, but you will give me that. Geci and cela can only be used in speaking of things or refer- ring to whole sentences. This and that used in a general sense as complements of verbs are always translated ceci and cela. Je ferai plui6t ceci que cela, I will rather do ftisthan that. (*) However personal pronouns ai-e used when the noun -which follows the vert* Ure is preceded by the indefinite article, which is not translated ; as, He is a doctor. II est riudecin. to announce, annoncer better, meilUur convenient, coTmnode to cost, coMer dear, cher easy, facile French, franqais \f. gOTemess, gouvemarUe 81 happiness, ioriheur m. industrious, laborieux more, plus never, jamais night, nuitf. to occupy, oc(yuper only, seulement to perceive, apercevoir ^ p o st man, faeteur m. sight, vuef. still, encore than, qiie to think, penser thae,foisf. tongue, languef. to work, travailler Exercise No. 16. 1. This is my brother. — This is my sister. — These are my nephews^. — Those are my nieces. — This wUl be difficult. — That would he very dear. — This was very convenient. — This is what (that which^) 1 think. — He is my friend. — She is my neighbour. — It is a good dog. — They are my cousins (m. ). — It is well. — It is you. — This is better than that. — Do^ this. — Do that. — I like this and you like that. — He gives me that. — This pleases^ you. (*)They (/. ) received — ^you received — did I receive ? — he did not receive — I perceived — did you receive ? — I received — we did not receive — we perceived — they did not perceive — she perceived — did he receive ? — he received — didst thou receive ? — you did not receive — she received —I did not receive — you perceived — we received — she did not receive — did we receive? — did they (m.) receive? — they {/.) did not receive — thou reccivedst — did I perceive? — thou didst not receive — They (m.) per- ceived — did they (/. ) receive? — he did not perceive — they (m. ) received. 2. C'est mon p^re. C'est ma m^re. Ce sont des soldats. C'est lui. C'est une femmo heureuse. Ce sont des enfants laborieux. C& n'est pas ce que* vous m'avez dit°. Ceci me plait plus que cela. Ceci est facile ; cela est difficile. Donnez-moi cela. Ceci coute plus cher* que cela. II donne ceci a mon frere et cela k ma soeur. Je recevais cela chaque jour. Vous receviez ceci. C'est moi. Est-cevous? Ce- n'est pas mon ami. Etait-ce son frfere ? Recevez cela. He is an officer in the French army. She was a governess in my cousin's family. This is a good book. This is what (that which) you gave me the other day. I received this and you received that. That costs twenty-two pounds. I have given that to the postman. 1 give you this and that. Do what (that which) you have promised.' This will be the first time. She was a very good woman. It is a pretty sio-ht. Those are my boots. I have said^ that to the soldier. What* do you take'": this or that? This is a very convenient^ housed . Sh& is a pretty girl. 1 which, Qite 2 do, faites 3 pleases, plait 4 q^ie, which 5 dit, said 6 plus cher, dearer 7 promised, promis 8 said, dit 9 what, que 10 do you take, prenes-vous (•) See the Imperfect of the verb recevoir, to receive (Supi>lement, p.p. 12, 18 & 19)b. 82 Questions on Grammar. 1. What are demonstrativo pronouns? 2. Give the four pronouns which translate this! S. Give the four pronouns which translate thatt 4. How do you translate thesei 5. How do you translate iAose ? 6. What is the difference hetween ce adjective and ce pronounf 7. Before what words can ce be used ? S. When does ce translate Tie, she, it, theyt 9. When does ce translate it and they, the verb Stre being followed bj an adjective? 10. What is the derivation of ced ? 11. When can ced be used to translate this, after a verb? Conversation, How do you find this? I find this better than that. ~How much does this cost? This costs three pounds. What is the price of that ? That is worth (vaut) thirty pounds. <3ive me this. No, I shall give you that. Is it cheap ? So, it is dearer than the other. Who (qui) received (has received) this? It is the gentleman who occupies the rooms on the first floor. Who is the most industrious, your brother or you ? (It is) my brother. Tell me (diles-moi) if the governess finds her rooms convenient. I do not know (je ne sa/is pas) (that). Here is (void) the postman. For whom are the letters ? This is for my father ; those are for my cousin. Comment trouvez-vons ceci? Je trouve ceci meilleur que cela. Combien coute ceci ? Ceci cofite trois livres sterling. Quel est le priz de cela? Cela vaut trente livres sterling. Donnez-mbi ceci. Non, je vo\is donnerai cela. Est-ce bon marehe? Non, c'est plus cher que I'autre. Qui a regu ceci? C'est le monsieur qui occupe les chambres du premier 6tage. Qui est le plus laborieux : votre frfere ou vous? C'est mon frere. Dites-moi si I'institutrice trouve ses chambres commodes. Je ne sais pas cela. Voioi le faoteur. Pour qui sont les lettres t Celle-ci est pour mon p^re; celles- IJi sont pour mon cousin. 83 Reading Exercise No. 16. Lord Macartney avait'^occupe une positiore hoDorifique — — ... — honorary rarmee et il se va«tait nore seulemerat de n'avoir boasted . . . „ . jamais rien demawde, mais^erecore d'avoir refuse les faveurs anything . . ... — . — qui lui avaienf^ete offertes. II ne connaissait pas, disait- wliioli . . . offered . „ knew . said il, de plus grand bonheur que celui d'etre iradependawt et any . . . .... independent de faille ce qui lui plaisait. Le roi, ayawt~ete jnstruit de to do . which . pleased . . . informed cela, voulut voir si cette opinion etait sincere. Un jour wished to see . — . — . . done il le prif^a part et lui deraanda mysterieusement s'il then . . took aside . . . mysteriously . . savait I'espagnol. " Now, Sire," repowdit Macartney, mais knew . Spanish . . answered — je I'apprendrai immediatememt, si cela fait plaisir a voire shall leam immediately . . does majeste." "Oui, vraimewt," repliqua le roi, "je vous le replied ... co?isej7?e, et vous'^aurez'^a vous'^en felioiter." Macartney advise . . . . yourself forit to congratulate — cojiolut de cette simple comversatiora que le roi avait Vin- concluded . . simple — ... . . tention de lui corefler quelque importawte mission diplo- — . . entrust . important — — matique. II se mit a^travai'ZZer jour et nuit, ettrois mois . himself put .... apres'^il annon^aifau roi qu'il savait parfaitement la langue perfectly espagnole. " Tant mieux," repondit le roi, " cela vous So much the better . . • • • permettra de lire Don Quiohotte dans I'original." will allow . - Quixoto . . - 84: Setbnteenth Lesson. Dix-septi&me Legon. The DerQonstrative Pronoun (conchidedj. III. — Gelui-d, this, is derived from ce, this, lui, lie aad ei, here. It is used in speaking of persons or things every time it is necessary to indicate that the person or thing pointed to is of the masculine gender and singular number, and is nearer to the speaker than another person or thing; celui-ld (that-he- there) being used to point to the farther. Vous voyez ces deux chevaux : celui-ci est plus cher que celvi- in. You see those two horses : this one is dearer than that. Celui-ci and eelv/i-lA are often translated the latter and tlu former. Mon p^re et men frfere sont partis ; celui-ld, va Ji Paris et celui- ci va k Rome. My father and brother have departed ; the former goes to Paris and the latter goes to Rome. Ceux-ci, these, and ceux-ld, those, derived from ce-evx-ci or Id refer to a masculine plural noun. Avez-vous vu les officiers et les soldats ; ceux-lA, out de plus beaux uniformes que ceux-ci f Have you seen the officers and soldiers ; those have finer uniforms than these. t-ci, these, or celles-ld, those, ce, elks, ci or Id point to a feminine plural noun. De ces fleurs, celles-ci sont plus belles que celles-ld,. Of these flowers these are more beautiful than those. IV. — Celui, celle, ceux, celles, derived respectively from ce- lui, ce-elle, ce-eux, ce-elles are used in the same manner as celui- ei, celle-ci, etc., but before relative pronouns and prepositions only, the adverbs ci and Id being no longer necessary to point more accurately. J'aime cette maison, mais je prefere celle de mon pfere. I like this house, but I prefer that of my father (my father's). Ces livres sont iut&essants; mais je prefere ceux que vous m'avez donnes hier. These books are interesting, but I prefer those which you gave me yesterday. Celui, celle, ceux, celles translate indifferently this or that, and these or those. They often translate the one or the ones and the personal pronouns he, she, him, it, they, them before relative pronouns. Co n'est pas celui que je peusais. It is not the one I thought. Jc connais celui qui a dit cela. I know him who said tliat. author, autew m. bill, notef. to buy acheter cake, gdtewu, m, clear, clair coin, pitcef. cold, froid to compose, composer 85 to deceive, dicemir to flatter, flatter grammar, grammairef. grandfather, grand-pire to inhabit, hahiter \m. learned, instrait object, objet m. piece, piUe f. polite, poli rare, rare soup, soupef. spacious, spacieux stream, ruisseau m. to study, tt(id%er tailor, tailleur m. warm, cJumd yesterday, Mer Exercise No. 17- 1. I like this horse ; but I do not like that.— This one is good : that one is bad. — Give me this book and I shall give you that. — I un- derstand^ this rule, but I do not understand that. — These houses are more spacious than those. — My pen is worse than this. — Your gar- den is prettier than that. — These birds are rarer than those. — This book is not my father's (that of my father). — These gloves are my grandfather's (those of my grandfather). — This wine is that which^ I bought (have bought) this morning. I like him who is a good son. (*)We shall receive — I shall not receive — shall I receive ? — they (/.) will not receive — will he receive? — I shall receive — will you not receive? — he will not receive — they (m.) will receive — we shall not re- ceive — he will receive — they (m. ) will not receive — wilt thou receive? — she will not receive — shall we receive? — you will receive — I will deceive — wlU you receive ? — shall we not deceive ? — shall I not receive ? — she will receive — ^thou wilt receive — you will not receive — they (f.) will receive — thou wilt not receive. 2. De ces deux jeunes fiUes, ceUe-ci est plus instruite (jue celle-la. Ces grammaires-ci sont meilleures que celles-li. Ces messieurs-ci sont plus polls que ceux-l&,. Ce ruisseau-ci. est plus clair que celui-li. Cette eau-ci est plus froide que celle-1^. Cette soupe-ci est plus chaude que celle-lk. Ce vin-ci est bon, mais celui de mon pfere est meilleur. J'ai vu* le chien de votre frere, mais je n'ai pas vu celui de son ami. J'aime cette couleur-ci mais je n'aime pas celle de la robe de votre cousine. He who studies every day will soon become^ learned. These boots' are not the ones I bought the other day. That glass is larger than your friend's (that of your friend). Give me these coins and I will give you those. I have received^ my tailor's bill, I shall receive my shoemaker's' this morning*. We have received your cousin's visit, we shall receive that of his friend this afternoon. We like this house, we do not like that. These chairs are better than those. This gentle- man writes* quicker than that one. This ink is clearer than that. 1 understand, ccmjprends 2 which, que 3 vu, seen 4 will become, devimdra 6 received, repi 6 .wntes, icnt (*) See Future otrecevoir, and the conjugation of verbs interrogatively and nega- tively (Supplement, p.p. 12,18 & 19). 86 Questions on Grammar. 1. From what words is cePid-d derived? 2. When is celui-ei used to translate this) 3. Give the etymology of celui-ld, ? i. What is the feminine of celui-ei and celui-lH t 5. What is the plural masculine of celui-ei; from what is it derived? 6. Give the plural feminine of celui-ld and its etymology? 7. When are ceZui, celle, ceux, celles, used instead of celui-ei, celle-ci, ceux-ei, celles-eit 8. Eow are tJie one who (or he who) translated? 9. How do you translate he who t Conversation. Which stuff will you take (pren- drez-vojis) this one or that ? I shall take (Jeprendrai) this one; bat I think that one is better, only it is too dear for me. Take [prenez) that one : it will last (durera) longer (plus long- temps). Is it not the one which [que) you have sold (vendue) to myfciend Mrs. ... {Madame) ? Ko it is that which (que) I showed {ai moTitrSe) you in the other roouL What [quel) is the price of that? That costs two francs and fifty centimes a (le) metre (metre). ^ Are these gloves those which (que) my sister saw (has seen} (dus) yesterday ? No, Miss (Mademoiselle), they are not the same. Is this parcel mine (le mien) ? -No, it is Mrs. 's... (that of Mrs....). Will you send (enverrez) that to my hotel I Yes, Madam, with the greatest pleasure. Quelle etoffe prendrez-vous ; celle- ci ou ceUe-la ? Je prendrai celle-ci, mais je pense que celle-la est meilleure; seiile- ment elle est trop chere pour moi. Prenez celle-lk : elle durera plus longtemps. N'est-ce pas celle que vous avez vendue a mon amio, Madame...? Non c'est celle que je vous ai montree dans I'autre chambre. Quel est le prix de ceUe-la? Celle-li oolite deux francs cin- quante centimes le mfetre? Ces gants sont-Us ceux que ma soeur a vns hier ? Non, Mademoiselle; ce ne sent pas les memes. Ce paquet-ci est-il le mien ? Non, c'est celui de Madame ... Enverrez-vous celui-l& a mon h6tel? Oui, Madame, avec le plus grand plaisir. 87 Reading Ejsiercise No. 17. Tin poete avaif^twi jour compose une piece de vers poet .... , versus sur les gateaux que faisait'^MK patissier renomme de la villa which mado . pastry-cook renowned qu'il habitait. Le patissier, quoiqu'il ne cultivat pas which . inhabited . . though . „ cultivated beaucoup les Muses, fut cepe«da«t flatte da«s sow orguei7, — . however ... a la receptio« d'uw'^exemplaire de cette poesie : il voulut^ — . . copy . . poetry wished en temoigner sa Batisfaotion 5. I'auteur et crut qu'il ne for it to show . — .... helieved . no pouvait mieux faire que de lui emvoyer un des objets qui cotdd better do than , . to send . . which avaient^evej'Me son'*"4iispiratio«. Le poete regut d'abord awaken . ^ . . received atflrst cef^envoi avec plaisir et se mit^a deguster le chef-d'oeuvre . message . . himself put . taste . master- piece rtppetissa»t; mais quelle ne fut pas son'^bumiliatioB en relishing , what „ . . ■ . on decouvrawt que le patissier s'etait servi de la piece de vers discovering . . . had made use . . — : . elle-meiue pour le faire cuire au four. II lui ecrivit dorac itself for . to make cook in the . . . wrote then une lettre awdignee, ou il I'accusait du crime de lese-poesie indignant where . . — . offenceagainstpoetry " De quoi vous plaignez-vous ? " lui repomdit le patissier; what yourself complain . answered " Je n'ai fait qu'imiter vos precedes. Vous aviez fait^une „ . done but to imitate . proceedings . . made poesie sur mes gateaux et, moi, j'ai faif^aii gateau sur votie poesie." 88 Eighteenth Lessoit. Bix-Jiuitieme Legon. Possessive Pronouns. Possessive Pronouns are those wliicli express possession. Tliey are as follows : SiNQULAR. Plural. Mase. Fem. Masc FeM. le mien la mienne les miens les miennes mine le tien la tienne les tiens les tiennes thine le sien la sienne les siens les siennes his, hers, its le n6tre la nStre les ndtres les ndtres ours le vOtre la vStre les vdtres Us vdtres yours le lew la leur les leurs les lews theirs Remarks. I.— It must be noticed that the o of ndtre and voire, when pronouns, has the circumflex accent, which does not exist in notre and votre, possessive adjectives. II. — The words ndtre, vStre and leur do not change in the feminine. III. — The rule given in Lesson 13 for possessive adjectives of the the third person must also be applied to possessive pronouns ; thus, ce livre et le sien, translates as well this hook and his, as this book and Tiers. To avoid the lack of precision which may result from it, when it is necessary to indicate to whom an object belongs, possession is expressed by the verb Stre, to be, followed by the preposition d and the disjunctive personal pronouns. Etre is in such cases the translation of the English verb to lelong. Ce livre est A lui, this book is his or belongs to Mm. Ce livre est d elle, this book is hers or belongs to her. Oette maison est A nioi, this house is m,ine or belongs to nw. Ces chevaux sent d nous, these horses are ours or belong to us. IV. — Le mien, le ticn, le sien, 1. Somebody is in the room. — Some are good, others are bad. — Everyone has it. — No one knows' me. — This one is mine, the other is yours. — They like each other. — Both are here. — I shall see^ either. — Neither is here. — They have sent' a letter to each other. — Another will have it. — Everybody knows him. — I know^ nobody. — He has everything. — All wait in the other room. — He has nothing. — Some- thing will happen. — Whoever knows him likes him. — This (to.) is not the same. (*)'We sold — did he sell I — ^he did not sell — I waited — did we hear? — he waited — I sold — ^you did not sell — he heard — I heard — did we sell ? — they (/.) sold — he sold — I did sell — they (m.) did not sell — did I wait? — I did not sell — they (m.) heard — you sold — did yon seH? — AVie did not sell — thou didst seU — did I hear? — they (m.) sold — thou didst not sell — did we ,wait? — did I sell? — did you wait? — thou soldest — did they (/.) seU? 2. J'ai vu^ quelqu'un qui m'a demande votre nom. Comment osez- vous parler d'autrui d'%nec manieret^ si" grossifere* ? Les uns sont contents, les autres sont m^contents. U a quelque chose dans sa main. Tous sont Ik. II a tout perdu''. Tout le monde le connaissait^ d^is cette ville. Ni I'un ni I'autre ne vendent cette marchandise. L'un et I'autre danseront ce soir. Chacun est etonn^. Ce cheval n'est pasJe mSme. Eien ne m'dtonne. lis ne vendaient rien. Both have lost' their fortunes. Nobody was with them at the theatre. 1 have them all. Some like him; others detest him. Neither has bought his house. He has given me something for you. They detest one another. Everyone bought it. I shall have either. I heard nobody. They heard nothing. Nobody is in the house. No- thing is impossible to him. I know* the one, but I do not know the other 1 knows, eonnaU 2 shall see, verraS 3 have sent, se sont envoyt connais 5 vu, seen 6 d', in 7 perdu, lost 8 connaissait, knew (•) See the Imperfect of rendre, to render (Supplement, page 13). French Grammar. i I know, 98 Questions on Grammar, 1. What are indefinite pronouns ? 2. Translate somebody, everytody, nobody. 3. Translate someihiTig, nothing, everything. i. Translate either, neither, both, each other. 5. Translate the other, the same, others. 6. Wliat is the plural of Vim et V autre? 7. What indefinite pronouns are never used in the plural? 8. What indefinite pronouns require the verb to be preceded hj nel 9. What personal pronoun must be placed before the verb preceded or followed by I'lm I'autre and I'tim a I'autre? Conversation. ^ Is somebody there ? Nobody is in the room. Have you seen the one or the other? I have seen bdth. ~Did they give you anything? No, they gave me nothing. Is that the same book ? No, it is not the same. Did you speak {voits Stes-vous parU) to one another ? No, I spoke to nobody. Do you know either? No, I know neither. Do you know anybody in the town? No, I know nobody. Will they come (mendront) with each other? Yes, I expect them both. My compliments to everybody. I thank you. Will you see [verrez-vous) your cousins there ? Yes, I shall see them alL Take (prenez) this parcel and I will take {prend/rai) the other. I have it. Quelqu'nn est-il Ik? Personne u'est dans la chambre. Avez-vous vu I'un ou I'autre ? J'ai vu I'un et I'autre. Vous ont-ils donne quelque chose Non, lis ue m'ont rien donn^. Est-oe le mtoe livre ? Non, ce n'est pas le mSme. Vous etes-vous parl^ I'un k I'autre? Non, je n'ai parle k personne. Conuaissez-vous Tun ou I'autre? Non, je ne connais ni I'lm ni I'autre. Connaissez-vous quelqn'un dans laville? Non, je ne connais personne. Viendront-Hs I'un avec I'autre ? Oui, je les attends I'un et I'autre. Mes compliments a tout le monde. Je vous remercie. Y verrez-vous vos cousins? Oui, je les verrai tons. Prenez ce paquet et je pi«ndrai I'autre. Je I'ai. 99 Reading Exercise No. 20. Le frere queteur d'un couverat des^e«virores de Paris collector . . . neighbourhood . — revenait^apres avoir fait sa toumee dans plusieurs villages came back . made . round . . — vois!'«s^,et rapportait les~'auin6nes qu'il avait recuej'ZZies neighbouring . brought back . alms . . . gathered pendant la joumee. En traversamt^une forSt, il fat ren- day . crossing . ... contre par un voleur qui lui demanda la bourse ou la vie. Le moine vit biew que la resistance seraif^jnutile et remit^ saw . — ... delivered up au voleur une trejitaine de livres ; mais'*'il lui demanda . ■ about thirty . ... comifle faveur de decbarger'^MW pistolet qu'il avaif^^ la main, as . unload . . . . ... doKS Vun des pans de sa robe, afm de prouver au prieur . . . flaps . — in order to prove . — qu'il^avait ete attaque et qu'il avait fait quelque resistance. . . . attacked . . . made — Le bandit fit ce qu' on lui demawdait, mais le moine ne — did ... . . . . „ voyant pas le trou de la balle, s'etoima de cette circonstance. seeing not . . . bullet . astonished . . circumstance Le bandit se mit^a rire et avoua tout francbememt qu'il ne — . put . laugh . avowed quite frankly . . „ mettait jamais de balles dans ses pistolets et qu'il ne les^ put .... ... employait que comme moyens d'j'ntimidation. Cette con- employed but . ways . — fession lui coilta cber; car le moine, qui etait d'une force — , cost . for . . . . . remarquable, se jeta sur lui, le prif^a la gorge et le terrassa; remarkable . threw . . . took . . . . flung down puis'^ayant oberobe dans ses poobes, il en retira now seule- then . sought . . . from it pulled out . ment les trente Kvres qu'il lui avait remises"auparavant delivered before mais I'argent qu'il avait derobe a d'autres voyageurs. Le . . . robbed ... moine ne se fif^aucuw scrupule de e'ew'^emparer et rentra made . scruple . .ofittotakepossession . returned triojnpbant dans Bon oouvent. triumphanti . • • 100 TwKNTY-FiEST Lesson. Vingt-et-uni&me Legon. Indefinite Pronouns (concluded). The pronoun on is of a very frequent use in the French language ; it is used in speaking of persons and translates the English expressions, one, we, they, people. On attend. They wait. On travaille dans la rue. Feeble work in the street. On is always of the singular number. Accordingly the verb that follows must be in the siugular, as may be seen from the preceding example. On is of the masculine gender, and accordingly all adjec- tives which refer to it must be of the same gender. How- ever, these adjectives ought to be in the feminiiie if the sense clearly indicated that the pronoun on refered to a female. On est toujours fi^re de sa beauts. One is always proud of one's beauty. On est heureuse quand on est aimee de son mari. One is happy when one is loved by one's husband. On is often used, with an active verb, to translate a pas- sive verb. On croii qu'U viendra. It is believed that he will come. On dit que sa mfere est morte. It is said that his mother is dead. On me dit. / am told. On lem' disait. They were told. When on is immediately preceded by the conjunctions et, and,_sij_ if, oue, that,] ojt, "or, and the adverb o'd,, where, the euphonic leWer V must De placed between the conjunction and the pronoun on. On connait et Von aime cet homme. People know and Hke this man. Si Von m'interroge, je repondrai. If I am inteiTogated, I shall answer. Je crois que Von vient. I think that somebody is coming. On ne vas pas oil Von veut. One does not go where one wishes. However this I' ought to be omitted if on were followed by a word beginning with an I. On le connatt et on I'aime. People know and hke him. Si on le savait. li people knew it. Je ne crois pas qu'ore le trouve. I do not believe it wiU be found. II est oh on I'a mis. It is where it has been put. 101 to accept, accepter act, acte m. to arrive, arriver care, soin m. dessert, dessert m. «ffect, effet m. example, cxemple m. fanaticism, fa/iatisTne horn; heuref. [to. to imitate, iiniter judgment, jugement m. magnificent, magni- jique to mix, mtler \m. monastery, monastire necessary, nicessaire patriotism, patriotisme m. physician, mfdecin m. to publish, publier to recount, raconter repast, repas m. Spain, Espagnef. Spaniard, espagnol trumpet , trompettef. wall, mur m. war, giierref. Exercise No. 21. 1. One thinks. — "We wait. — They say^ — People think. — One works. — One hopes. — They recount — People refuse. — One likes. — One hears. — They give. — People find. — One eats. — One dares. — They desire. . — People ask. — It is believed. — It is thought. — I am asked. — He is deceived. — He was obliged. — They speak to him and they say that his brother is ill. — If people knew^it. — I think that they will refuse this. — Do you know' where one finds that. (*)I shall sell — we shall not sell — shall we sell 1 — they (m. ) will not sell — will she hear? — he will sell — I shall wait— will they sell? — I shall hear — you will not sell — we shall hear — thou wilt sell — you will wait — will you sell? — wilt thou sell? — I shall not sell — they (/.) will not sell — you will sell — thou wilt not sell — they (/.) will sell — he will not sell — will he sell ? — we shall sell— shall I sell? — we shall wait — she will not sell — they (m.) will sell. 2. On vendra la maison demain matin. On entend sa voLx dans la chambre de votre m^re. On raconte que votre ami est* arrive. On I'imite. On dit que (la) guerre a ^te declaree entre^ les deux pays. On me de9oit. On pense que je snis tr&s riche. On arrive Ji Paris en quatre heures. Je pense que Kon est heureux d'^avoir un ami* fidMe" . On serait content si Ton avait tout oe que Ton desire, Savez-vous' o'ii I'on public ce livre. Je crois' qu'on le publie ici. II croit tout ce qu'on lui dit. Si on I'avait vu' on lui aurait dit cela. They will sell it. They thought that he was an honest man. It is said that he will arrive to-morrow morning. It is believed that he will be dead before the end of the week. I am told that he is very ill. It is said that he will leave^" this afternoon. People like him and be- lieve that his patriotism will be rewarded^!. People say that this magnificent monastery was (lias been) built by the kings of Spain. It is necessary that people should arrive at seven o'clock. If people accepted ihis invitation he would be very satisfied. "Where do they sell that? t say dit 2 knew, savait 3 do you know, savez-vous 4 est, has 5 dhlwrh cntre, declared between 6 d', to 7 samz-voiis, do you know S crois, belieye 9 vu, seen 10 will leave, partira 11 rewarded, ricomi)eiisi C) See the Future of rcmdre (Supplement, page 11). 102 Questions on Grammar, 1. What is the meaning of the pronoun on ? 2. What is the numher of the pronoun ore? 3. What is its gender ? 4. Is on sometimes of the feminine gender ? 5 . How are passive verbs often translated in French ? 6. What are the conjunctions which require tlie euphonic letter V to be placed between them and the pronoun on ? 7. When must that euphonic letter be dispensed with ? Conversation. Where do they sell these hats ? They are sold in the High Street {grand'ruc) number thirty-two. Do they sell them dear ? No ; they are sold (at) twelve francs fifty centimes. What do they say ? They say that the Queen will ar- rive in (d) London to-morrow afternoon. Is it known at what time {heure) she will arrive ? People say that she will be here at two o'clock" in (of) the after- noon. Is it believed that people will be admitted in the station ? I am told that people will not be admitted on the platform. Is it known if the prince will be there ? It is said that he will be there with the princess. Do you believe what they say ? I never believe too easily what is reported in some newspapers. Is it believed that this difficult question wiU soon be resolved by the government ? They think so (that yes). Oil vend-on ces chapeaux ? On les vend dans la gi-and'rue numero trente-deux. Les vend-on cher? Non ; on les vend douze francs cinquante centimes. Que dit-on 1 On dit que la reine arrivera a Londres demain apres-niidi. Sait-on h. quelle heure eUe arri- vera ? On dit qu'elle sera ici k deux heures de I'aprfes-midi. Croit-on que Ton sera admis dans la station ? 0]i me dit que Ton ne sera pas admis sur le quai. Sait-on si le prince sera la ! On dit qu'il y sera aveo cesse. prin- Croyez-voua ce que Ton dit 1 Je ne crois jamais trop facilemeut ce qui est rapporte dans certains journaux. Croit-on que cette question diT:- cile sera bientot resolue pai .e gouvernement ? On croit quo oui. 108 Beading Exercise No. 21, Pendant les guerres de Napoleon premier en Espagne, la fanatisme et le patriotisme des habitants les porttrent^ souvent aux actes les plus d&esperes.^ On raconte qu'un general de I'armte du roi Jerome/ (5tant* arrive un jour sous les murs du nionastfere de Figuieres,'' envoya un oflicier au prieur pour lui demander de fournir k ses soldats les vivres^ qui leur etaient necessaires. Le prieur repondif que les soklals seraient bien regus dans la ville, et qu'il donnerait lui-meme* I'hospitalite au general et k son ^tat-major.^ Bientot aprfes, en effet,!" un repus magnifique ^tait servi ; '^ toutefois'^ le general, sacbanti^ combien il ^tait necessaire de se metier^'' des Espagnols,^* crnti^ prudent d'engager le prieur et deux de ses moines k s'asseoir" k la table du festin.i* L'invitation fut acceptee sans hesitation, et les religieux^^ burent^" et mangurent_ copieuseinent^'- pour donner I'exemple aux officiers frangais, qui les imit&rent sans la moindre apprehension. Mais au dessert, le piieur se leva^^ et, d'^^une voix qui fit^* sur les invit&^s I'effet de la trompette du jngement dernier, il leur annonga qu'un poison toorteP^ avait ^t^ mele au vin et aux aliments et qu'ils n'avaient pas une heure k vivre.^' En elfet, malf^^^^ les soins qui leur furent prodigu^s^^ par les m^decins de l'arm(5e, appeles en toute hate,^" au bout^' de quelques instants, ils expiraient,^^ aussi bien que^' le prieur et les deux moines, dans des souffrances epouvantables.'* 1 port^rent, carried. 2 desesperfe, desperate. 3 roi Jerfime, king Jerome of (Westphalia). 4 etant, having. 5 Figui&res, Figueiras, 6 vivres, provision,';. 7 repondit, answered. 8 lui-meme, himself. 9 etat-major, staff. 10 en effet, indeed 11 servi, served. 12 toutefois, however. 13 saohant, knowing. 14 se mefier, distrust. 15 Espagnols, Spaniards. 16 cnit, believed. 17 s'&sseoir, to sit down. 18 la table du festin, the convivial table. 19 religleux, monks. 20 burent, drank, 21 oopieusement, copiously. 22 se leva, rose, 23 d', in. 24 fit, did. 25 invites, guests. 26 poison mortal, deadly poison, 27 a vivre, to live. 28 malgre, in spite of. 29 leur furent prodigues, lavished upon them. 30 appeles en toute hS,te, called with all haste. 31 au bout de, at the end of. 32 expiraient, expired. 33 aussi bien que, as well as. 34 daua des souffrances epouvantables, in a dreadful agony. 104 Twenty-second Lesson. Vingt-deuxihne Legon. Verbs. As we have devoted the whole of the Supplement to verbs, we shall only give here a few general hints, which will be easily- understood by the student, if he refer to the table given on the last page of the above mentioned part. 1. AU verbs, whatever may be the conjugation to which they belong, whether they be regular or irregular, end in the same man- ner in the Imperfect of the Indicative {ais, ais,ait, ions, iez, aient), in the Future {rai, ras, ra, rons, rez, ront), and Conditional {rais, rais, rait, rions, riez, raient). 2. The iirst person singular, if not ending with a vowel (e or ai) always ends with an s (very few verbs with an x). 3. The second person singular always ends with s (few verbs with x). 4. The third person singular when not ending with a vowel (e or a) always ends with t (few verbs with d, one with c). 5. The first person plural ends in es or ons. 6. The second person plural ends in es or ez (always ez when the first person plural ends in ons except voiis dites, vous faites.) 7. The third person plural ends always in nt. 8. The 1st and 2nd person plural of the present of the Subjunc- tive are generally the same as the 1st and 2nd person plural of the Imperfect of the Indicative (few irregular verbs excepted). 9. The endings of the Past definite are always s (1st conjugation excepted) s, t, mes, tes, rent. 10. The endings of the Present of the Subjunctive are always «, es, e, ions, iez, ent (few irregular verbs excepted). 11. The endings of the Imperfect of the Subjunctive are always 12. There is always a circumflex accent on the vowel in the ending of the 1st and 2nd persons plural of the Past definite and Srd person singular of the Imperfect of the Subjunctive. 13. The Verbs of the 1st conjugation {er) are by far the most numerous, and are all regular but aller, to go ; envoyer, to send, and their compounds. 14. There are only seven regular verbs belonging to the Srd conjugation (oir), viz ; percevoir, to perceive, apercevoir, to per- ceive, concevoir, to conceive, d^cevoir, to deceive, devoir, to owe, redevoir, to owe still, recevoir, to receive. 15. The Imperative has no 1st person in the singular. Many grammarians give a Srd person singular and plural of the same tense, but these persons belong really to the present of the Sub- junctive, and are not formed from the present of the Indicative. This is the reason why we only give the 2nd person singular, 1st and 2nd person plural, which are formed according to the rules of formation. See pages 4, 5 of Supplement. 105 to accost, accoster to add, ajouter at once, aussitdt to beg, prier to brand, fl itrir celebrated, .cilibre cburcli, iglisef. to congratulatej/i^Zwifer congratulation, feliei- • tationf. \pointer to disappoint. to doubt, doutr, eloquent, Uoquent even, m^Tne future, avenir m. mistake, erretirf. to owe, devoir TprencbeVtpridicatetir m. priest, prStre to. profit, profit m. to punish, punir to quit, quitter reasoning, raisonru- ment m. to remain, rester to render, rendre short, cov/rt to stop, arriter \m- thanks, remerctmenta to threaten, metiacer usurer, uswier m, usury, usure f. Exercise No. 22. {On the tenses of (he verbs which have already been used in the preceding exercises.) 1. Je fdliciterai, — nous punirions, — je dois, — ilrend, — nef^licitez- vous pas? — nous devons, — nous desappointerons, — donnez-vous? — Je rends, — ils puniraient, — vous finirez, — il re9oit, — il ajoutera, — vous rendez, — il imito ? — nous ne chantons pas, — ils finissent, — vous re- cevez, — nous menacerons, — ils rendent, — vous fletrissez, — nous rece- vrions, — nous rendons, — je vends, — ils resteraient, — nous quittons, — ils devraient, — ils fletriront,— vousrecevrez, — nous vendons, — tu vends, — ils aimaient, — nous batissons,— ils vendaient, — elles recevaient, — ils doivent, — il vend, — vous parliez, — ne donneraient-ils pas? — ils bS- tissent, — nous vendrons, — vous devez, — nous fletrissions, — ils dansent, — ^finiraient-ik ? — vous fletrirez, — ^je regois, — je vendrai, — recevrez-vous? — vous chantez, — ils marchent, — nous recevons, — il vendra, — ils ba- tiront, — ^il doit, — tu rendras, — nous donnerons, — ils punissaient,— vous devrez, — nous ne donnons pas, — vous finissez, — nous reudrons. 2. He sings, — you would love, — we finish, — they (m.) receive, — we sold, — they (m.) iinish, — I give, — he receives, — ^you did not sell, — I should build, — he would punish, — you walked, — I finish, — did they wait ?— I receive, — you punish, — we received, — ^you sold, — they (m.) love, — you owe, — I shall sell, — he received, — I branded, ^we should finish, — we congratulate, — he sold, — they (m.) would threaten, — we branded, — I received, ^ — he disappoints, — we beg, — he punished, — you owed, — I shall not hear, — I sold, — I added, — he would build, — I shall receive, — wepunished, — they (y.j finished, — you threatened,— we should receive,- — will you wait? — he will owe, — they (m.) wait, — we shall commence, — you finished, — I shall finish, — we shall receive, — you hear, —he congratulated, — you imitated, — we should finish, — I should re- ceive, — you will punish, — he would brand, — I shall sing, — you will deceive, — he does not sell, — he would owe, — we shall punish, — do we render? — we shall dance, — they (f.) will owe, — we should receive, — you will finish, — he sells, — they (m.) will speak, — we should commence, —they (m.) will build, — you would receive, —I sell. .» French Qramimar. 106 10. u. 12. 13. 14. 15. Questions on Grammar. Which are the three tenses which always end in the same manner wliatever may be the conjugation, whether regular or irregular? ^Vhat is generally the last letter of the Ist person singular? Wliat is always the last letter of the 2nd person singular ? \VTiat is the last letter of the 3rd person, when not a vowel ! What are the two endings which may be found in the 1st person plural ? ■V\'Tiat ai-e the two endings of the 2nd person plural? How does the 3rd person plural always end ? Which are the two tenses in which the 1st and 2ud plural are always the same (with very few exceptions) ? What are the endings of the Past Definite ? What are the endings of the Present of the Subjunctive ? What are the endings of the Imperfect of the Subjunctive? In what tenses and persons is the circumflex accent to be always found on the vowel of the ending? \\Tiich is the conjugation which includes the greatest number of verbs in French ? What are the only regular verbs of the 3rd conjugation? How many persons are there in the Imperative? Conversation. What is the most important part of speech in all languages? lit 1.=!) the verb. Ca'i French verbs terminate in the Infinitive in any manner what- ever? No ; they can only end in four ways, vi2 ; er, ir, oir, re. What is indicated by the ending of the infinitive of a verb? Tiie conjugation to whichit belongs What is to be done after ascer- taining to what conjugation a verb belongs ? I: inu.st be ascertained whether ''■ be regular or irregular. Jiiw can you ascertain that? By looking ai the tables of ir- regular verbs. Part 14. Verbs which are not given, nor composed with any of those which are given therein, are regular. Quelle est la partie du discours la plus-importante dans toutes les langues ? C'est le verbe. Les verbes franjais peuvent-Us se terminer i I'iufinitif d'une ma- nik-e quelconque ? Non ; ils ne peuvent se terminer que de quatre mani&res, c'est h. dire en er, ir, oir or re. Qu'indique la termination de I'in- finitif d'un verbe ? A quelle eonjugaison il appartient. Que faut-il faire apr^ s'etre assuri de la eonjugaison k laquelle appartient un verbe ! II faut s'assurer s'il est regulier ou irr^gulier. Comment pouvez-vous trouver cela? En regardant les tableaux des verbes irreguliers, dans la 14^me livraison. Les verbes qui n'y sont pas donnes ou qui ne sont composes avec aucun de ceux qui y sont donnes, sont reguliers. 107 Reading Exercise No. 22. Un predicateur celebre, ayant un jour faitl un ma- gnifique sermon dans lequel il avait fletri de la maniere la plus eloquente le vice detestable de I'usure, se preparait2 a quitter I'eglise, lorsqu'il fut accoste par un usurier, qu'il connaissait3 parfaitement de* reputation. Le pretre, Toyant^ qu'il chercliaitS a lui parler, se felicitait interieure- ment'' de I'effet de ses paroles, et s'attendait a ce^ qu'il allait^ lui annoncer sa conversion. II commenfait meme a le feliciter de sa demarohelf et de ses meilleures intentions pourravenir,lorsquelirusurierrarretacourt. "Jecrainsl^," lui dit-ili3j '-quevousne fassiezW erreur: j'ai trouve en veriteis que vous aviez admirablement parle, et je recon- naisis toute la force de vos arguments; je vous prie d'agreerlT mes sinceres felicitations, j'ajouterai meme, mes remerclments : car je ne doute pas que tous oeux de mes confreresl* qui se trouvaient a I'eglise n'aient ete^^ pro- fondement^o emus^i par votre sermon, et effrayes des chati- ments22 dont vous nous menacez, et qu'ils n'abandonnent23 aussitot une si infame^* profession. De cette fa9on25 je res- terai seial a faire I'usure^S; je ferai^T des profits conside- rables, je deviendrai^s excessivement^s riche et c'est a vous, ou plutotso a votre sermon, que je devrai tout ce bonbeur- la." Le pauvre predicateur etait bien^l desappointe et il se demanda si peut-etre obacun des usuriers n'avait pas fait32 le meme raisonnement. 1 fait, ma.de, 2 se^^^arai^, was preparing himself, Sconnaissait, knew, 4 de, by, 5 voyant, seeing, 6 cherchait, was endeavouring, 1 inUriewement, internally, 8 s'attendait d ce, expected, 9 allait, was going, U desaditrmrchefioxYnsst^i, Ulorsque, ^\eD., 12 jecrains, I fear, 13 dit-il, said lie, li fassiez, make, 15 en viritt, indeed, 16 recownais, acknowledge, 17 d'agrder, to accept, 18 confrires, col- leagues, 19 n'aient iU, have been, 20 profoTidiment, deeply, 21 f/mus, moved, 22 des cAdtiments, by the chastisements, 23 qu'ils n'aban- duiiuent, that they will abandon, 24 une si imfdme, such an in- famous, 25 de cette f agon, in this manner, 2S faire I'usure, to be an usurer, 27 /era*, shall make, 28 &mCTicf7-«i, shall become, 29 ex- casivement, exceedingly, 30 plutdt, rather, 31 bien, very much, S2fait, made. 108 TwENTY-THlBD Lesson. Vingt-iroisieme Legon. Adverbs. The adverb is a word used to modify the sense of a verb, and also of an adjective, participle or another adverb. In French they follow the verb in simple tenses, and in compound tenses are placed between the auxiliary and the participle. II parle souvent. He often speaks. J'ai bien dormi. I have slept well. Adverbs may be divided into ten classes, viz. : adverbs of manner, time, place, order, quantity, comparison, aff/rmalion, nega- tion, doubt and interrogation. Adverbs of Manner. Adverbs of manner express how things are done. They are formed from qualifying adjectives by the addition of ment. Three cases arise in this formation. Rule. 1. — If the adjective end with a vowel, ment is added to the masculine. — Joli, pretty, joUment, prettily; aisi, easy, aisem^nt, easily ; honnSte, honest, honnStement, honestly. Exceptions. — Follement, foolishly ; mollement, softly ; nouvelle- ment, newly ; bellement, gently ; gaiemmt, gaily, are formed from the feminine adjectives, folle, molle, nouvelle, ielle, gaie. 2. — If the adjective end with a consonant, ment is added to the feminine. — Seureux, happy, heureuscment, happily ; long, long, longue- ment, long or longly ; doux, sweet, doucement, sweetly. 3. — Adjectives ending in ant and ent form their adverbs by changing nt into mment : Prudent, prudent, prudcmment, prudently; constant, constant, con,- stamment, constantly ; innocent, innocent, innocemmerd, innocently. Exceptions. — Lent, s\oYi,a.iii.prisent, present, D^A^meni, vehement, form their adverbs regularly, lentement, slowly ; prisentement, presently, viMmentement, vehemently. The adverb formed froui gentil, nice, is gentiment. Remarks. 1. — The following adverbs take an acute accent on the e which precedes ment, when no such accent exists in the adjectives themselves. — Av euglimen t, blindly (from aveugle) ; commodiment, conveniently (irom commode) ; communimcnt, commonly (from commun) ; conform&ment, conformingly (from conforme) ; inormSment, enormously (from inorme) ; expressiment, expressly (from expris) ; importuniment, importunely (from importwn) ; obscurement, obscui'ely (from ohscnr) ; omMjix^mc^nt, obstinately "^Irofir "opmidtre) ; prdcisim/int, precis^y" (from prims) ; pro- fondimeni, profoundly (from profond) ; profusiment, profusely .{from, pro/us) ; impmUme^U, with impunity (from impuni). 2.— Bien, well, mal, badly, pis, worse, mieiac, better, must also be considered as adverbs of manner. 109 address, adressef. advice, conseil m. attentive, attentif cheapness, hon marchi m. to counsel, conseiller desert, disert m. despatch, dipidhef. to forward, eiapidier full, pUin to hang, suspendre to hide, cacher immediate, immi'dicU legible, lisible march, marchef. name, nom m. other, autre to pass, passer ,^le, to recommence, recom- Tnencer to refresh, rafralchir road, route f. \ -^am l. sable m. suffering, souffrance f. telegraph.i^Zi'g'rapAc m, wire, fit {defer) m. way, moyeii m. Exercise No. 23. Form, the Adverbs from the following Adjectives. 1, Facile— petit — diligent — savant — fou - triste — haut — vrai — profond — commun- lent — enorme — hardi — unique — delicat — frano^ large— precis — imperieux — apparent — gentil — beau — raisonuable — d^mesure — elegant— importun — chaud — innocent — aveugle — present^ mou — exprfes — loyal — timide — remarquable — malheureux — gai — galant — deUcieux — nouveau — frequent — proportionn^ — imprudent — opiniS,tre — r«ligieux — necessaire— egal — comique— intelligent — ingenu — propre — decent — clair — mortel — vehement — impuni. (*) Would he sell? — I should hear — should we wait? — he would sell— they would not wait — they (m. ) would hear — should I sell ? — they (m. )woald sell — would he not sell ? — we should sell — should I not sell ? — should we sell ? — thou wouldst sell — you would hear — would they (/.) sell? — you would wait — would they (m.) sell? — he would hear — I should sell — would you not sell? — we should hear — would I wait ? — would you sell ? — wouldst thou sell ?— you would sell — would she sell ? — should we not sell ? - 2. Vous travaillez laborieusement. 11 travaille bien et ses parents sont contents de^ sa couduite. 11 parle trfes eloquemment et tout le monde I'ecoute^ attentivement. II parlait tres froidement. 11 apprend^ aisement eette langue. Le temps passe rapidement. Je le vois^ rarement. lis sont* arrives en ville et j'attends impatiemment le* resultat de leur visite. Nous I'aimons sincferement. 11 parle parfaite- ment la langue frangaise. On trouve principalement cette fleur dans les pays froids. The postman rarely comes' at eight o'clock. I wait (for) his answer impatiently. 1 am greatly astonished. That page is badly written,^ you will recommence it immediately. I shall pass rapidly to the principal rules ; 1 think that you will easily understand' t' em. That would certainly happen. He imitates his friend very well. 1 de, with 2 I'icoute, listens to him 3 apprend, learns 4 vois, see 5 sont, havo 6 le, for the 7 conies, vient 8 written, ^crite 9 will unJer-^tand, compreudrex. * See the conditional of rendre. 110 Questions on Grammar. 1. WliLit is an ajverb ? 2. What is the place of adverbs in French ? 3. How many classes of adverbs are there ? what are they ? ■1 . How do adverbs of manner end in French > 5. How are adverbs derived from adjectives ending with a vowel? 6. How are adverbs derived from adjectives ending with a consonant ? 7. How are adverbs of manner derived from adjectives ending in ant or ent 1 8. Give some adjectives ending with vowels which do not follow this rule? 9 . Give some adverbs which take an acute accent on the e before muni I 10. Give some adverbs of manner which do not end in mentt Conversation. Who '.qui esf-ce qui) spoke so ele- gantly ? It (is) was the deputy who has been elected {6lu) lately. He speaks very slowly and dis- tinctly. Do you hear him fre- quently ? No, I go to the house [of parlia- ment] (chamhrej very rarely. Did you arrive {Hes vous arrivi) safely at the end of your journey ? Yes, thank you (merci) ; un- happily I found my sister dan- gerously ill, and I had only (the) time to run immediately to the doctor's. Does he come {vient) exactly at the time you expect him ? Usually he comes very punctually. Do you pay him regularly every week ? Yes, I generally pay him every Saturday evening. Do you think really that he is in want of money ? I think so. Qui est-ce qui a parle si'elegam- ment ? C'est le depute qui a et^ elu der- niferement. II parle tres lentement et trfes distinotement. L'entendez-vous frequemmeut ? Non, je vais tre.s rarement h la chambre. Etes-vous arrive sain et sauf au terme de votre voyage ? Oui, mercl ; malheureusement j'ai trouv^ ma scEur dangereuse- ment malade, et je n'ai eu que le temps de courir immediatement chez le docteur. Vient-il exactement k I'heure k laquelle vous I'attendez ? Ordiuairement il vient tres pouo- tuellement. Le payez vous reguliferement chaque semaine ? Oui, jelepaieg^ndralement chaque samedi soir. Croyez-vous reellement qu'il ait besoin d'argent ? Je le crois. Ill Heading Exercise No. S3. On raoonte qn'un paysan, dont le fils servait^ dans un regiment en garnison^ en Alg^rie,' regut* nn jour de lui ime lettre dans laqnelle il lui disait,^ entre" autres choses, que sea souliera avaient it& brulds par le sable pendant les longues marches qu'il avait faites' dans le ddsert ; il finiasait sa lettre en priant^ son pfere de lui en envoyer une autre paire le plus tot possible.^ Nicolas,^" c'^tait le nom du paysan, plein de com- passion pour les fatigues et lea souffranoes de son fils, commanda^i immeJiatement une paire de souliera au cordonnier de son village. Mais quand ils furent faits,'^ il ne savait^^ de^* quelle maniere les Ivii envoyer, et il demandait conseil k tous ses amis. L'un d'eux, voulant'^ se moquer de^" sa simplicity, lui conscilla de les lui expedier par le t^l^graphe, lui disant^' qu'il n'aurait qu'^^i lea pendre au fil de fer qu'il voyait^" soutenu^" par des poteaux tout le long de^^ la route, et que la premi&re depeche, qui passerait k destination de I'Algerie, les transporterait^^ jusqu'i-' Constantine, oil se trouvait^* alors son fils. La simplicity et le bon marcbd de ce moyen seduisirent^^ ig paysan. II mit^s une adresse bien lisible, qu'avait ^crite^'' le maitre d'^cole,28 sur lea souliers ; y cacba deux pi&ces de cinq francs, pour que^^ son tils put^" se rafraichir k sa santi et, ^tant sorti^^ du village, sus- pendit^^ igg gouliers au fil teUgrapbique, puis^^ retourna k son travail. (To he continued. J 1 servait, served, 2 garnison, garrison, 3 Algerie, Algeria, 4 re^ut, received, 5 cUsait, said, 6 entre, among, 7 faites, made, 8 priant, begging, 9 le plus tSt possible, as soon as possible, 10 Nicolas, Nicholas, 11 commanda, ordered, 12 furent faits, were made, 13 savait, knew, 14 de, in, 15 voulant, wishing, 16 se moquer de, laugh at, 17 disant, saying, 18 ne...qu£, only, 19 voyait, saw, 20 souienu, supported, 21 tout le long de, all along, 22 transporterait, would transport them, 23 jusqu'cl, as far as, 24 se trouvait, was, 25 seduisirent, seduced, 28 mit, put, 27 icrite, written, 28 maitre d'icole, school-master, 29 po^ir que, in order that, 30 pHt, could, 31 itant sorli, having gone out, 32 suspendit, hung, 33 puis, then. 112 TwENTT-FOUETH Lbsson. Vingt-quatrihne Lefon. Adverbs of Time. These adverbs are : for the present : — aujourd'hui, to-day; maintenant, now; d,prisent, now; for the future ■.—demain, to-morrow ; apris-demain, the day after to- morrow; bientSt, soon ; avant peu, shortly ; disormais, henceforth ; for the past : — hier, yesterday ; avant-kier, the day before yesterday ; autrefois, formerly ; jadis, formerly ; depuispeu, lately. Other adverbs of time do not refer to any special time ; as, debomieheure, early ; t6t, soon ; tard, late; , 122 Questions on Grammar. 1. Why are conjunctions so called? 2. How many kinds of conjunctions are there? 3. What moods do conjunctions govern in French? 4. Which are the conjunctions which govern the Infinitive? 5. What is the condition required to use the Infinitive after con- junctions? 6. What are the conjunctions which govern the Indicative? 7. How are the conjunctions formed which govern the Subjunctive? 8. Give some of the conjunctions which govern the Subjunctive? 9 When does the conjunction que govern the Subjunctive? 10. What are the conjunctions which require the particle ne to be placed before the verb that foUows quei What wiU you do this morning before you go to yoxir office ? I shall write a letter in order to know if I must go and see my uncle this evening. Will you take me with you if you go? With great pleasure, unless Mr X. should accompany me. Will you come back before I go to bed? I do not know, although I shall do my best in order to be here as soon as possible. In case that I should go with you, could you tell me what train you intend to take in order that I might meet you at the station. It will be six o'clock before I am able to leave the office ; although I should like very much to leave earlier. Then I shall be at the station at half past six. Do you take much luggage with you? No, I only take a very small port- manteau. Conversation. Que ferez-vous ce matin, avaiit d'allei;_a votre bureau ? J'ecrirai une lettre afin de savoir si je dois aller voir mon oncle dans la soiree. Voulez-vous m'emmener avec vous si vous y allez ? Avec grand plaisir, h. moins que Monsieur X. ne m'accompagne. Reviendrez-vous avant que j'aillu me coucher? Je ne sais pas, quoique je veuille faii'e de mon mieux pour Stre ici le plus tSt possible. Aucas que j^ille avec vous, pour- riez-vous me dire quel train vous avez I'intention de prendre afin que je puisse vous rencon- trer a la station. II sera six heures avant que je puisse quitter le bureau ; quoi- que je desire beaucoup le quitter plus t6t. Je serai done . a la station k six heures et demie. Emportez-voas beaucoup de ba-— gages? K"on, je ne pronds qu'un tres petit porte-manteau. 123 Reading Exercise No. 26. Le dooteur Samuel Johnson fill un jour vm pari avec I'un de ses amis; il prctendait qu'il irait^ au marche de poissons do Billingsgate et qu'il mettrait^ une des mar- chandes^ en colore, sans dire^ un mot qu'elle ptit^ com- prendre.^ .11 s'y rendit^ en effet^ et s'etant misl" a quel- ques pas d'une de ces dames, il se bouohaii le nez aveo affectation pour indiquer que le poisson qu'elle vendait n'etait pas plus fraisl2 qu'il ne fallaiti3. Le geste ne de- meura pas inapergul*, et le dooteur fut inonde d'epithetesi* aussi sonores que maj^eantes, la derniere desquelles assi- gnait a la mere du docteur une place bien definie dans le regne des quadrupedesl^. Le docteur luirepondit: "Vous _^etes un article, Madame!" — "Pas plus article que vous- meme^^, 'riistre mal elevei^." — "Madame vous etes un substantif." , — "Et vous ... vous ... vous," begaya^^ la virago^o, a qui la colere de se voir insultee^l en destermes inconnus22_^iait23 deja I'usage de la parole^*. — "Vous etes un pronom ! " La marcbande ecujaaje^^ rage, mais ne put proferer que^B des sons inarticules^^. — " Yous etes un verbe,. un participe, un adverbe, un adjectif, une conjonction, une preposition, une interjection, continua Johnson en lanjant^S chacun de ces mots, par intervalle, de fa5on a^S en atjoroltre la portee^O. L'enumeration des dix__£arties._du_discours, n'avait jamais produit^i un effet~aussi formidable; a la dixieme, la dame de Billingsgate se roulait dans la boue qui couvrait32 le sol, en proie a de veritables convulsions ; Johnson avait gagne_spn pari. 1 fit, made, 2 irait, would go, 3 mettrait, would put, 4 mar- chandes, stall-keepersj 5 dire, saying, 6 pAt, could, 7 coiripretidre,. understand, 8 s'y rendit, betook himself there, 9 en effet, in fact, 10 s'itant mis, having placed himself, 11 boiKha, stopped, 12 plv,s /rais, sweeter, 13 g'w'iZ n,e/aZfai<, than it was necessary, 14masperfM, unperceived, 15 d'ipitMtes, with epithets, 16 quadrupi^s, quadru- peds, 17 vous-mime, yourself, i^jrustre mal iUvA, villanous scoun- drel, 19 Mgaya, stammered, 20 virago, virago, 21 se voir insulUe, seeing herself abused, 22 inconnus, unknown, 23 6tail, took away, 24 I'usage de la parole, the faculty of speaking, 25 icuma de, foamed with, 26 ne put profirer que, could only utter, 27 inariicuUs, inar- ticulate, 28 lanfant, casting, 29 defa^on A, in such a manner as 'to,. 30 laportie, the effect, Zlproduit, produced, 32 couvrait, covered. 124 Twenty-seventh Lesson. Vingt-septidme Legon. Conjunctions (continued). (This lesson is for reference only.) Besides their division into simple and compound, conjunctions are also divided into copulative, augmentative, alternative, hypo- thetic, adversative, extensive, periodical, causative, conclusive, explica- tive, transitive and conductive. I. — Copulative conjunctions merely connect without adding any- thing to the idea ; there are two of them : et, and, ni, neither, nor. II. — Augmentative imply an idea of augmentation ; they are the following: depliis, lien plus, au surplus, moreover; d'ailleurs, outre que, besides; CTicore, still. III. — ^fteraaiiw imply an idea of alternative or distinction they are as follow : ou, ov ; ou Men, either ; sinon, if not ; tantdt, sometimes. IV. — Hypothetic or conditional conjunctions imply the idea of a condition without which what is meant by the principal sentence ceases to take place. The principal are the following : si, if, whether ; soit que, whether ; pourvu que, provided that ; d mains que, unless ; quand, when ; d, condition que, under the condition that ; en cos que, in case that ; supposi que, suppose that. T. — Adversative conjunctions are those which indicate some dif- ference, opposition or restriction between what precedes and what fol- lows them, as, mais, but ; quoique, although ; Men que, though ; ce- pendant, however; n'anmoins, nevertheless; toutefois, however; de peur que, de arainte que, lest, for fear that, etc. VI. — Extensive conjunctions connect while enlarging the idea. They are : jusqxCd, ce que, till ; encore, still ; enfin, at last ; aussi, also ; mArm, even ; tant, so much. VII. — Periodical conjunctions refer to a certain period or time, as : quand, lorsque, when ; dans le temps que, at the time when ; pendant que, durant que, while; tandis que, whilst; tant que, as long as; aussi- I6t qiie, as soon as ; d^ que, since ; avant que, before ; depuis que, since ; apris que, after ; as peine, hardly, Ac. VIII. — Causative conjunctions imply an idea of cause or motive, •as, afin que, in order that ; parce que, because ; comme, as ; car, for ; puisque, since ; d'autant que, whereas ; aussi, also ; attendu que, con- sidering that. IX. — Conclusive conjunctions deduce a conclusion from a preceding sentence, as, or, now ; done, then ;■ par consequent, consequently ; c'est pourquoi, Uierefore. X. — Explicative conjunctions connect two sentences while con- veying further explanations, as, eomme, as ; en tant que, as ; savoir, c'est-d-dire, that is to say; surtout, above all; desorte que, defafonque, (.0 that ; si Men que, so that. XI. — Transitive conjunctions imply the idea of transition, as: or, now ; au reste, besides ; dv, resU, moreover ; apris tout, after all ; quant A, as for, as to, all at once, tmU de suite American, americain to declare, declarer detail, ditail m. England, Anglelen'ef. extraordinary, extra- ordinaire fact, fait m. feat, prouessef. journey, voyage m. 125 lie, ■nwnsonge m. matter, matiiref. ocean, oc4an vj. once, unefois passenger, passager m. pigeon, pigeon m. port, port m. precise, pricis to relate, raconter to remark, remarquer to repeat, ripiter ^ skill, adressef. 1 steamboat, bateau-d,- vapeur m. story, histoiref. to talk, causer triumph, triomphe m. A turn, tour m. United - States, Etats- Unis m. Exercise No. 27. 1. The cat and the dog. — I remark and I repeat. — Neither you nor I. — Neither my brother nor my sister. — Moreover he has much skill. — Besides I hare visited^ all the ports of the Ocean. — Either you or I. — If not I shall go^ to the United States. — If you like. — Whether you are satisfied or not. — Unless you repeat it. — When you would be here. — But he is an honest man. — Although you are my brother. — However you are discontented. — Lest he should be iU. — Till you are old. — When I was at Paris. — While he was young. —As soon as you come'. — After he had finished. —Because it is extraordinary. — As you know^. (*)That we may punish — that I might punish — that you may receive — that he might not receive — that thou mightest not punish — that they (m.) might punish — that I may receive — that she may receive— that I might not receive — that he may punish — that we might punish — that you might receive — that we may receive — that they (m. ) might not re- ceive — that you may punish — that you might punish — that they (f.) may receive — that she may not receive — that thou mayest punish — that he might punish — that they (f.) may punish. 2. Je parlerai h, votre ami et je lui dirai^ de venir^ domain matin. Je n'aime ni son fr^re ni sa sceur. Ou hien vous me donnerez celui- 1^, ou hien j'en ach^erai un autre. Vous finirez votre travail, sinon vous serez puni. TantSt il arrivait par le bateau ^ vapeur, tant6t il venait par le chemin de fer'. Je repHerai cette r^gle si vous le trouvez neces- saire. Quoique vous lui ayez racont^ ce voyage extraordinaire il ne vous a pas cru^ Aussit6t que vous aurez fini de causer, je parlerai. Je dis* cela afin que vous soyez prudent. We shall commence our journey all at once for fear that the weather might be^" too bad if we should wait'^ till Saturday. If you repeat this extraordinary story, people will think that you are an impostor. He is very learned, however he is very modest. I shall punish him because he has talked during the lesson. I shall remain until he comes back^'^ from his journey. Sometimes I find it easy, sometimes I find it difficult. 1 visited, visits 2 I shall go, j'irai 3 come, viendrez 4 know, savez 5 dirai, shall tell 6 de venir, to come T cliemin de fer, railway 8 cni, believed 9 dis, say 10 would be, Tie soit 11 should wait, atiendions 12 comes back, revienne (*) See Supplt for the subjunctive of verbs of the 2ud audSrd Conjugations (Pages Hand 12). 10. 11. 12. 126 Questions on Grammar. How also can conjunctions be divided ? Is there any idea implied in co2mlative conjunctions ? what are they? What is the idea implied in augmentative conjunctions ? give some. What idea do alternative conjunctions imply ? what are they ? What do hypothetic or conditional conjunctions imply ? give some. What are adversative conjunctions ? give some. What is the effect of extensive conjunctions ? give some. To what do periodical conjunctiohs refer ? give some. What is the idea implied in causative conjunctions ? give some. What is deduced by conclusive conjunctions ? give some. How do explicative conjunctions connect two sentences ? give some. What is the idea implied in transitive conjunctions ? give some. Conversation. Did you bring your brother and sister with you ? I brought neitlier the one nor the other, but they will come this afternoon. When will you go to Paris ? I shall go there either in August or in September. Though you are very busy, I should like you to pay us a visit in the country. Could you come next Saturday 1 I cannot tell you until 1 have seen my partner, but I shall let you know before Friday. Will you come and see my father while I am away ? 1 shall come and see him every Sunday, if not twice a week. I should like you also to write to me often. I shall do so under the condition that you will answer me im- mediately. Have you bought a house since I saw you last week ? Yes, I bought one the day before yesterday. Avez-vous amene votre frere et votre sceur avec vous ? Je n'ai amene ni I'un ni I'autre, mais ils viendront cette apre.s- midi. Quand irez-vous k Paris ? J'irai soit en aofit, soit en sep- tembre. Quoique vous soyez trbs occupe, jevoudrais que vous nous flssicz une visite k la oampagne. Pour- riez-vous venir samedi prochain ? Je ne puis vous le dire, jusqu'a ce que j'aie vu mon associe, mais je vous le ferai savoir avant ven- dredi. Viendi'ez-vous voir mon pere, tau- dis que je serai absent ? Je viendrai le voir chaque di- manche, sinon deux fois par semaine. J'aimerais aussi que vous m'ecri- vissiez souvent. Je le ferai, k la condition que vous me repondiez imm(5diatement. Avez-vous achete une maison de- puis que je vous ai vu la semaine dernifere ? Oui, j'en ai achete une avant-hier. 127 Reading Exercise No. 27. i Pendant le dernier voyage d'un bateau h vapeur qui fait le servicel entre I'Angleterre et les Etats-Unis, deux passagers, I'un Anglais et I'autre Americain, oausaient de prouesses en matiere de force et d'adresse Tout-&,-ooup, et apres avoir parle des exploits^ des autres, I'Amerioain deolara qu'il lui etait arrive^ une fois de tirer* neuf cent- quatre-vingt-dix-neuf pigeons, I'un apres I'autre. "Pour- quoi pas mille?" remarqua son interlocuteur. — " J'ai dit^ neuf cent-quatre-vingt-dix-neuf," repeta I'Americain d'un air vexe.6 " Je ne ferais'^ certainement pas un mensonge pour un pigeon." Ce fut alors le tour de I'Anglais qui raoonta avec des details tres oirconstan Qies, ^ le fait extra- ordinaire d'un homme qui avait nage^ tout le temps de Liverpool a Boston. "L'avez-vous vui"?" demanda rAmericain : " Si je I'ai vu? je feisaisH preoisement comme awourd'hui la traverseel2 de I'Ocean, et nous passames tout pres de luiis al* quelques milles du port de Boston." — "Eh bienisi Monsieur," s'ecrial^ I'Americain, d'uni^ air de triomphe "je suis bien heureux que vons I'ayez vui8; c'etait moi ; et, desormaisl^, si quelqu'un a l'air20 de douter21 de la veracite de cette histoire, j'en appellerai22 a votre temoignage23, puisque vous avez ete temoin oculaire2* de mon exploit. 1 fait le service, plies, 2 exploits, exploits, 3 itait wrrivi, had happened 4 tirer, to shoot, 5 j'ai dit, I have said, 6 vexi, vexed, 7 ferais, would make, 8 circonstanciSs, precise, 9 nagi, swum, 10 mi, seen, 11 jefaisais, I was making, 12 la Iraversie, the (sea) voyage, 13 toutpris de lui, close to him, 14 A, within, 15 eh bien, very well, 16 s'ecria, exclaimed, 17 d', with, 18 ayez vie, have seen, 19 di- sormais, henceforth, 20 a I'air, seems, 21 de douter, to suspect, ,2^ fen appellerai, I shaU appeal, 2S timoigTiage, testimony, 23timoiii oculaire, eye witness. 128 TwBNTT-BiGHTH Lbsson. Vingt-huitieme Legon. Conjunctions (condvded). XII. — The co7K?w;iiw conjunction, which is so called hecause it conducts the sentence to its perfection, is the conjunction que, that. (See Lesson 26). Que conjunction must not be confounded with que adverb and que relative or interrogative pronoun. Que is an adverb at the beginning of the second term of a com- parison, and translates as, than. n est plus riche que moi. He is richer than I. II est aussi savant que sonfrtre. He is as learned as his brother. Que is also adverb, when joined to «e, in the meaning of onl^, iut, or at the beginning of exclamative sentences in the meaning of how. II n'a que quinze ans. He is but fifteen years old. Que vous 4tes ion/ Sow kind you are ! Que is a relative pronoun when it is preceded by a noun or pro- noun, called its antecedent, and translates whom or which. L'homme que votis connaissez. The man whom you know. Ze livre que vous lisez. The book which you read. Cest le mien que vous avez. It is mine which you have. Que is an interrogative pronoun, when at the beginning of an in- terrogative sentence and translates what. Que voulez-voiis? What do you wish? Interjections, Interjections are words used to express the sudden affections of the mind. They are divided into : 1. Interjections of joy, as, ah! ah ! ion/ well ! 2. grief: ah/ ah I h/las/ alas! aie/ ouf / dear me I 3. fear: a/i/ah! oA/oh! 4. aversion : fi! fi done ! fie ! 5. consent : soit/ let it be so ! 6. derision : bah I pshaw ! 7. surprise : eh/ eh Men/ M! ah ! halloo ! 8. to ancourage ; allons/ courage/ ^a/ come on I cheer upl 9. to warn: g'ojre/ beware! h/)l&/ hoa! hoy! 10. to call : AoM/hoa! hoy! At /eh! 11. to impose silence : chut/ hush ! 12. to applaud: Jrosw/ bravo ! luuTahl Note. — Oh is spelled 6 before nouns and pronouns: 6 Dieu/ Oh God ! 6 mon ipire/ Oh my father ! 6 mus ! Oh you 1 129 apartment, apparte- ment m. ape, singe m. blow, coup m. caue, cannef. coach, voituref. comedy, comidief. to consist, consjster to dress, habillcr effort, effm-t m. empire, empire m. to employ, employer to exasperate, exaspCrer extreme, extrSme face, figure/. German, allemand to increase, augmenter inn, aubergef. means, moyen m. to open, ourrir to oppose, opposer philosopher,>/.'4/osojjAe m. to prepare, pr'parer proceeding, proc, da m. to protest, prolcUer Prussia, Pritsse f. to try, essayer Exercise No. 28. 1. I think that his face is very beautiful.— I do not think that the coach stops' at the inn. — He is more learned than his brother. — He has but one brother. — How patient you are! — The professor whom you know*. — The news which he received (past def.). — It is she whom he liked (imp.) best. — Well ! I am very satisiied. — Alas ! his father is dead. Fie ! what have you done'?— Let it be so ! I accept it. — Halloo ! where are you! — Come on, my friends ! — Beware, the passage is very dangerous. Hoa! come this way*. — Hush! your mother sleeps'. (*)That we may return— that he might return — that they ('/'. j may return — that he might not return — that I may return — that we might return — that she may not return — that I might return — that he may not return — that you may return — that you might not return — that she may not return — that you might return — that we might not return^ that they (m.J may return— that thou mayest return. 2. Je d&ire que vous alliez' voir' cette comedie. Je ne trouve pas que cette dame habille ses enfants avec beaucoup de goAt. Les fleurs que vous avez dans votre jardin sout tr^s belles. Les amis que vous avez sent tr^s fid&les. Que vous etes heureux ! Je n'ai que deux heiires i. demeurer avec vous. Que d^sirez- vous 1 Je desire que vous soyez heureux. H^Ias ! il a perdu* toute sa fortune. Hoik ! votre p^re est dans la chambre et U d&ire que vous veniez'. Courage ! vous aurez bientfit fini votre travail. Bravo ! vos efforts seront r&ompenses. Silence ! votre frfere dort'". Fi done ! vous avez fait" une mauvaise action. I believe^' that he will be exasperated : he will protest against sucl'** proceedings. Prussia is but one part of the German empire. Hi apartment consists of" four rooms rather'" large than small. HoV beautiful those flowers are. Beware, the ape bites'*. Let it be so, I shall give you ten francs for this cane. Hush ! you will iuTease his grief if you speak to him of his misfortune. 1 stops, s'arriH 2 know, connaissez 8 done,/ai{ 4 come this way, venezparici 5 sleeps, dort 6 aUie^y may go 7 voir, to see 8 perdu, lost 9 veniez, should come 10 dort, sleeps 11 fait, done 12 believe, arois IS such, de tels, 14 of, en 15 rather, plutdt 16 bites, mord (*) See Supplt. for the subjunctive of verbs of the 4th conjugation Page lit, French Grammar. 6 130 Questions on Grammar. 1. What is the conductwe conjunction ? 2. Why is it so called? 3. What are the words with which que conjunction must not be ecu- founded ? 4. When is que an adverb ? 5. When is que a relative pronoun? 6. When is que an interrogative pronoun f 7 What are interjections ? 8. Give the interjections oijoy, grief, fear, and aversion. 9. Give the interjections of consent, derision, surprise, encouragemenl. 10. What are the interjections used to warn, to call, to silence, to ap- plauil Conversation. What do yon require? I wish you to go to the bank to bring that money. My brother has more time than I; would you allow him to go there instead of me? Let it be so ! but tell him to go at once. Come on ! be quick and do not remain too long away. When do you think you will be back ? I do not think that I shall be away more than three quarters of an hour. Take care ! there is a cab : did you not see it? Yes, but I did not think that there was the slightest danger. Halloo ! where are you going ? I am going to the printing office. Ah ! have you anything to do there ! Certainly : I must go and correct some proofs. Will you remain there for a long time? Oh no! I shall only be there a few minutes. Hush ! somebody is speaking to nie and I cannot hear what \ie says. Que voulez-vous? Jed&irequevous alliez i la banque pour porter cet argent. Mon frere a plus de temps que moi ; voulez-vous lui permettre d'y aller k ma place ? Soit! mais dites-lui d'y aller tout de suite. AUons! depechez-vous et ne res- tez pas trop longtemps absent. Quand pensez-vous que vous serez de retour ? Je ne pense pas que je sois absent plus de trois quarts d'heure. Gare ! voila un fiacre : ne I'aviez- vous pas vu? Si, mais je ne peusais pas qu'il y eflt le moinie danger. Holi ! oil allez-vous ? Je vais k I'imprimerie. Ah 1 avez-vous quelnue chose h, v fah-o? ■^ Certainement : il faut que j'aille con-iger quelques epreuves. Y resterez-vous longtemps? Oh non ! je n'y resterai que quel- ques minutes. Chut! quelqu'un me parle et je ne poux pas entendre ce qu'U me dit. ' ~— ■- - 131 Reading Exercise No- 28. Lorsque Frederic le Grand, roi de Prusse, allait faire^ <3e petites excursions, il emmenait^ souvent Voltaire aveo lui. 11 aiTivaS done qu'une fois* le roi s'etant conformcS a cette habitude, que le philosophe le suivait^ seul dans une voiture. Or un jeune page, que Voltaire avait fait punir7 severement, quelques jours auparavant, avait resoluS de se venger,^ et comme le servicei" du jeune horume consistait h, precederli le roi, et a voirl2 si les relaisl* avaient ete prepares, il raconta a tous les maitres-de-postel* que le roi avait un vieux singe qu'il aimait beaucoup, qu'il habillait comme un gentilhommeis et qu'il emmenait dans ses voyages. "L'animal," disait-iU6, "ne connalt quel^ Sa Majeste; il est tres-mechantis, et s'il voulaitis essayer de sortir20 de sa voiture, il faudrait2i employer tous les moyens pour Ten empecher22." Cliaque fois done que^S Voltaire arrivait a une maison de posted* et voulait25 des- cendre26 de voiture, les gens27 de I'auberge s'opposaient a ses efforts : plusieurs fois meme28, comme il sortait29 la main pour ouvrir la portiere^o, il reput sur les doigts de bons coups de canne, h, la risee^l des assistants. Voltaire ne savait22 p^g un mot d' AUemand et ne pouvait^S protester contra de pareils^* precedes : sa rage en etait extreme et les contorsions de sa figure augmentaient encore I'hilarite generale : La nouvsUe se repandit^s de village en village et tout le monde accouraitss pour voir37 le singe du roi. Cette cemedie se renouvela^s tout le long de la route, et pour exasperer encore la colere de Voltaire, le roi trouva le tour39 si bon qu'il ne voulut*" pas que I'auteur en ftit puni. 1 allait faire, went to make, 2 emmenait, took, 3 il arriva, it happened, i v/nefois, once, 5 s'itami conformi d, having complied with, 6 swivait, followed, 7 avait fait punir, had caused to be punished, 8 riaolu, resolved, 9 de se venger, to revenge himself, 10 service, duty, il & priedder, in preceding, 12 & voir, seeing, 18 relais, relays, 14 Tnattres-de-poste, post-masters, 15 gentilhomme, nobleman, 16 disait-iX, he said, 17 ne connalt que, knows nobody but, 18 tris- miehant, very vicious, 19 s'il voulait, if it wished, 20 de sortir, to come out, 21 ilfaudrail, it would be necessary, 22 I'en empk?ier, to prevent it from doing so, 23 que, when, 24 maison de poste, post house, 25 voulait, wished, 26 descendre, alight, 27 les gens, tha servants, 28 mAme, even, 29 sorlait, put out, 30 la portiire, the carriage door, 31 risie, laughing, 32 savait, knew, 33 po^cvait, could, ^i depareils, sxLoii, Z6 se repandit, sprvnA., S9 accourait, iduii 87 voir, to see, 38 se renowvela, was reneweii, 39 lour, joke, 40 voa- ■t, wished. 132 TWENTT-NINTH Lesson. Vingt-neuvierm Legon. Remarks on Verbs. (*) There are certain verbs which, without being irregular, present certain peculiarities in their conjugation. Verbs of the 1st Conjugation. I. — Verbs ending in cer, take the cedilla under the c before a and o.— Nous persons (from psrcer), we i)ierce ; je perqais, I pierced. II. — Verbs ending in ger take an e after the g before a and o. Nous mangeons (from manger), we eat ; je. mangeais, I ate. III. — Verbs ending in eler and eter double the I or the t before an e mute. J'appeUe (from appeUr), I call ; fappelUrai, I shall call. Iljette {from Jeter), he throws ; nous jetterimis, we should throw. Exceptions. — Acheter, to buy; harceler, to harass ; peler, to peel; diceler, to disclose ; bourreler, to torment ; gelcr, to freeze ; epeler, to spell ; becgueter, to peck, take the grave accent on the e instead of doubilnK the consonant. IVT— Verbs having in the infinitive an ^ in the last syllable but one, change that ^ into e before an e mute. Xespire (from espirer), I hope ; il espdrera, he will hope. Verbs having in the infinitive an e unaccented in the last syllable but one, change that e into e before an e mute. Je phe (from peser), I weigh ; notis mhwrons (from mener), we shall lead. V. — Verbs ending in yant in the present participle change y into i before an e mute. Je paie (from payer), I pay ; Us essuient (from essuyer), they wipe ; vous emploierez (from employer), they will employ. Some writers, however, keep the y in verbs in ayer, as payer, and spell je paye. Verbs of the 2nd Conjugation. Hair, to hate, drops the diaeresis in the three persons singular of the Present Indicative : je hais, tu hais, il hait, and in the 2nd person singular of the Imperative hais. Hair is the only verb in French which takes no circumflex accent in the 3rd person singular of the Imperfect of the Subjunctive. Fleurir, to bloom, to flourish, has two present Participles, Jleurissant, blooming, and florissant, flourishing, and also two forms- |for the Imperfect Indicative. B^nir has two past participles; 6emi,consecrated ; b^ni, blessed. Dc I'cau binite, holy water ; il fut bini par son pire, he was blessed by his father. Verbs of the 3rd Conjugation. Verbs in cevoir, like recevoir, take the cedilla under c before M ; je de'gus, que je congusse. The past participle of devoir is d-d to distinguish it from du, of the. The feminine is spelt due. (*) See for verbs, the Supplement. to accompany, cucom- pagner annal, annalef. astonishment, itonne- ment m. chief, chefm. combat, combat m. consent, consentement m. danger, danger m. 133 to degenerate, cUg6nirer devoted, di^ovA discreet, discret este em, estimef. exploit, exploit m. to expose, exposer to form, former to fujfil, remplir function, fonctionf, guard, garde/. heroine, hirolne f. love, ainmir m. nightly, noolivmt order, ordre m. report, rapport m. republic, ripubliq'ite f. touching, tovAihanl troop, troupe f. uniform, uniforme m. volunteer, volontaire m. Exercise No. 29. 1. I announce — we announce — I announced (imp. J — ^we announced (p. d.) — he eats — I ate (imp.) — we eat — he ate (p. d.) — that we might eat — thou callest — we call — they call — we shall call — we should call — that I may call — that we might call — I have called — he buys — we buy — I bought (imp.) — I shall buy — we should buy — that I may buy — that we might buy — we had bought — he degenerates — you degenerate — I degenerated (imp.) — he would degenerate — we should degenerate — that he may degenerate — that you may degenerate — I lead — we lead — I led (imp.) — he led (p. d.) — I shall lead — we should lead — that he may lead— that you may lead — that he might lead — they had led — I pay — we pay — they pay — I paid (imp ) — they paid (p. d.) — I shall pay — ^we should pay — that I may pay — that you may pay — that I might pay — I hate — they hate — I hated (imp.) — ^they (m,.) hated (p. d.) — hate (thou) — do not hate — I shall hate — we should hate — that I may hate — that we might hate^The trees were blooming (bloomed). — Fine arts^ were flourishing. — His father has blessed him — The church was consecrated. — I deceive — we deceive — he received (p. d.) — ^you received (imp. ) — This is due to me. 2. Nous ne mangeons pas de viande, lis mangeaient trop de fruits. Oi menez-vous cet enfant. Je le m^ne dans le jardin. Combien pfese cela ? Nous ne haissons personne, II halt cet homme. C'est une nation degenerde. lis degenferent chaque jour davantage. II paierait ses dettes, s'il avait de I'argent. Vous I'emploierez si vous voulez^ me faire' un plaisir. Les arbres fleurissaient dans tous les jardins. Les beaux arts ilorissaient h, cette dpoque*. lis ont reju une lettre de leurs amis. They ate much meat. We begin to speak French, He calls you. We shall buy new dresses this afternoon. Do they hope that we shall accompany them ? We announce his death to his parents. They ex- asperate all their friends by their bad conduct. He leads the armies of the Eepublio to the combat. They call you : go (and) see what they desire. They announced that they would be here this morning. 1 fine arts, les beaux arts see, allez voir 2 vouleZf wish 8 /aire, to do 4 ^.paque, e^ocli 5 go and 134: Questions on Grammar. 1. When do verbs ending in cer take the cedilla under the c? 2. When do verbs ending in ger take e between the root and the ending! 3. When do verbs ending in eler and eter double the I or the jiaras (m.), breedini stud harasser, to harass harceler, to torment hardes (f. p.), clothes hardi, bold harem (m.), harem hareng (m.), herring hargneux, quarrelsome haricot (m.), French- bean haridelle (f.), hack harnacher, to harness harnais (m.), harness yharpe (f.), harp liarpie (f.), harpy harpon (m.), harpoon hart (f.), vjithe -hasard (m.), hazard hase (f.), doe-hare hate (f. ), haste haubans(m. p. ), shrouds haubert (m. ), coat-of- iJiausser, to raise haut, high bantain, haughty hautbois (m. ), oboe have, emaciated Ji^vre (m. ), harbour havresac (m. ), knapsack heaume (m.), helmet hennir, to neigh heraut (m. ), herald .herisser, to bristle hemie (f. ), hernia heron (m.), heron .beros(t) (m.), hero herse (f. ), harrow, port- cullis hetre (m.), beech-tree heurter, to clash hibou (m.), owl hideux, hideous bierarchie(f . ),hierarchy hisser, to hoist hocher, to toss i^homard (m.), lobster Chonte (f.), shame hoquet (m. ), hiccough horde (f. ), horde hotte (f.), dorsel boublon (m.), hop boue (f.), hoe houUle (f.), coal houle (f.), billow I houlette (f.), erook bouppe (f.), tuft bouppelande (f.), asoH of great coat houspOler, topullabrmt housses (f. p.), housings [houx (m.), holly huohe (f.), hneading- trough ^buee (f.), hooting Jiuit, eight ^huguenot (m.), hv^ue- ' not burner, to inhale bune (f.), top (Tnarine) buppe (f. ), pev>et hui'e {t),wildboarhead Juirler, to howl bussard (m.), hussar C) Words very seldom used imd words derived from those given in this list have been omitted. (t) The h is mute in Mroine, liirowme and Tieroique, (^complice, compUcem. all'aiv, affaire f. arrival, arrivief. to assist, ai Icr to avoid, I'viter to claim for, ri^clamcr to contract, contracter disorder, disordre m. enemy, ennemi m. to execute, eocieuter to facilitate, fadliter heavy, lourd henceforth, doririavant instead of, mi, lieu de to live, demeurer miserly, avare moon, lunef. occasion, occadonf. to order, ordonner \ orgy, orgief. to present, prisenter pretext, prUexU m. prodigal, prodigva raiu, pluief. to rehabilitate, ri- habiUkr reprimand, r4primand» /■ ripe, mUr scandal, scandals m. shrub, arbuste m. smce, puisque spendthrift, dissipa- teur m. to strike, frapper study, 4tudef. Exercise No. 30. ^The words beginning with an h aspirated must be looked for in the list on the opposite page. ) 1. J'ordonnerai (k) oet homme de r^clamer sa hache. La haie est couverte de' fleurs. La houille est tr^s chke cette ann^e. L'habit de mon pfere est trfes bien fait^ Mon ami craignait' la haine de son en- nemi. II doit sa fortune au hasard. Le hautbois est un instrument tr&s difficile. II n'y a plus* de houille sous le hangar. Ce hameau est tr^s joli. Les houblons ne sont pas encore mdrs. Le h^rault se tenait' devant la porte. Le soldat le frappa avec sa hallebarde. Le mendiant 4tait convert de haillons. Le havresac du soldat franjais est tris lourd. Leschiens ont p^netr^ dans le hallier. Sa harangue a ^te tr^s eloquente. Ce hamac est trfes commode. Je ne le hais pas. Ma hotte est dans le jardin. Le houx est un joli arbuste. Je n'en ai que huit.' Le halo que Ton voit' autour de la lune est generalement un sigue de pluie. Avez-vous vu' la harpe que mon pfere m'a achetee. 2. The herald announced the arrival of the hero. This man's dog is there. The shed is full of rags. I do not hate my enemies. The river is bordered with* beech-ti'ees. They have no housings. Do not strike this poor cat. The dishes are on the kneading-trough. My brother plays the^ oboe. Do not harness the horses nov?. He held a branch of holly in his'" hand. The hoe is in the garden. lie was re- ceived with hootings by the multitude. He has some" very curious" helmets and coats-of-mail'' in his collection. I inhale the cool air" of the morning. He lives in the hamlet. This child is very much'^ in- commoded" by the hiccough. Do you play the harp? She was (the) mother of eight children. This great coat belonged to" my grand- father. The merchant who has sold you this coal has deceived you. The owl sleeps'" during the day. 1 C07tver(e de, covered with 2yai/, made a craignait, {qiwq^ 4 iZ ii'i/ n ;i7ks, there is no more 5 se tenait, stood G volt, sees 7 utt, seen 8 Ijonlercd with, hunUe de 9 to play an instrument, joi/cr d'H/i£jts/ru)ucni 10 in liis, d ia 11 cool air, airfrais 12 very much, tres 13 incommoded, iucomvioiie 14 belouj^ed to, ilait a 15 Bleeps, cioi ',. ,^ French Grammar. iS8 Questions on Grammar. 1. How aii3 the articles the and some translated before a noun beginning with a mute hi 2. How are the articles the and some translated before a noun begmniug with an aspirated hf 3. How is the demonstrative adjective this translated before a singular masculine noun beginning with a mute h! 4. How is the demonstrative adjective this translated before a singular masculine noun beginning with an aspirated h ? 5. How are tlie possessive adjectives my, thy, his, hers, its translated before a singular feminine noun beginning with a mute h? 6. How are the possessive adjectives my, thy, his, hers, its translated before a singular feminine noun beginning with an aspirated hi 7. How will you write /e, Tne, te, se, ne, que, &c. before a mute M Conversation. Where does this man live ? He lives in the hamlet which you see on the top of the hill. Where did you meet him ? I met him at the market-hall. Where did he put his clothes ? He put them under the shed. Tell him to bring the harness. He is gone to fetch the harrow. Do you hear your neighbour's hack? it has been neighing for some minutes. The flies torment it very probably. Where is the owl which we heard last night ? I think it is on the beech-tree which is on the other side of the river. What bird is that? It is a heron. Where did you shoot it ? On the banks of the pond which is between the hedge and the thicket . Why has the dog been howling all the morning? I dp not know ; it is very quarrel- Oil demeure cet homme? II demeure dans le hameau que vous voyez sur le haut de la oolline. Oil I'avez-vous rencontre ? Je I'ai rencontre h, la haUe. Oil a-t-il mis ses (*)hardes ? II les a mises sous le hangan Dites-lui d'apporter les hamais. II est alle chercher la herse. Entendez- vous la haridelle de votre voisin ? elle hennit depuis quel- ques minutes. Les mooches la harassent tr^s probablement . Oil est le hibou que nous avons entendu la nuit demiere ? Je pense qu'il est sur le hetre qui est de I'autre c8te de la rivitre. Quel oiseau est-oe! C'est un hdron. Oil I'avez-vous tue ? Sur les bords de I'etang qui est entre la hade et le haUier. Pourquoi le chien a-t-il hurW toute la matinfe? Je ne sais pas ; il est tr^ har- gneux. (*) The student will remember that no linking takes place before an apirated ft. 139 Reading Exercise No. 30. Un marchand, tres riche mais tres avare, avait un fils qui etait, oomme cela arrive tres souvent en pareil cas,i d'une extreme prodigalite. Envoye par son pere dans une villa d'nniversite,2 au lieu de consacrer* son temps k I'etude, 11 le passait* en plaisirs et en orgies, et il eut bientot con- traote des dettes considerables. Apres avoir pourvu^ pen- dant^ quelque temps a ses depenses, non sans accompagner chaque envoi'' d'argent d'8 une severe reprimande, le mar- cband deolara a son fils que dorenavant il ne devait^ plus^o compterii sur lui pour payer ses dettes : il lui ordonnait en meme temps de revenir^S au foyer paterneU^. En effeti* I'enfant prodigue se presenta le jour suivantis : mais il n'etait pas seul, il etait acoompagne dels deux bommes qui e'annoncerent comme etant envoyes par un creanoier pour conduirei'^ le jeune homme a la prison pour dettes. lis avaient espere, disaient-ilsi^, que son pere se laisserait flecbiris encore une fois^O et qu'ils ne seraient pas obliges d'executer I'ordre qu'ils avaient reyu. Le marcband, vou- lant^i eviter le scandale, et se disant^z que son fils n'aurait plus I'occasion de faire de depenses a I'avenir^^, puisqu'il demeurerait aveo lui et I'aiderait dans rpr affaires, pays la somme qu'on ]ui2l reclamait. Mais, belasl son fils etant sorties de la maison deux beures apres sous un pretexte quelconque ne revint^s pas : les deux recoi's^^ etaient ses complices, et I'argent qui aurait dii^s rebabiliter le dissipa- teur, ne servit qu'a^S faci liter de nouveaux desordres. 1 en pareil cos, in such a case, 2 ville cHuniversiU, university town, 3 consacrer, devoting, 4 passait, spent, 5 pourvu ...6,, pro- vided ... for, 6 pendant, for, 7 envoi, remittance, 8 cJ', with, 9de- vait, oagbt, 10 ne ... plus, no ..more, 11 comjiter, rely, 12 revenir, to come back, IS foyer patemel, {athev's home, li en e/fet, indeed, 15 suivanl, following, 16 de, by, 17 conduire, to conduct, 18 di- saient-ils, they said, IS se laisserait flickir, would allow himself to be softened, 20 encore une fois, onne again, 21 mutant, wishing, 22 se disant, saying to himself, 23 h I'avenir, in the future, 24 lui, from him, 25 itant sorti, having gone out, 26 rcvint, came back, 27 recors, bailiff's assistants, 28 aurait dH, ought to have, 29 ne servit que, only served. 140 TWENTY DIALOGUES on subjects of everyday life. (Vingt dialogues gar des gujets de la vie joumalih'e.) INDEX. (Table des matUres.) A meeting 141 TTne rencontre. About the way, or road 142 Au sujet du cbemin. Visit 143 Visite. RaOway Journey 144 Voyage en chemin de fer. do. do. 145 do. do. Sea Journey 146 Traversee. At a Town 147 Dans une ville. Letting Apartments 143 Location d'appartement* With a servant 149 Avec un domestique. Meals 150 Eepas. To write a letter 151 Pour eorire une lettre. At a money changer's 152 Chez un changeur. Buying 153 Achats. Carriages 154 Voitures. At table 165 A table. A walk 156 Une promenade. With a doctor 157 Avec un docteur. Paris Museums 158 Musees de Paris. The Streets of Paris 159 Les rues de Paris. How to progress in French 160 Comment faire des progrfes en Fransais. 141 A Meeting. Good morning, Mr. X..., how do you do ? Quite well, thank you ; how are you? Not very well, I had a bad cold last week and have not yet quite recovered from it. I km very sorry to hear that, but hope it will have no serious consequences. Is your family in good health 1 I have not seen any of them since the beginning of the week, as they have gone to the seaside. Shall you not go and spend a few days with them ? I should like it very much ; but I am very busy. Did you see our friend, Mr. White the day before yesterday ? Yes ; I had an appointment with him, and saw him in the after- noon. Is it true that he is not very suc- cessful in business ? I cannot tell you precisely : but I think he has been rather un- fortunate lately in his trans- actions. Did you buy anything at the auc- tion yesterday ? Yes, I bought several pieces of furniture, two oil-paintings and a few bottles of old ^ort-wine. Were many buyers there ? Not very many : the weather was rather bad, and I suppose that prevented many people from coming. Are you going to the Italian Opera to-night? No ; I do not understand a word of Italian, and besides the prinna are rather too high for me. Where are you going ? I must be at my office by two o'clock, and have just time to catch the train. Good bye I Una Rencontre. Bonjour, Monsieur X..., comment vous portez-vous? Trfes bien, merci ; comment allez- vous ? Pas tr^s bien ; j'ai eu un mauvais rhume la semaine dernifere, et je m'en suis pas encore tout-Ji- fait remis. Je suis trfes f3,ch^ d'apprendre cela; mais j'espfere qu'il n'aura pas de s^rieuses consequences, v ot' ; famille est-elle en bonne sant.i ? Je n'ai vu aucun d'entre eux de- puis le commencement de la semaine, vu qu'ils sont alles aux bains de mer. Irez-vous passer quelques jours avec eux? Je le voudrais bien ; mais je suis trte occupe. Avez-vous vu notre ami, Mr. White avant-hier? Oui ; j'avais un rendez-vous avec lui, et je I'ai vu dans I'apr^s- midi. Est-il vrai qu'il ue r^ussisse pas dans les affaires? Je ne peux pas vous le dire exacte- ment; mais je orois qu'il a ete un peu malheureux derni^re- ment dans ses transactions. iAvez-vous achete quelque chose hier aux ench&res ? Oui ; j'ai achete quelques meubles, deux tableaux a I'huile et quel- ques bouteilles de vieux vin de Porto. Y avait-il beauooup d'acheteurs ? Pas teaucoup ; le temps etait un peu mauvais et je suppose que cela a empeche beaucoup de monde de venir. AUez-vous ce soir aux Italieus ? Non ; je ne comprends pas un mot d'ltalien ; et Je plus les prix sont un peu trop elev^s pour moi. Ou allez-vous! Je dois etre k mon bureau vers deux heures et j'ai juste le temps de prendre le train. Adieu. 142 About the way, or road. Will you kindly tell me which is the shortest way to the Ex- change ? With much pleasure. Go straight on until you arrive at the church which you see down there ; then take the first street on the right and the second on the left. ?'hank you. How long will it take me to go there ? .\bout twenty minutes, if you do not stop on the way. Can you tell me if I shall find a good restaurant before arriving at the Exchange ? You will find some in this street and many others near the Ex- change; but the latter are rather expensive and I should advise you to go to one in this street, where you will be sure to find anything you require. Isthere any foreign money changer in the neighbourhood ? There is one opposite the church ; but I should advise you to go to the goldsmith whose shop is just at the corner of the street which leads to the Exchange. Is there any tramcar going in that direction i There is one just coming ; but it will not take you further than the church. oes it stop there? No ; but, you would arrive at the river if you remained in it as far as it goes. Can you direct me to the nearest post- office ? You will find it on the right, about two hundred paces from here. Is the telegraph office at the same place ? No ; you will find it on the other side, just opposite the fountain. I thank you very much for your kindness. Sir. Do not mention it. Au sujet du ohemin. Voulez-vous avoir la bonte de me dire quel est le plus court chemin pour aller k la Bourse ? Avec beaucoup de plaisir. Allez tout droit jusqu'a ce que vous arriviez k I'eglise que vous voyez IJi-bas ; prenez alors la premiere rue k droite et la seconde k gauche. Je vous remercie. Combien de temps me faudra-t-Upour y aller? Environ vingt minutes, si vous ne vous arretez pas en roiite. Pouvez-vous me dire si je trouverai un bon restaurant avant d'ar- river k la Bourse ? Vous entrouverezquelquesunsdans cette rue et beaucoup d'autres prfes de la Bourse ; mais ces der- niers sont un peu chers, et je vous conseiUerais d'aller dansun de ceux de cette rue, oil voua seriez sur de trouver tout ce dont vous avez besoin Y a-t-U un chan^<"ir dans le voisinage ? II y en a un en face de Teglise ; mais je vous conseiUerais d aller chez Vorffevre dont le magasin est juste au coin de la rue qui conduit a la Bourse. Y a-t-il un tramway qui aille dans cette direction ? En voili justement un qui vient mainteuant; mais One vouscon- duira pas plus loin que I'eglise. S'arrete-t-illk? Non ; mais vous arriveriez k la riviere, si vous y restiez aussi longtemps qu'il marche. Pouvez-vous m'indiquer le bureau de poste le plus prochain ? Vous le trouverez sur la droite, k environ deux cents pas d'ici. Le bureau du teUgraphe est-il au meme endroit? Non ; vous le trouverez de I'autre c6te, juste vis-a-vis de la fon- taine. Monsieur, je vous remercie beau- coup de votre obligeance. Ne parlez pas de cela. 143 Visit. Good morning, Madam; how do you do t Very well, sir ; and how is Mrs X...? Thank you very much, madam : Mrs X. is quite well, and she would certainly have accom- panied me if her sister had not come from Paris to pay her a short visit. I am very sorry she did not ac- company you; I should have been very pleased to make Miss S...'s acquaintance. Miss S... was very tired with her journey; but she will not leave London without coming to see you. Tell her how pleased I shall be to see her; I am generally at home every day after i o'clock except Thursdays, and never go out in the evening. Have you been in the country with your family ? Yes, madam ; we only returned a fortnight ago. How was the weather while you were there ? We were rather fortunate ; during the three weeks we remained at X . . . the weather was extremely fine. Have you heard from your brother lately? Yes, I had a letter from him yes- terday. Have you seen the last number of the "Monde Illustrd?" Yes, Madam ; I am a subscriber to that illustrated paper. Is there anything specially inter- esting in this number? There are very good sketches from the correspondent at the seat of war. Are you going already ? I am very sorry I cannot stay any longer, but must meet Mr. Z... at half past four. Visite. Bonjour, Madame ; comment voua porte2;-vous ? Trte bien. Monsieur ; et comment va Madame X... ? Je vous remercie beaucoup, Ma- dame : Madame X. va tres bien et elle m'aurait certainement accompagne, si sa sceur n'^tait pas venue de Paris pour lui faire une courte visite. Je suis tres f^oh^e qu'elle ne vous ait pas accompagne : j'aurais M tr^s heureuse de faire la con- naissance de Mademoiselle S.... Mademoiselle S . . . etait trfes fati- gu& de son voyage ; mais elle ne quittera pas Londres sans venir vous voir. Dites-lui combien je serai heureuse de la voir : je suis generalement chez moi tous les jours aprfes quatreheures, exceptelesJeudis, et je ne sors jamais dans la soiree. Avez-vous ete k la campagne avec votre famille ? Oui, madame ; nous ne sommes revenus qu'il y a quinze jours. Quel temps faisait-il pendant que vous y etiez ? Nous avons ete vraiment heureux : pendant les trois semaines que nous sommes restes k X... le temps a ite extr^mement beau. Avez-vous reQU dernierement des nouvelles de votre fr^re ? Oui, j'ai re9u hier une lettre de lui. Avez-vous vu le dernier numero du Monde lUustre? Oui, madame ; je suis abonne k ce journal illustr^. Y a-t-il quelque chose de sp&iale- mentinteressantdans cenum&o! II y a de tvhs bons croquis du cor- respondant du theatre de la guerre. Vous en allez-vous dejk? Je- regrette beaucoup de ne pas pouvoir rester plus longtemps mais je dois me rencontrer k quatre heures et demie avec Mr. Z . 144: Railway Journey. Two tickets to Paris, please. What class? Second class. Would you not like to have first class tickets for the sea journey. AYhat would be the diflference in the price ? Two shillings. . When does the train leave? At 10 o'clock. How long will it take us to go to Dover ? About two hours. Where shall I have my luggage registered ? Next door. Is there any smoking carriage in the train ? Yes, sir; there is also a Pulman car which any passenger can enter by paying a small addit- ional sum. Is there any special carriage for ladies? No ; it is not the custom in this country. Is there any great difference be- tween single and return tickets ? There is generally a difference of a quarter on the total amount. Please weigh my luggage ; handle the trunks carefully. Take your seats, gentlejnen. Please allow my friends to remain on the platfoi-m until the train ■starts. Your tickets, gentlemen. Here they are. You are in the wrong train, sir. Where is my train, then? I was told to enter this carriage. You very probably misunderstood the guard ; you will have to go to the carriages which are op- posite the clock : this train only goes to Have I time to go and have some refreshments? You have just five minutes. Voyage en chemin de fer. Deu.x billets pour Paris, s'il v. pi. Quelle classe? DeuxiJme classe. Ne voudriez-vous pas avoir des billets de premiere classe pour la traversee? Quelle serait la difference de prix? Deux shellings. Quand part le train ! A dix heures. Combien de temps nous faut-il pour aller k Douvres ? Environ deux heures. Oh. dois-je faire enregistrer mes bagages? A la porte d'k c6te. Y a-t-il dans le train une voiture pour les fumeurs ? Oui, monsieur; il y a aussi une voiture Pulman oil peut entrer ohaque voyageur, en payant un petit supplement. Y a-t-il des wagons spfciaux poui les Dames? Non ; ce n'est pas I'habitude dans oe pays-ci. Y a-t-il une grande difference entre le prix des biUets simples et celui des billets d"aller et retour? II y a generalement une difference d'un quart ds la somme totale. Veuillezpeser mes bagages: maniez soigneusement les maUes. En voiture, messieurs. Veuillez permettre i, mes amis de rester sur le quai jusqu'k ce que le train parte. Vos billets, messieurs. Les voici. Monsieur, vous etes dans le mau- vais train. Oil done est mon train : on m'a dit d'entrer dans cette voiture. Vous avez probablement mal com- pris le chef de train ; vous aurez a aller jusqu'aux voitures qui sont en face de I'horloge; ce train-ci ne va qu'il Ai-je le temps d'aller prendre quel- que rafraichissements ? Vous avez juste cinq minutes. 145 Railway Journey (concluded). Do you uot think the train does not ran very fast ? They are just repairing this part of the road and they must move over it very cautiously. What is the name of the village we just saw on our right 1 I do not know ; it is the first time I have travelled this way. Will you kindly shut the window; I have a bad cold and feel rather afraid of the draught. Would you prefer to sit with your hack towards the engine ? I will not trespass on your kind- ness. It makes no diflference to me. When does the train arrive at our destination ? At five minutes past four. Your tickets, gentleman. Have we arrived ? You will be at Paris 'in two min- utes, but the tickets are always collected before reaching the station. Where have I to go to get my luggage? Pass this way and you will see the custom officers standing at the entrance of the room where your luggage will be searched and then delivered to you. Shall we have to wait a long timel I do not think so : about a quarter of an hour or twenty minutes. Do you want me to open this trunk ? I have nothing in it but clothes. We are bound to examine every trunk. I have only a pound of tobacco for personal use. You can close your portmanteau. Voyage en ohemin de fer Ne croyez-vous pas que le train ne march e pas tris rapidement. lis sont en train de reparer oette partie de la voie, et on doit en cet endroit-ei marcher aveo beaucoup de pr&autions. Quel est le nom du village que nou? renons de voii- sur notre droile ? Je ne sais pas ; c'est la premiere fois que j e voyage par cette route. Voudriez-vous avoir la bont^ de former la portiere j j'ai un mau- vais rhume et je crains beaucoup les courants d'air. Pr^fereriez-vous vous asseoir le doi tourne k la machine ? Je n'abuserai pas ie votre bont^. Cela m'est indiflferent. Quand le train arrive-t-il h, notre- destination ? A quatre heufes cinq minutes. Vos billets, messieurs. Sommes-nous arrives? Vous serez k Paris dans deux minutes, mais on prend toujours- les billets avant d'arriver k la gare. Ou dois-je aller pour avoir mes bagages ? Passez par ici et vous verrez lea douaniers debout k I'entree de la salle oh vos bagages seroiit visites et ensuite vous seront remis. Aurons-nouslongtemps i attendre? Je ne pense pas : environ un quart d'heure ou vingt minutes. Voulez-vous que j'ouvre cette malle ; je n'y ai que des effets. Nous sommes forces de visiter chaque malle. Je n'ai qu'une livre de tabac pour mon usage personnel. Vous pouvez fermer votre porte- manteau. 146 Sea Journey. Which is the steamer for Dieppe ? The one you see there alongside the quay. When will she start? At high water — at two thirty five The steamer appears to me to be very small. Oh, no ; she is a veiy good si^e : she has been plying between Newhaven and Dieppe the last two years, and although the sea is often rough, has neve-r re- quired any important repairs. Will you show me the way to the second class cabins? •Come this way, sir. Steward, I am looking for a berth and cannot find any disengaged. Here is an unoccupied berth, sir ; do you wish to take anything? Yes, please ; bring me some tea. The sea is now very calm : would you not like to go on deck? there are few passengers there, and the air is cool and bracing. What is the light-house we see there, on the horizon? It is the light-house at the en- trance of the harbour. What is that boat, which is coining to meet us? I believe it is a pilot. I. think we are stopping. Yes, we must wait until the tide will allow us to enter the port. Is it not possible to hire a boat to take us ashore ? The sea is rather rough this morn- ing: which I suppose is the reason I do not see any boats. What is the signal they are just hoisting at the end of the pier ? The signal that there is enough water now to enter the harbour. Traverses. Quel est le bateau h. vapeur de Dieppe? ' C'est celui que vous voyez \k le long du quai. Quand partira-t-il ? A la raaiie haute, k deux heures trente-cinq. Le bateau h, vapeur me paralt trfes petit. Oh, non ; 11 est de bonTie.grandeur il y a deux ans qu'il fait le ser- vice entre Newhaven et Dieppe et quoique l a. mer soit souvent mauyaise, il n'a jamais eu be- soin d'importantes reparations. Voudriez-vous me montrer le ohe- min pour aller aux cabines de deuxi^me classe? Venez par ici. Monsieur. Maitre d'hStel, je cherche une place et je n'en puis trouver de^ vacante. Voici une place vacante. Monsieur; desirez-vous prendre quelque- chose ? Oui, s'il vous plait ; apportez-moi du the. La mer es t ties calme maintenant : n'aimeriez-vous pas h aller sur le pont, il y a 1^ peu de passagers et I'air est fi'ais et vif. ' Qu'est-ce que c'est que le phare que nous voyonsla-basal'horizon? C'est le phare de I'entree du port. Qu'est-ce que c'est que le bateau qui vient an devant de nous ? Je crois que c'est un pilote. Je crois que nous nous arretons. Oui, nous devons attendre que la mar^e nous permette d'entrer dans le port. N'est il pas possible de loner un bateau pour aller a terre ? La mer est un peu houleuse, ce matin ; c'est ce quitSit, je sup- pose, quejenevois aucun bateau. Quel est le signal qu'on hisse k I'extremite de la jetiSe? C'est le signal qu'il y a assez d'eau pour entrer dans le port. 147 At a Town. Is there any omnibus which will take me to the Continental Hotel? Any omnibus will take you there. What are the edifices worthy of interest on account of their his- torical connections ? You ought to visit the Cathedra!, the Town Hall, the Law courts, the bridges, and the old gates, the only remains of the ramparts of the city. Is the cathedral a very ancient building? It is one of the oldest specimens of gothic architecture in our country. Is an industrial town ? It is renowned for its cotton mills and also for its cloth manufac- tories. What is the population of the city? There were about two hundred and fifty three thousand inhabi- tants at the last census which took place at the end of last year. Is there anything to be seen in the surrounding country ? There are the ruins of an old ab- bey, the modern castle of the Earl of , and a beautiful forest of oaks and beech-trees. Will you be able to come with me to-morrow. Yes ; with much pleasure. What is the width of the river? About two hundred yards. Is the current very rapid ? Not very. What is the little chapel which I see there, on the top of the hill? It is the cemetery chapel. Are there any remarkable monu- ments in it ? Hardly any ; it was only built ten years ago. Dans une ville. Y a-t-il un omnibus qui me con- duiae h I'HStel Continental ? N'importe quel omnibus voua y conduira. Quels sont lea Mifices qui sont dignes d'int^rSt, k cause des sou- venirs historiques qui s'y rat« tachent ? Vous devi'iez visiter la cathMrale, I'hStel de ville, le palais de justice, les ponts, et les vieilles portes, seuls vestiges des rem- parts de la cit^. La cath^drale est-elle un Edifice trfes ancien? C'est un des plus vieux specimens d'architecture gothique de notre pays. Est-oe que est une ville in- dustrielle ? Eileestrenomm^e pour ses filatures de coton et aussi pour ses manu- factures de drap. Quelle est la population de cette ville? II y avait environ deux cent- cinquante-trois niille habitants an dernier recensement qui aeu lieu a la fin de I'annee derniJre. Y a-t-il quelque chose a voir dans le pays environnant ? II y alesruinesd'une vieilleabbaye, le chateau moderne du comte de , et une belle foret de de chines et de hetres. Pourrez-vous venir avec moi de- main? Oui ; avec beaucoup de plaisir. Quelle est la largeur de la riviere? Environ deux cents yards. Le courant est-il trfes-rapide? Non, il ne Test pas. Quelle est la petite chapelle que je vols \h., sur le sommet de la colline ? C'est la chapelle du cimetifere. Y a-t-il quelques remavquables monuments ? II n'y en a pour ainsi dire pas: ilu'y a que dix ans qu'elle est bitie. 148 Letting Apartments, I should like to have a suite- of rooms composed of a drawing- room, a dining room, three hed- rooms, a kitchen, and two rooms for servants. What floor would suit you best ? The first or second floor. We have no apartments vacant on either of these floors, but we have just what you want on the third story. I am afraid it would be too high. I do not think it would incon- venience you at all, as there is a lift in the house. Are there any stables belonging to the mansion ? No, sir ; but the mews are situated within two minutes walk, and you can see them very well from the back windows of your apart- , ment. Is there any post and telegraph ofiice in the street ? Yes, sir ; there is a post oflice at the end of the street, and a letter box at the next house. What is the rent which was paid by the preceding occupier ? One hundred and twenty pounds. Is that sum inclusive of water and gas ? No, sir; that you have to pay Are the apartments to be let by the month or year ? They have always been let by the month, but the terms of a new arrangement can be submitted to the landlord. When could I see him ? In the course of next week ; leave me your address, I will let you know. I am quite willing to take the rooms, on condition I can have them by the year : I do not like removing every month. Location d'apparte- ments. Je voudrais avoir un appartement compose d'un salon, d'une salle a manger, de trois chambres a couoher, d'une cuisine et de deux chambres de domestiques. Quel est I'etage qiii vous convien- drait le mieux ? Le premier ou le second etage. Nous n'avons d'appartements va- cants h aucun de ces etages, mais nous avons juste ce que vous desirez an troisifeme etage. Je crains que cela ne soit trop haut. Je ne pense pas que cela vous gene du t out, vu q u'il y a ui^-.i-sscil-^ Y a-t-U des ecuries quiV appartien- nent a la maison ? Non, monsieur; mais Idfci ej^jriss sont situees k deu5c,j?fiinutes de niarche, et vo' tr pouvez les voir des fenetres d^ irriferede votre appartement. jT Y a-t-il un bulj ae poste et de telegraphe d', ,iis la rue ? Oui, monsieur ,• il y a un bureau de poste au 'bout de la me et une boite.aux lettres h, la mai.son voisineT Quel est le loyer que payait le lo- cataire precedent ? Cent-vingt livres sterling. Cette somme oomprend elle I'eau et le gaz ' Non, monsieur ; vous avez k les payer s^par^ment. Ces appartements peuvent-ils Stre loute au mois ou k I'annee? lis ont toujours et^ loues au mois, mais les conditions d'un nouvel arrangement peuvent etre sou- mises au proprietaire. Quand pourrais-je le voir? Dans le courant de la semaiue prochaine ; laissez-moi votre adresse, je vous le ferai savoir. Je suis tout dispose k prendre les chambres, h la conditio!, que ji puisse lea avoir h I'ann^e; je n'aime pas k dem^nager chac^ut 149 With a Servant. What time do you get up every morning? I generally rise between seven and half past. • V Will you then call me ev6ry morning as soon 'as you are 1? Yes, sir ; you may rely upon me, and should anything happen to prevent me, I shall not forget to tell another servant to knock at your door at the proper time. Take my boots, please, and bring them back into my room as soon as they are cleaned. The left boot is unsewed : shall I take it to the shoemaker to have it repaired? Yes ; but tell him that I want it this evening. There are two letters for you, sir. When did the postman bringthem? He brought them just now. I found no water on my toilet table, last night ; will you fetch me some, that I may dress my- self ; it is getting late. Do you want anything else ? Yes ; I should like to have two clean towels : do not forget to change them twice a week. Somebody brought this note for you and waits for an answer. Say that I am engaged and shall call this afternoon. Mr. X asks if you can receive him. Show him in. Shall you want your supper this evening ? Yes ; put it on my table, but do not wait for me ; it is quite pos- sible that I may be rather late, and I do not wish to disturb anybody in the house. Here is a key which the landlord asked me to give you, in order that you may come in at any time you like. Avec un Domestique. A quelle heure vous levez-vous les matins ? Je me Uve.^&fealement entre sept heures'et sept heures et demie. Voulez-vous alors m'appeler tons les matins, aussi-t6t que vous serez habUU? Oui, mons. ; vous pouvez compter sur moi ; et s'il arrivait quelque chose qui m'en emp§ch§,t, je n'oublierais pas de dire k un autre domestique de frapper k voire porte k I'heure convenable. Prenez mesbottines, s'il vous plait, etrapportezles dans ma ohambre aussitSt qu'elles seront nettoy&s. La bottine gauche est d^cousue; dois-je la porter au" oordonnier pour qu'il la r^pare ? Oui; mais dites-lui que j'en ai besoin ce soir. Voici deux lettres pour vous, mon- sieur. Quandlefacteurlesa-t-ilapportees? II vient de les apporter. Je n'ai pas trouv^ d'eau sur ma table de toilette, hier soir ; vou- lez-vous aUer m'en chercher, que je m'habille ; il se fait tard. Avez-vous besoin de quelque autre chose ? Oui ; je voudrais avoir deux essuie- mains propres ; n'oubliez pas de les changer deux fois par semaine. Quelqu'un a apporte cette lettre pour vous et attend une reponse. Dites que je suis occup^ et que je passerai cette apr^s-midi. M. X demande si vous pou- vez le recevoir. Faites le entrer. Aurez-vous besoin de votre souper ce soir? Oui ; mettez-le sur ma table, mais ne m'attendez pas ; il est pos- sible que je rentre un peu tard et je ne veux deranger personne dans la maison. Voici une clef que le proprietaire m'a charg^ de vous donner, afin que vous puissiez rentrer k I'heure qui vous conviendra. 150 Meals. What do you wish to haTe for your breakfast ? Two boiled eggs, rathemnderdone, and a rasher of bacon. Would you Uke tea, coffee, or cocoa? Give me some tea, with two pieces of toasted bread. What will you have for your lunch? Some cold roast beef and salad, some cheese, and a bottle of beer. We have some very nice cold roast chicken, and a leg of mutton; would you not like some in- stead of roast beef? I am afraid it is rather overdone for you. Well, let mo have some chicken. WUl you dino with us this even- ing? we expect Mrs. X and her two daughters, and Mr. S 's cousins. I am not sure I shall be able to come, but wUl do my best to be here. At what time do you dine? At seven o'clock. What shall we have for dinner. Ox tail soup, salmon, a roasted turkey with ham, and a haunch of venison, asparagus and po- tatoes. Do not forget to have seme supper ready for me. Will you have cold meat? Yes; a small piece of cold veal will do very well, with some Roquefort cheese and a glass of claret. Will you kindly ask the landlady if she would mind my buying everything I require ; of course she would charge me for cooking and attendance. I will ask madam ; but I know she does not much like that way of niauaffino". Bepas. Que d^sirez-vous avoir pour votie dejeuner? Deux ceufs k la coque, pen cuits, et une tranche delard. Voulez-vous du the, du cafe ou du cacao ? Donnez-moi du the, avec deux morceaux de pain grille. Que voulez-vous pour votre de- jeuner a la fourohette ? Du bceuf r6ti froid et de la salade, du fromage et une bouteille de hihre. Nous avons de tris bon poulet rSti froid, et un gigot de mou- ton; en voudriez-vous au lieu de boBuf r6ti ? Je crains qu'il ne soit trop cuit pour vous. Eh bien ! faites-moi donner du poulet. Dinerez-vous avec nous ce soir? nous attendons madame X et ses deux lilies, et les cousins deMr. S Je ne suis pas sftr que je puisse venir,maisjeferai demon mieux pour etre ici. A quelle heaie dlnez-vous ? A sept heures. Qu'aurons nous pour diner? De la soupe k la queue de boeuf, du saiimon, un dindon r6ti avec du jambon et un gigot de venaison, des asperges et des pommes-de- terre. N'oubliez pas de me preparer k souper. Voulez-vous de la viande froide? Oui; un petit morceau de veau &oid fera tres bien mon affaire, avec du fromage de Roquefort et un verre de Bordeaux. Youlez-vous avoir la bonte de de- mander k la proprietaire si cela lui ferait quelque chose que j'achetasse tout ce qu'il me faut ; naturellement elle me fei-ait payer la cuisine et le service. Je demanderai k madame ; mais je sais qu'elle n'aime ]i.as beaucoup cette maniere de faire. 161 To write a Letter. Be good enough to bring me some note paper, envelopes, ink, pens and sealing wax. Here they are, sir, will you re- quii'e any stamps ? I shall want a shilling's worth of halfpenny stamps to send some circular letters to my friends on the Continent ; twelve penny ones, and four two pence half- penny ones, as I must write to my brothers in France. Are some of your letters ready ? if so, I can take them to the post of&ce when I go out. When does the mail start? The letters must be posted before half past five if you want to for- ward them by the evening mail. I shall feel much obliged if you will post these two letters for France. I do not think I shall have time to finish the other three. Do you not think that this letter is too heavy? I do not thiii so ; but they will weigh it for you at the post office, if you ask them. Do not forget to bring me some post cards and two envelopes for registered letters. Shall I procure the Post-ofice order for you, which you men- tioned last night? Yes, please. What amount do you intend to send? Two hundred and thirty-two francs, twenty-five centimes : I am just going out and shall get the money at my banker's. Do not forget that no Post-office orders are issued after five o'clock. I shall certainly be back before that time. Pour ecrire une Lettre. Ayez' la bonte de m'apporter du papier k lettre, dcs euveloppes, de I'encre, des plumes et de la cire k cacheter. A''oici, monsieur ; aurez-vous besoin de timbres-poste ? J'aurai besoiii d'un shelling de timbres de cinq centimes pour envoyer des lettres de faire-part k mes amis du Continent ; de douze timbres de dix centimes, et de quatre timbres de vingt- cinq centimes, vu qu'il faut que ! j'ecrive en France a mes frJires. Quelques unes de vos lettres sont eDes pretes ? s'il en est ainsi, je pourrai les porter k la poste, quand je sortirai. Quand part le courrier? Les lettres doivent etre mises k Li poste avant cinq heures et demie si vous voulez les envoyer par le courrier du soir. Je vous serai tres oblig^ de bien vouloirmettre k la poste oes deux lettres pour France. Je ne pense pas que j'aie le temps de finir les trois autres. Ne pensez-vous pas que cette lettre soit trop lourde ? Je ne pense pas ; mais on vous la pesera au bureau de poste si vous le demandez. N'oubliez pas de m'apporter des cartes postales et deuz euve- loppes pour lettres chargees. Vous prendrai-je le mandat sur la poste dont vous faisiez mention hier soir? Oui, s'il vous plait. Quelle somme avez- vous I'intention d' envoyer ? Deux cent-trente-deux francs, vingt-cinq centimes : je vais sortir et j'irai chercher I'argent chez mon banquier. N'oubliez pas qu'on ne dffivre pas de mandats sur la poste apr^s cinq heures. Je serai certainement de retour avant cette heure. 152 At a Money Changer's. Will you kindly change this hun- dred franc note and these twenty franc pieces for me ? Would you like to have gold or notes ? I wiU take a five-pound note, four pounds in gold and the rest in silver and copper. What is the exchange for twenty franc pieces ! Fifteen shillings and eight pence. I expected to lose only three pence on every piece? I think, on the contrary, I am very reasonable in charging you four pence only. Can you discount this draft ? I am sorry I cannot do that for you; we only discount drafts when the drawer and the bearer are personally known to as. Can you direct me to any bank which would discount it? I am afraid you will find the same \ difficulty everywhere, unless you are introduced by a friend. Where could I sell these stocks? I will take them of you at market prices. Can you tell me how to invest a small capital ? I would advise you to buy Govern- ment bonds or some shares in our great Railway Companies. The interest is not very high, but you have not the slightest risk to run. I am leaving town for a month : could I deposit these stocks with you? We will certainly take them to oblige you ; but should prefer your depositing them with your banker. Will you advance me some money on these deeds ? No, sir ; we are money changers, but never lend any money. Chez un Ohangeur. Voulez-vous avoir la bonte de me changer ce biUet de cent francs et ces pi&ces de vingt francs ? Voulez-vous avoir de I'or ou des billets de banque? Je prendrai un billet de banque de cinq livres, quatre livres en or, et le reste en argent et en billon. Quel est le change pour les pitees de vingt francs ? Quiuze sneUings et huit pence. Je ne pensais perdre que trois pence sur chaque pi^ce ? Je crois au contraire que je suis tr^ raisonnable en ne vous prenant que quatre pence. Pou vez-Tous escompter cette traite? Je suis tiohe de ne poutoir faire oela pour vous : nous n'escomp- tons de traites que quand le tireur et le ""osteur nous sont connus perso^aellement. Pourriez-vous m'indiquer une ban- que qui I'escompterait? J'ai peur que vous ne trouviez par- tout la mgme difficult^ ; a moins que vous ue soyez presente par un ami. Oi. pourrais-je vendre ces valeurs! Je vous les prendrai aux prix du cours. Pourriez-vous me dire comment placer un petit capita] ? Je vous conseiUerais d'acheter des fonds sur I'etat ou quelques ac- tions de nos grandes compagnies de chcmins de far. L'interetn'est pas trfes ^lev^ mais vous n'avez pas le moindre risque k courir. Je quitte la ville pour un mois : pourrais-je depi tv ces valeurs chez vous? Nous les prendrons certainement pour vous obliger; mais nous pref^rerions que vous les d^- posassiez chez votre banquier. Voudriez-vous m'avancer de I'ar- gent sur ces titres ? Non, monsieur; nous sommes chaugeurs, mais nous ne pretons jamais d'argent. 153 Buying. How do you sell this ? At the price you see marked ; all ourgoodshave the prices marked in plain figures. Is that the lowest price! Yes, we fix our prices as low as possihle, and cannot reduce them. arcel. Vbitures. Cocher, combien me prendrez-vouj pour aller b, la gare du Nord? Deux francs cinquante centimes, monsieur. C'est trop : je vous donnerai deux francs. Trbs bien, monsieur; quel train voulez-vous prendre? Je veux partir par l"'expressj' Alors nous n'avons pas de temps k perdre. Oil va cet omnibus? II suit toute la ligne des Boule- vards. Quel est le tarif ? Trente centimes a I'interieur et quinze centimes sur I'lmperiale. Y a-t-il quelque dffferehce, d'aprjs la distance ? Non, c'est le meme tarif pour toutes les distances. Cet omnibus me conduira-t-il it la Gare du IKdi? Non; vous aurez k prendre une correspondance. Y a-t-il quelque chose k payer pour ce billet? Non, le oonducteur est oblige de le donner k tous ceux qui le de- mandent, sans aucune augmen- tation. Oi puis-je trouver une voiture convenable^unprix raisounable. A la premiere remise. Existe-t-il un tarif reglementaire ? Qui; vouspouvez avoir des voitures k la course on k I'henre k des prix trfes moderes. Les prix sont-ils les m€mes k toute heure ? Non ; ils sont plus eleves depuis minuitetdemi jusqu'asix heures du matin, pendant I'ete et sept heures pendant I'hiver. Y a-t-il quelque chosS k payer pour les bagages? Qui ; vous avez a payer un supple- ment de vingt-ciuq centimes par colis. 155 At table. Where shall I sit? Take a chair near Mrs. Shall I help you to some soup ? Yes, thank you. Mr. X , will you kindly pass me a piece of bread ? With the greatest pleasure : do you prefer stale or new bread ? As a matter of taste I prefer new bread, but stale bread is more digestible' Will you take a slice of this beef! it is very nicely done. Give me a very small piece, please; I do not feel very hungry. Do you wi.sh to have some gravy 1 No, thank you. Have some potatoes and some haricot beans. I would rather have some cauli- flowers. Will you kindly carve this fowl? I burnt my right hand the other day , and can hardly do anything with it. Do you wish to have some more meat? No, thank you, I have done very nicely. Shall I help you to some salad? I must tell you that it is seas- oned after the French fashion, that is to say, with olive oil and vinegar. Thank you, I shall like very much to have some, I am rather fond of it. Will you have some of this apple tart? No, thank you: I prefer some jelly. What would you like to drink! I will take a glass of claret ; beer causes me to feel sleepy , and I do not care for heavy wines. i think you will like this wine : we buy it directly from the grower, to be sure that it has not undergone any adulteration. A table. 0^ m'asseierai-je ! Prenoz une chaise pr^s de madame X Vous servirai-je de la soupe ! Oui, meroi. M. X . . . voulez-vous avoir la bont^ de me passer un morceaudepain? Avec le plus grand plaisir ; pre- ferez-vous le pain rassis ou le pain frais ! Comme affaire de go. d.)—l shall cover — you covered (i) — they (m.) cover — let us cover — he covered (i) — we shall cover — that we might cover — you cover — cover (ye) — did he cover —they would cover — they wiQ cover — do I cover 1 2. Est-ce que V0U3 avez convert les fleuTS ? Est- ce que vos parents sont arrives? Est-ce que la reine est revenue d'Ecosse? Est-ce que vos eflbrts ont ete infruotueux? Qui est-ce qui couvrira cela? Qu'est- ce qui couvrait la table? Qu' est-ce que vous avez faitM Qu'est-ce jjuecela? Qui est-ce qui est dans la chambre? Est-ce que vous" avez rencontr^ mon frfere ? Est-ce que vous avez vu'' les ileurs que ma soeur a achetees ? Suis-je votre ami? Est-ce que je sers' mon pays avecfidelite? Dois-je encore quelque chose ^ votre maitre! Est-ce que je dorsal Al-je bien travaille ? Est-ce que je perds' mon temps en ap- prenant^ le frangais? Est-ce que je cours trop vite? Do I sjieak too ■ fast! Do you think I shall meet him? Shall I cover it ? "Would you like to make' the acquaintance of this illustrious man ? Am I welcome* ? Do I know' my lesson "*ell ? Do I start^" at seven or at eight o'clock to-morrow morning? "Will you go to that remote country without Imowing^^ anyone there? Do I go with you oi; with your cousin ? Do I lose much by'^ not seeing-" him more frequently ? Did he discover his book in the corner of this cupboard ? You will not forget to cover the vase again. Am I in the light" way ? Who was with you at the concert ? "Whom do you know'° in this town's "What did you put on the table ? "What is there^^ in that box? Do you like this jam? Have you stiU your parents! 1 fait, done 2 vu, seen 3 je sers, I serve 4 je dors, I sleep 5 je perds, I waste 6 apprenant, learning 7 to make, a /aire B welcome, UMen venu 9 know, saU 10 start, pars 11 knowing, connaitre 12 by, en 13 seeing, voyant 14 right, ion 15 know, connaissez 16 is there, il y a. (*) See Snpplement, page 22. Ouvrir, to open; dkouvrvr, to discover; recouvrir to cover again, are conjugated lilce couvrir. 176 Questions on Grammar. :l. What is the idiomatic expression in French which allows the ordi- nary construction to be used in an interrogative sentence 1 •2. Is est-ce que to be translated into English ! -3. What is the meaning of qui est-ce qui t ■4. What is the meaning of qui est-ce que ? -S. What is the meaning of qu'est-ce q%d or qu'est-ce que ? €. Are such expressions often used in the lofty style ? 7. When is it necessary to use est-ce que ? •8. Give some verbs which, although being monosyllabic, can be used in- terrogatively with the usual construction in the 1st person singular. Conversation. "Who is in the other room ? My father with some friends. "Whom has he received this after- noon ? Several of his old school fellows and also his cousins from Lyons who arrived the day before yes- terday. "What are they doing just now ? They are talking of their youth- fiU years, and those recollections rejuvenize them. Can I enter the drawing-room to inform them that dinner is on the table ? J do not see why you should not do it. Have I time to go up to my room and dress myself ? You have hardly ten minutes : you will have to hurry yourself. Do I leave to-morrow with your brother-in-law ? I do not know ; he did not tell me. ^m I asleep, or awake? look at the letter I have just received. What does it contain ? The intelligence of the death of an uncle whom I never knew, who bequeaths me an income of ten thousand francs. Qui est-ce qui est dans I'autre chambre ? C'est men pere avec quelques amis. Qui est-ce qu'il a reju cette apres- midi? Plusieurs de ses anciens camarades d'ecole et aussi ses cousins de Lyon qui sont arrives avant- hier. Qu'est-ce qu'ils font dans ce mo- ment-ci ? lis causent deleurs jeunes annees, et ces souvenirs les rajeunissent. Puis-je entrer au salon pour les prevenir que le diner est servi ? Je ne vols pas pourquoi vous ne le feriez pas. Ai-je le temps de monter dans ma chamber pour m'habiller ? Vous avez dix minutes h, peine : il faudra que vous vous depechiez. Est-ce que je pars demain aveo votre beau-fr^re ? Je n'en sais rien ; il ne me I'a pas dit. Est-ce que je dors, ou bien est-ce que je suis eveille ? regardez la lettre que je viens de recevoir. Qu'est-ce qu'elle contient ? La nouvelle de la mort d'un oncle que je n'ai jamais counu, qui me legue dix mille francs de rente. 177 Beading Exercise No. 34. Un de mes amis qui ne croyait pas anx^ m^decins, probable- ment paruequ'il n'avait jamais it& sdrieusement malade, me disait^ un jour un^conte qu'il avait lu,' ajoutait-il,* dans un aviteur arabe,' et qui lui paraissait" tr&s amusant. Un habitant de Bagdad, voyant' sa femme en danger de mort, dtait dans la plus grande inquietude et ne savait' k quel medecin s'adresser, teUement^ il se mefiait d''°eux. II rencontra sur son cbemin un dervicbe," qui lui of&it^^ (jg lui vendre un talisman,!^ moyennant lequel" il pourrait^^ voir'^ ce que personne d'au'tre ne voyait." II paya ce^^ talisman une bonne partie de sa fortune, et se dirigea vers la demeure d'un mddecin dont on lui avait vant^^^ la science et I'babilete. Mais il se garda bien^" d'entrer obez lui,^^ car, grSce a^^ gon talisman, il vit^^ devant sa porte un grand nombre d'ames ; et il apprit^* immediatement par leurs clameurs que c'^taient celles des personnes qu'il avait tufes en les traitant.^ II courut^ aussit6t chez un autre docteur renomme^ dans la cite ; il y trouva un nombre d'ames plus consid&able encore. Apris plusieurs tentatives aussi infructueuses les unes que les autres, il finit par arriver® devant la maison d'un medecin dont on venait de^' lui donner I'adresse, et, n'y rencon- trant que deux §,mes, il se decida^" a monter chez lui. Le medecin, qui habitait jun quartier^i tres ecarte, lui demanda comment il avait fait^^ pour le trouver et pour quelle raison il venait^' le consulter de^* preference a tant^ d'illustres confreres. ^^ "Votre talent et votre habilet6 vous ont fait connaitre,''" repondit-il. "Vous m'etonnez," s'^cria^* le medecin, "je n'ai encore eu que deux malades."^' 1 ne croyait pas aux, did not believe in the, 2 d'iauU, told, 3 lu, read, 4 ajoutait-il, he added, 5 arabe, Arabian, 6 paraissait, appeared, 7 voyant, seeing, 8 ne savait, did not ,know, 9 tellenient, so much, 10 se mifiait d', distrusted, 11 derviche, dervish (mohammedan min- ister), 12 offrit, offered, 13 talisman, talisman, 14 moyennant lequel, by means of which, 15 pourrait, would be able, IS voir, to see, 17 voyait, saw, 18 cc, for this, 19 vanti, praised, 20 Use garda lien d', he took great care not to, 21 cTiez lui, into his house, 22 grdce d,, thanks to, 23 vit, saw, 24 apprit, heard, 25 en les traitant, by at- tending them, 26courut, ran, 27 renommi, renowned, 2& finit par arriver, arrived at last, 29 on venait de, one had just, 30 se dicida d, made up his mind to, ^l^quartier, district, Z2fait, done, 33 venait, came, 84 de, by, 35 tant d', so many, 36 confreres, brother- physicians, 37 ont fait connattre, have made known, 38 s'icria, exclaimed, 39 malades, patients. 178 Thikty-fipth Lesson. Trente-cinquieme Legon. Negative sentences. Rule I. — There is no such auxiliary verh in French as to do in English, to be used before the Infinitive of verbs used nega- tively. Such sentences as : I do not like it, I did not see him, he does not speak French, must be translated as if they were : J like it not, I saw him not, he speaks not French. II. — The negation not is translated in French by two words, ne and pas, ne being placed before the verb and pas after. I am not pleased. Je ne suis pas content. He does not sing. II ne chante pas. It would be wrong to consider ne as a negation by itself. It is merely a particle which must be placed before the verb every time there is a negation in the sentence (See for Exceptions, Eule IX.) but can be used in sentences without any negation (Rules 5., XI., XIL). III. — The particle ne is not only used when pa^ follows the verb, but also when the sentence contains, before or after the verb, any of the following expressions which imply an idea of negation: guire, but little ni ... ni, neither ... nor but nulUment, point,-) .^^ pas du tovtj j aucun, nul, no, not any nul, none personne, nobody rien, nothing jamais, never I have no friends. Je n'ai aucun ami. Nobody laiows me here. Personne ne me connatt ici. I have nothing for you. Je n'ai rien pour iious. He has but little money. II n'a gu^re d' argent. I have but two brothers. Je n'ai que deuxfrires, I do not like it at all. Je ne I'aime point. IV. — In compound tenses the negation is placed between the auxiliary and the past participle. I have not seen his brother. Je n'ai pas vu sonfrire. He has lost nothing. II n'a lienperdu. < V. — When there are possessive pronouns, objects of the verb, placed before the verb, the particle ne must be placed between the subject and the objects. I do not know him. Je ne le connais pas. I shall not give it to them. Je ne le leur donnerai pas. VI. — Wlien the verb is in the infinitive the two parts of tho negation follow each other and are placed before the verb. I think I shall not come to-morrow. Je pense ne pas ven ir demain. He wishes not to be forgotten. H disire ne pas Hre oubli4. to accunmlate, accu- muUr to accuse, accuser adversary, adversairc m. to affect, affecter carpet, tapis m. circumstance, circon- 179 to continue, continuer to count, compter due, d4 enterprise, entrcpriscf. even, pair favourite, favori m. generous, ginireux handful, poignief. however, toutefois odd, impair painful, pdn ihle to persist, pcrsistcr to play, jouer revenge, revanche f. stake^mi^t^ in, TSTS^total to win, gagner worthy. Exercise No. 35. 1. (*)To sleep— you sleep — I slept (i) — he did not sleep— I shall sleep— we slept (ij — sleep (ye) — I sleep — you would sleep— that I might sleep— we shall not sleep — ^I did not sleep — we should sleep — you sleep — they (m.J wiU sleep— Do you 'sleep ? — we shall sleep — we did not sleep — that I may sleep — they (m.J sleep — you slept (iJ — you did not sleep — you will not sleep — that we might sleep — we sleep — thou sleep- est — they slept (iJ — that he might sleep— they did not sleep. 2. Ses adversaires ne sont^ pas encore arrives. Les circonstanoes ne sent pas favorables, neanmoins ils reussisseut dans leur entreprise. Cette somme ne vous est pas due. II ne dort jamais avant onze heures. Nous n'avons guere d'amis. Personne ne dormait dans la maison. Je ne dormirai pas avant que vous vous couchiez^. Nous n'avons 'pa.s vu' le cheval que vous avez achete. Nous ne le donnons pas au voisin. II ne nous le vendrait pas. Je pense ne pas etre le dernier au rendez- 1 vous*. Aucun ami n'aurait fait^ cela pour vous. Ni votre_ frere ni v otrfi sneuT ne sont arri ves ce soii\ Je ne les aime pas du~ tout. lis ne joueront que deux parties''. Her favourite dog sleeps on the carpet ; do not wake it. He is not very generous. Nobody wishes' to play with him. "We shall not take' our revenge ; our adversaries are not worthy of our attention. The circumstances are no longer' the same. They will not sleep in this house. I do not desire that he should sleep (pres. sulj.) here. I made him sleep^" soon. Old men^^ do not sleep so well as children. He has not been generous towards his friends. They will not persist in their resolution. How many hours do you sleep every night ? I shall not sleep much this fortnight-'^. Enterprises are not always lucky. He does not count what he wins. We slept ten hours and a half. Do not sleep. 1 sont, have 2 vous vous coxwMez, you go to bed .3 vu, seen irendez-v&ns, place of meeting 5 awraii/aii, would have done 6 ^ariies, games 7 "wishes, veiii 8 we shall take, nous ^endrons 9 are no longer, %& sont plus 10 1 made him sleep, j6 Vtndormis 11 old men, les vieillards 12 this fortnight, cette quinzaine. (*) See Supplement, page 22, endorrair, to make sleep ; s'endormiTf to fall asleep, axe conjugated like dormir. 180 Questions on Grammar. 1. Is there any auxiliary verb in French which translates to do before a verb in the Infinitive in negative sentences ? 2. How is not translated in French ? 3. Is Tie really a negation ? 4. What are the words which require ne to be placed before the verb ? 5. Where is the negation placed in compound tenses ? 6. When there are personal pronouns, objects of the verb, placed before the verb, which is the place of the particle ne ? 7. What is the place of the two parts of the negation when the verb is in the Infinitive ? Conversation. Did you not go this morning to the market ? No, I did not go there. Had you not told me that you would go very early ? Yes, but I did not wake. . You will regret not having gone there. Why ? My servant, who has just re- turned, told me that she had seen some magnificent flowers and at a very low price . Did she not buy any ? No, she only bought some vege- tables. Nobody called me, and I slept so profoundly that I only woke at eight o'clock. It does not matter ; you would still have had time to go to the market and to make some pur- chases there. That may be true : but I scarcely care to buy flowers that no one ■found to his taste or that every- body has found too dear. Will you come with me next week? Neither my brother nor I have ever gone there ; and we shall go with you if it may be agree- able to you. N'avez-vous pas ete au marche ce matin ? Non, je n'y suis pas alle. Ne m'aviez-vous pas dit que vous iriez de trfes bonne heure ? / Oui, mais je ne me suis pas reveillf Vous regretterez de ne pas y etre alle. Pourquoi ? Ma servante, qui vient de revenir, m'a dit qu'elle y avait vu des fleurs magnifiques et ^ trts has prix. N'en a-t-elle pas aohete ? Non, elle n'a achete que des le gumes. Personne ne m'a appele, et je_ dor- mais si profondement que je ne me suis reveille qu'Ji huit heures Cela ne fait rien ; vous auriez en- core eu le temps d'aller au marche et d'y faire quelques emplettes. Cela pent etre vrai : mais je ne me soucie guere d'acheter les fleurs que personne n'a trouvees k son goiit ou que touli le monde a trouvdes trop chores. Voulez-vous venir aveo moi la se- maime proohaine ? Ni mon frere ni moi nous n'y sommes jamais all& ; et nous irons avec vous si cela peut vous etre agreable. 181 Reading Exercise No. 35. Deux amis avaient joue aux cartesl une partie de la nuit. L'un d'eux avait perdu des sommes considerables, et n'aYait plus que quelques centaines^ de francs, seuls debris^ d'une grande fortune. L'heureux* gagnant^ avait en vain refuse a differentes reprises® de continuer la partie'^ : mais son adversaire I'avait accuse cbaque fois de lui refuser une revanche qui lui etait due, et il s'etait vu* oblige, bien9 malgre luiio, de faire^^ ce qu'on lui demandait d'l^une maniere si provocatricel^. Toutefois, comme son ami persistait a faire^* une demiere partie et a lui jouer les quelques cents francs qui lui restaient, il oonsentitis, a^6 condition que son enjeu serait la somme totale qu'il avait gagnee et que Ton jouerait a pair ou impairl^ ; puis, tirant une poignee d'argent de la poohe de son habit, il la lui presenta. "Pair!" s'ecriais I'autre, apres un moment d'hesitation. — " Vous avez gagne," repondit le favori de la fortune. Et,en disantw ces mots, il remit^O les pieces dans sa poche sans les compter, et poussa du cote de^l son ami les monceaux22 d'or et les billets23 qu'il avait accumules devant lui. Le genereux ami me racontait2* plus tardus qu'il avait ete si penible- mentaffecte des^s circonstanoes de cette partie, qu'il n'avait plus jamais joue^^ depuis ce jour-la. 1 aux caries, at cards, 2 centaines, hundreds, 3 cWbris, remains, 4 Tieureux, lucky, 5 gagnant, winner, 6 6, differentes reprises, at dif- ferent times, 7 partie, game, 8 s'itait mi, liad seen himself, 9 tien, quite, 10 malgri lui, in spite of himself, 11 def afire, to do, 12 d', in, 13 maniire si provocatrice, so provoking a manner, li 212 Questions on Grammar. 1. Wiiat is the rule as to the agreement of the adjectives that precede or follow gens! 2. When is ions used instead of toutes, before genst 3. When is orge masculine ? 4. What is the gender oi osuvre, when it means the whole of the works of an artist ? 5. When is hymne masculine, and when feminine? 6. When iapersonne of the masculine gender ? Conversation. Could you tell me who these old people are ? Yes, they were servants at my father's, and I consider it a good action to assist them in their old age. Do you know many people here ? A great many, for my father was acquainted with all the literaiy men and lawyers of the town. Was not your father an artist ? Yes ; he was an engraver ; and you can see the whole of his works at the museum of our town. Did he not also write several novels ? He did: and I shall be very pleased to forward you a copy of his works, if it be agi-eeable to you. I shall be very happy indeed to receive and to read them, as I have heard them highly praised by two friends of mine who are people of wit and taste. What are you drinking there ? Pearl barley water: I generally drink some at the beginning of every spring. J knew a person that recommended "me to do the same. Kobody can say that it is an expensive or dangerous remedy. Pourriez- vous me dire qui sont ce3 vieilles gens? Oui, ils o'nt ^t^ domestiqnes chez mon p&re, etjeoonsidferecomme une bonne ceuvre delessecourir dans leur vieillesse. Connaissez-vous beaucoup da monde ici? Beaucoup ; car mon p4re connais- sait tous les gens de lettre et de robe de la viUe. Votre p^re n'etait-il pas artiste? Oui ; il etait graveur et vous pou- vez voir tout son ceuvre au musee de notre ville. N'a-t-il pas aussi icni quelques romans ? Si vraiment ; et je serai tr^s heu- reux de vous envoyer un exem- plaire de ses ceuvres, si cela peut vous Stre agrfeble. Je serai tr^s heureux vraiment da les recevoir et de les lire, vu que je les ai eutendu hautement louer par deux de mes anllS qui sont gens d'esprlt et de gout. Que buvez- vous Ik ? De I'eau d'orge perl^: j'en bois gtaeralement au commencement de tous les printemps. J'ai connu une personne qui m'a recommand^ de faire la meme chose. Personne ne peut dire que oe soit un remMe dispeny dieux ou p&illeux. "-^ 213 P-eading Exercise No. 43. Deux hommes, ^tant desoendus^ dans une LStellerie'' de' Tours, d onnferent en^ d4p6t un sac d'argent k I'hotesse, qui dtait I veuve, et lui recommanderent de ne le remettre k aucun d'eux, a moins qu'il ne fut accompagn^ de^ son camarade. Quelque temps apr^s, I'un d'eux se pr&enta seul et la pria de lui donner I'argent, prdtextant que lui et son compagnon en avaient besoin immd- diatement pour un paiement important ; et la veuve, oubliant la recommandation qui lui avait iti faite,^ et k laquelle elle n'avajt fait^ que peu^ d'attenti on. se des 3aisit__du^ sac. A peine I'habile I friponi" I'eut-il entre les^' mains, qu'^^il sMloigna^' le plus vite qu'il put,^* et ce ne fut qu'en remarquant sa precipitation que I'liotesse se demanda si elle n'avait pas agi imprudemment. Le lendemain'^^ I'autre se presenta et fiti" la mSme demande, et, comme la veuve lui racontait ce qui dtait arrive^^, il entra dans une violente colere, Qjt I'assigna devant le tribun al'^ en restitution J de son argent. Quelqu'un, ayant entendu parler^' de I'embarras de la pauvre femme, lui conseilla de dire™ qu'elle avait retrouvd^^ I'argent et qu'elle ^tait prete k le repr&enter^^, mais qu'aux^' termes de la plainte m§me^ du demandeur^^, elle n e dev ait^^ s'en deasaisir qu'en pr^sence^^ies^ d.eux_compagnons : elle sommait^' i al chevreitil cochon compagnon compere coq devin dieu dindon due empereur gouvemevr Mr 03 hdte ass baron rara he-goat drake stag canon horse roe-buck rig companion god-father cock guesser god turkey duke emperor son-iu-Uw governor hero host iaronne 'brebis chQvre cane hiche cltanoinesse jwnent chevrette coche, iruie compagne commSre poule devineresse deesse diude duchesse imj'dratrice bru gouvemanie Jdroine hdtesse jars lion loup maitre mulet neveu oncle pair paon parrain paysan perroquet piretre propMte roi sanglier serf serviteur singe tig re traitre gander Uon wolf master mule negro nephew uncle peer peacock godfather peasant parrot priest prophet kiug wild boar bondman servant ape tiger traitor 016 lionrie louve TTiaitresse mule — niece tante pairesse panache paonne marraine paysa n ne permche pi'6trcsse prophetesse reiiie laie serve servante tigresse trail resse A few nouns have two feminine forms, which have different meanings. They are as follow : hailJe^ise one who often gapes hailleresse lessor cJianteuee ordinary singer cantatrice opera singer chasseuse huntress chasseresse huutres3..(goddess) debnause seller debitrice female debtor demandejise one who often asks demanderesse plaintiiF devineuse one who easily guesses devijieresse con.jurer liseuse one who reads much lectrice professional reader bailleur chanteur chasseur dibiteur demandeiar devineur liseur picheur pidieur procure ur vendeur procureuse vendeuse attorney's wife seller procuratHce veiideresse proxy vendor 219 account, compte m, ancient, ancien to appear, paraitre to bite, mordre bonnet, chapeau m. to come out, sortir command, commande- ment m. costume, costume m. to deteimine, diter- ininer to disguise, dlguiser force, /oree/. furious, furieux ' governor, gouvemeur m. to imagine, imaginer incomparable, incom- parable loail, charge/. long, /«»,'/ manners, mceursf. p. minute, ininutef, to possess, poss^der ruse, rusef. -square, vlace f . tempest. ternvMe, f. wisdom, sagessef. Exercise No. 45. 1. (*)To fear. He feared (i). Did yoii fear? I shall fear. He would fear. Do not fear. We fear. I sbould fear. That I might fear. You feared (i). Shall we fear? I fear. That we may fear. I have feared. They (m.) feared {p. d.). I did not fear. He had feared. They (m.) fear. I feared {%]. You will not fear. They (/.) will fear. He will fear. Do you fear? "We feared (p. A). He does not fear. They (/.) feared. He did not fear. That they (/.) might fear. 2. Voulez-vous prendre un remise ? La voiture est dana la remise. \ Je vous paierai le solde de votre compte. La solde de cet officier no suffit' pas hP ses deplnses. J'ai fait^ un petit somme cette apr^s-midi. * n me doit une somme importante. Les plus beaux chefs-d'oeuvre* de la I statuaire nous sontvenus'de la Gr^ce ancienne*. Les oeuvres de ce sta- j tuaire ont ete trfes remarquees cette annee. Nous avons fait' un tour dans le pare. Cette tour est trfes aucieune. Les vagues etaient tres hautes. H m'a donne_ua_ tres beau v ase. Les bords de la rivi^ra etaient couverts d'une vase epaisse. EUe^ayait un voile noir sur son chapeau. Les voiles de ce vaisseau ont ^te emportees* par la tempete. La baronne~a"ete re9uepar la reine avec sa niece, sa bru et sa taute. Cette servante a ete tvhs fldfele k sa maitresse. When did you buy this veil ? He receives his salary at the end of every week. The steam was escaping' from the funnel" with great force. He has written^^ a violent satire against the manners of our age'^. The steamer arrives at two o'clock in'' the afternoon. I have seen two pretty white mice. The waves were furious . Minerva'"' was the goddess of wisdom. The empress has received my aunt and my niece with great kindness. My daughter's godmother has written" us a long letter. The little boy has been bitten by a gander. He has bought a fine mare and two mules (/.). A she-wolf was killed yester- day in the forest. 1 su^i, suffices 2 a, for 3 j'ai fait, I had 4 cliefs-d'ceuvre, master pieces 5 sont Venus, have come 6 la Grece aricienne, ancient Greece 7 fait, taken 8 em- portees, can-iecl away 9 was escaping, s'ichappait 10 funnel, cheminie 11 written, Scrit 12 age, siecle 13 in, de 14 Minerva, MiTierve (*) See Supplement, page 23. All verbs in airtd/re, eindre^ oindre are conjugated like craindre. 220 Conversation. What is the tower which I see down there on the horizon ? It is the keep of Windsor castle ; let us have a walk along the river, and we shall soon he there. Is the queen at the castle just now? No; she is in Scotland with the princess. Will she soon come back, or will she go directly to London ? She will arrive here next week and then proceed to London to hold a drawing room, at which all ladies of the court, duchesses, countesses, haronnesses, wives of ambassadors, &c. , are to be present. Will your aunt attend the recep- tion? Yes, she will go there and intro- duce to her majesty her. daugh- ter-in-law. Have you been to Greenwich park yet? Yes, and I was very pleased to see the doer running at liberty through the park, and coming ~to ask us if we had not some crumbs or a little bit of bread fo give them. What is that beautiful bird? It is a peacock, and the other bird, rather ugly than beautiful, is its hen which never leaves it from morning tiU night. What is the roaring I have just heard? It is that of a lioness. From what country does it come ? From North Africa. Has it been a long time at the Zoological gardens ' I think it was only bought at the beginning of last year. Quelle est la tour que je vois l.\ bas k I'horizon? C'est le donjon du chateau de Windsor : faisons un tour le long de la riviere et nous y serons bient6t. La reine est-elle k present au chateau ? Non; elle est en Ecosse avec la princesse. Reviendra-t-elle bient8t, ou ira-t- elle k Londres directement? Elle arrivera ici la semaine pro- chaine et se rendra k Londres pour y donner une reception, k laquelle toutes les dames de la cour, duchesses, comtesses, ha- ronnes, ambassadrices, &c., doi- vent etre presentes. Votre tante asslstera-t-elle k la reception ? Oui, elle ira et presentera sa bru a Sa Majeste. Etez-vous dejk alle dans le pare de Greenwich ? Oui, j'ai ete tres content de voir les chevreuils courir en liberie k travers le pare, et venir nous demander si nous.n'avions pas quelques ffijfis ou un petit mor- ceau de pain k leur donner. Quel est ce bel oiseau ? C'est un paon, et I'autre oiseau, plutdt laid que beau est sa paonne qui ne le quitte jamais du matin au soir. Qnel est le rugissement que je viens d'entendre ? C'est celui d'une lionne. De quelle contree vient-elle? De I'Afrique du Nord. Y a-t-il longtemps qu'elle est au jardin zoologique? Je peuse qu'elle n'a et^ achetee qu'au commencement de I'annee derni^re. 221 Beading Exercise No. 45. En 1643, Saint Preuil, gouverneur d'Amiens, voulant' s'era- parer d'^Arras, imagina une ruse pour laquelle il avait besoin du conconrs^ d'un homme haliile et determine. II pensa k un soldat nomm6 Courcelles, quil savait^ possdder les qualitda necessaires, et le fit^ venir^ : " J'ai r&oln'," lui dit-il, "de m'emparer d' Arras par un coup de niain^ ; vous etes I'liomme qu'il me faut^ pour I'exdcuter, et si vous r^ussissez, je ferai^" votre fortune. Voici^i ce que vous aurez k faire^^. Vous vous d^guiserez en^^paysan et vous entrerez en ville avec une charge de fruits surfa lete. Arriv6 sur la place, vous trouverez un pretexts pour vous disputer" avec un habitant que vous tuerez d'un coup de poignard^^. On vous arretera, on vous jugera et I'on vous condamnera k etr.e pendu. Or^^ vous savez^^ que, d'aprfes la coutume, les executions se font^^ hors de la ville. J'aurai plac4 une embuscade^'' prfes de la porte^" par laquelle vous sortirez, et aussitot que^^ I'attention gdn^rale sera suffisamment-^ excit^e, mes hommes s'empareront^' de cette porte, et comme je serai pret avec mes troupes, je marcherai en avant^* k leur secours^^, et je n'aurai pas de difficult^ k me rendre maitre^" de la. place^'. Aussitot aprfes, je viendrai^* vous delivrer*-". Que dites- vous^" de men projet?" Courcelles, resta quelques minutes sans repondre, puis, s'adressant k Saint Preuil : " Votre projet me parait incomparable," lui dit-iP^, " seulement je vous proposerai de changer^^ de roles^' ; je prendrai^* le conimandement de I'embiiscade et vous penfetrerez dans la ville sous le costume du paysan." 1 voulant, wishing, 2 s^emparer d', to capture, 3 concourSy co-operation, 4, il savait, he knew, 5 fit, made, 6 venir, come, 7 resolu, resolved, 8 coup de main, surprise, 9 qu'il tiw faut, whom I want, 10 je ferai, I shall make, 11 void, this is, 12 C8 que vous aurez d, faire, what is to he done, 13 en, as a, 14 vous dispiiter, to quarrel, 15 coup de poignard, stab, 16 or, now, 17 vous savez, you know, 18 se font, take place, 19 emhiscade, ambuscade, 20 porte, gate, 21 aussitOt que, as soon as, 22 suf- fisamment, sufficiently, 23 s' einpareront de, will capture, 24 je marcherai en avant, I shall advance 25 il leur sccours, to their assistance, 26 me rendre mattre de, to capture, 27 place, fortress, 28 je viendrai, I shall come, 29 vous dilivrer, to free you, 30 diles- vous, do you say, 31 dit-il, he said, 32 changer, to exchange, 33 de rdles, our parts, 3ije prendrai, I shall take. 222 Forty-sixth Lesson. Quarante-sixUme Legem. Syntax of the Nouns (continued). Remarks on the Numbers of Nouns. Proper nouns do not take the mark of the plural. Les Racine, les Corneille, les Boileau et les Moliire peuvent ttre con- sider es comme Us foTidateurs de la langue franfaise. Eacine, Cor- neille, Boileau and Molibre may be considered as the founders of the French language. Exception. — Proper nouns take the mark of the plural when they are used in speaking of men whose names are employed as common nouns, and of dynasties or families who have occupied an hereditary rank ; and also when they are used to designate the works of authors or painters. Peu de pays ont eu la gloire de donner le jour A des Somires et d, des Virgiles. Few countries have had the glory to give birth to poets like Homer and Yirgil. Le comte de Ohambord itait Vheritier des Bourbons de la tranche atnie. The count of Chambord was the heir of the Bourbons of the eldest branch. Le musie du Louvre renferme des Maphaels et des Veronises d'une valeiir immense. The Louvre museum contains paintings by Raphael and Veronese of an immense value. There are also nouns which never take the mark of the plural because they express always a single idea. Such nouns are : 1. Names of metals ; as, — or, gold; arg'eai, silver ; cmwtc, copper, &c. 2. Aromatics; as, cannelle, cinnamon; myrrhe, myrrh; encens, incense. 3. Virtues and vices ; as, — pureti, purity ; innocence, innocence ; paresse, laziness ; ivrognerie, drunkenness, &c. i. Adjectives used, substantively in an abstract sense ; as, — le beau, the fine ; I'utile, the useful ; Vagriable, the agreeable, &c. 5. Nouns which refer to the different stages in life, and the five senses ; as, — mollesse, effeminacy ; pauvrete, poverty ; enfance, child- hood ; meillesse, old age ; odorat, smell ; oMie, hearing : vue, sight ; goM, taste ; toucher, feeling, &c. Nouns derived from foreign languages which have not yet been naturalized in the French language do not take the mark of the plural. The following are the principal Latin and Italian words which, according to the Academy, must take an s in the plural : accfissi(,honorable mention a(7enda,niemoranduin book (ilhuni, album aliiiea, end of a paragi'apli alto, alto aparte, words said aside on l^iivo, bravo [the stage W)u:crU}, concert d('/)t7, balance due deficit, deficit domino, doniinos (game) diio, duet duplicata, duplicate Rvrata, misprint factotum, factotum folio, folio imbroglio, confusion impromptu, extempoi'izing mim&nU>, memento numiro, number opera, opera oratorio, oratorio peiisum, extra lesson piaTW, piano guatuor, quartette qiiiproquo, misunderstand- sojjrano, soprano [inj,' t^nor, tenor trio, trio ultimatum, ultimatum virago, virago visa, Vis6 zero, zero Maximum and mininiuTn, become maxima, minima. C'arbonaro, member of an Italian secret society ; dilettante, ama- teur at music ; lazzarone, Neapolitan beggar, are used in the plural withtlir same ending as in Italian; viz; carbonari, dilettanti, lazzarum. 223 ac coniplioe, complia in, to apply, appliquer {__ bottle, bouteillef. ceremony, cdr^monie f. chicken, poulet in-. childhood, enfancef. complaint, plaintef. to cure, guirir defect, difaulm. _tn dip, tremper to disffcace/dhhonorer drawing, dessin m. drug, drogue f. excess, exchs m. faith, foif. to fold, plie r hope, csfiramMf. to groan, gdmir to inform, informer to interrogate, i/nter- roger to invite, inviter ledger, grand livre m. metal, in/tal m. morsel, morceau m. pocket, poche f. painting, peinturef. ■Jpoverty^^gaMWei^/. powder, poudre f. prayer, priiref, to reign, rigner religious, religieiix remeJ[X,_TO2iMe m. to roast, rohr to rob, voter stranger, Mranger m. to suffer, souffrir symmetrical, sijmi- trique throne, tr6ne to. to use, Exercise No. 46. 1. (*) To believe. I believed (i). Did you believe ? I shall be- lieve. He believed {p. d.) We believe. They (/.) will believe. I should believe. You believed (i). We believed (i). I believe. We did not believe. She will believe. We should believe. Believe (ye). He believes. We shall believe. They (m.) did not believe. He be- lieved (i). That we may believe. They (/.) believe. That I might believe. They (to.) believed (i). He would believe. I have believed. 2. Les Titien^ et les Leonard de Vinci ont orne les palais des rois de France de leurs maguifiques peintures. Jacques 11.^ fut le dernier des Stuarts qui ocoupa le trSne de I'Angleterre. Y a-t-iP des Murillos dans les Galeries Nationales de Londres ? L'or, I'argent et le platine'' sont des metaux precieux. La 'foi, resperance et la charite sont les trois vertus theologales^. II preffcre Futile k, I'agreable. La pauvrete u'est pas un vice. Son enfance a ete tres malheureuse. II a perdu la^ vue quand il etait encore tout' jeune. Ses albums oontiennent' de tres beaux dessins. Oil avez-vous mis* les dominos ? Les deux premiers folios de votre grand livi'e ont ete dechires. II a compose deux nouveaux operas. II y a" trois zeros ; vous en avez oublie un. Danton, Marat and Robespierre disgraced the French revolution by their excesses. He has in his gallery two (paintings by) Veronese and three (by) Raphael. The Bourbons have reigned over several coun- tries in^^ Europe. Incense'^ is used in religious ceremonies as a symbol of homage. Where did you puf the duplicates of those two letters ? I have received the first' two'^ numbers of this review. We have two pianos at home". There are in the first act two beautiful duets. 1 Titian, Titian 2 Jacques, James 3 y a-t-il, are tliere 4 p^aime, platinum 5 tMologales, theological 6 la, his 7 tout, quite 8 continnneiit, contain 9 yais, pnt 10 il y a, there are 11 in, de V 12 incense, eiicens 13 did you put, avez-vous mis 14 at home, chez nous. (*) See Supplement, page 2S. 224 Questions on Grammar. 1. Do proper nouns take tlie mark of the plural? 2. When do proper nouns take an s in the plural ? 8. What are the nouns which are never used in the plural 1 i. Do nouns derived from foreign languages change in the plural ? 6. Give some words derived from the Latin or Italian languages which are written with an s in the plural. 6. What are the plurals of maximum and minimum ? 7. What are the plurals of carhonaro, dilettante, lazzarone ? Conversation. Are those portraits by Van Dyke or Rubens ? They are both by Van Dyke. To whom do these paintings 1 3- long? They belong to the Dandolo family who lent them for this occasion. What do these large albums contain ? Drawings and etchings by the best artists of the last century. Are there any duplicates of these beautiful prints? I think they are very scarce ; but I have been told that there was a second copy of them at Paris and another one at Milan. What music did you buy to-day ? I bought two oratorios by Handel, and a quartette by Beethoven. Can you lend me these two operas ? Witli great pleasure ; but you will oblige me by returning them to me tlie day after to-morrow, as I am leaving for the continent, and should like to take them with me. 1 shall not forget to send them back to you. Van Ces portraits sont-ils des Dycks ou des Rubens ? Ce sent tous deux des Van Dycks. A qui appartiennent ces tableaux ? II appartiennent h, la famille des Dandolos qui les a pretes k cette occasion. Que contiennent ces grands al- bums? Des dessins et des gravures des meilleurs artistes du sifecle der- nier. Y a-t-il des duplicatas de ces belles estampes ? Je crois qu'elles sont tres rares; mais on m'a dit qu'il y en avait un deuxi^me exemplaire k Paris, et un autre k MUan. Quelle musique avez-vous achetee aujourd'hui ? J'ai achete deux oratorios de Han- del et un quatuor de Beethoven Pouvez-vous me preter ces deux operas ? Aveo grand plaisir ; mais vous m'obligerez en me les rendant ' apres-demain, vu que je pars pour le continent, et que je voudrais les emporter avec moi. Je n'oublierai pas de vous les renvoyer. Heading Exercise No. 46. " Manager' la cli&vre et le chou.'' Voila^ un proverbe qu'on cite soiivent sans en connattre I'origine. Peut-etre est-ce ce qu'on va lire. Un liohime avait un bateau, dans lequel il devait^ passer de I'antre c6t6 de la riviere un loup, une chfevre et un cliou^ sans qu'u lui ffl.t* permis^ de les prendre tous trois h la fois.^ Or' il ii'osait passer le loup en* mome temps que la chevre, de peur que' I'un ne mangeat I'autre, et ses craintes dtaient les memes, s'il essayait de transporter la chevre avec le ohou. Ne sachant^" que faire", il s'adressa i un vieillard^^ qui, assis^^ prfes du bordi*, riait de^^ son embarras. " N'est-ce que^^ cela V lui r^pondit cet bomme; "prenez la cbevre toute seule au premier voyage ; le loup, rest^^' avec le chou, n'y toucbera pas. Puis vons viendrez chercber le chou, et, apres Tavoir d^barqu6, vous reprendrez la chevre et la ramenerez^* au point de d^part^', oil vous la laisserez^" pour embarquer le loup. Vous le passerez et reviendrez chercber la chevre qui n'avait couru aucun danger." On voit^' qu'il y avait^^ un moyen^^ ^e r&oudre-* la difficulte ; . tandis que^^, en se servant^^ du proverbe cit^ plus baut, on veut dire^' : faire des concessions k tout le monde et ne contenter personne. ■ 1 minager, to spare, 2 voild,, that is, 3 devait, had to, 4 sans- qu'il lui fM, without being, 5 pennis, allowed, 6 d, la, fois, at the same time, 7 or, now, 8 en, at the, 9 de peur que, lest, 10 sachant, knowing, 11 faire, to do, 12 vieillard, old man, 13 assis, seated, 14 bord, bank, 15 riait de, was laughing at, 16 n'est-ce que, is it only, 17 resti, remained, 18 raminerez, will, bring back, 19 point de depart, starting place, 20 laissrrez, wilb leave, 21 voit, sees, 22 il y avait, there was, 23 moyen, way, 24 resoudre, resolve, 25 tandis que, whilst, 26 se servant de, using,. 27 veut dire, means. French Grammar. 8 226 Forty-seventh Lesson. Qiuwwnte-septikne Legon, General Rule for the Formation of the Plural of Compound Nouns. In the plural of compound nouns, variable words which, enter in their composition may take the mark of the plural ; invariable words Uke verbs, adverbs, conjunctions and interjections, always remain unchanged. des oiseaveo-'/nouches, some humming-birds. des chova-jleurs, some cauliflowers. des lasses-cov/rs, some poultry-yards. des passe-partout, some latch keys. des avant-eowreurs, some fore-runners. des chauves-souris, some bats. Exceptions. 1. — "When the two nouns are united by a preposition the first only takes the mark of the plural. ■ des ciels-de-Ut, some bed-testers j des cTiefs-d^cBuvre, some master-pieces. I des arcs-en-ciel, some rainbows, ' des jets-d' eau, some fountains. 2. — Although variable, some words will remain unchanged in the plural when the sense clearly indicates that they express a singular idea. des hdtels-Dieu, some hospitals (houses of God). des appuis-main, some maulsticks (supports for the hand). des terre-pleins, some dams (full of earth). des tSte-d-tite, some private interviews (head to head). des coq-A-l'dne, some cock and bull stories (from the cock to the ass). des casse-cou, some dangerous passages (break-neck). des abat-jour, shades (bring down the light). des riveille-matin, alarums (that wake in the morning). 3. — On the contrary, some nouns will always be written in the plural even when the compound noun is in the singular, when the sense clearly indicates that the noun expresses a collective idea. un cure-dents, a tooth-pick (that cleans the teeth) I un lec-jigues, a becafico (that pecks figs) un serpent-A-sonnettes, a rattle-snake (snake with bells) I un couvre-pieds, a counterpane (that covers the feet) un essuie-mains, a towel (wipe hands) Remaek. — Nouns which in English follow each other without the interposition of any preposition, are translated into French in the reverse order and a preposition is placed between the nouns. la gare du chemin defer du Nord, the Northern railway station. une table de bois fiou en bois), a wooden table. The preposition d is used instead of de or en to indicate the purpose, or when speaking of a feature belonging to a peculiar pei-son or thing. fc couteau d, diamper, the carving knife. la salle d, manger, the dining room. , Vhomme d, I'habit bleu, the man of the blue coat. I I'enfant aiuc yeux noirs, the child with the black eyes. nlarnm, riveille-matin anxious, disireux [m. chief-town, chef-Meum. council, conseil m. count, comte m. counterpane, ctmvre- pieds m. court, cour/. department, dipurte- ment m. doubt, doute m. to drink, ioire to exclude, exclure to explain, expliquer to fear, craindre to grow, crottre to inconvenience, giner 227 knowledge, connais- sance f. to listen, icouter literature, litUraturef. martle, marbre m. master-piece, chef- d'ceuvre m. out-post, avant-poste m, ^assyoit, passe-port m. poet, poUe m. rainbow, arc-en-ciel m. rear-admiral, contre- amiral m. safe, coffre-fort m. sale, ventef, to show, montrer to sing, cTianter singer, chanteur m. snow-drop, perai-wigt m. species, espicef. steamer, bateau-A-va- peur m. susceptibility, suscepti- bility/. tooth-pick , eum-jiaiiK m. "" " [ towel, essui e^maiiisj)).. tulip, tulipe7r~ vice-admiraI7 vice- amiral m. to wound, blesser to write, icrire Exercise No. 47. 1. To grow. To write. To exclude(*). He grows. Write. Ha writes. I grow. I shaU write. That he may write. You exclude. He wrote (p. d.J. We grow. We shall write. You excluded (imp.). That he might write. Thou growest. He wrote (imp.). You will exclude. You would exclude. That we may grow. You wrote. We shall gi-ow. That you might grow. They (m.) grow. I grew. I «houldgrow. He has grown. We had written. Let us write. We grew. 2. Lea avant-postes ont iti surpris^ par I'ennemi. Les chefs- d'oeuvre de la littfoature d'un pays doivent^ gtre connus de' ceux qui veulent* en savoir la" langue. J'ai achete deux reveille-matin Ji la rente d'avant-hier. Les coffres-forts ont et^ trouvfe intacts^ apres I'incendie'. J'ai dans mon jardin des perce-neige et des talipes. N'ou- 'bUez pas de me donner deux essuie-mains demain matin. Donnez-moi les cure-dents, s'il rous plait. Les orangs-outangs^ habitent les forSts de I'Afrique. J'ai vu deux arcs-en-ciel cette aprfes-midi. Where are the counterpanes which we have bought' to-day ? The drinking-glasses are on the table in the dining-room^". We have re- ceived our passports this morning, and we shall leave by one of the steamers which ply^ between Bover'^ and Calais. There were^' two vice-admirals and four rear-admirals at the council. The »hief towns of the French departments are administered" by prefects'^. My gold watch is very good. There are many marble statues in the park of Versailles. Where have you put^^ the book with the red cover^' ? it «ontains^^ the masterpieces of our best poets. 1 rurpHs, surprised 2 doivent, must 3 de, "by 4 veulent, wish 5 en savoir la, to laiow its 6 mtacts, untouched 7 incendie, fire 8 orangs-outangs, orang- outangs 9 bought, CLchet&s 10 dining-room, $(ilU a manger 11 ply, /r>n,t U service 12'DoYei, Douvres 13 ihere -were, il y avait 14 administered, (f(/(/a- nislres 15 T^retects, prSfets 16 put, mis 17 coyer, cowvertwe 18 conimna, conlient. ■(*) See Supplement, page 23. 228 Questions on Grammar. 1. Give the general rule for the formation of the plural of compound nouns. 2. When a compound noun is composed of two nouns united by a preposition, which is the one that takes the mark of the plural ? 3. "When do variable words remain unchanged in the plural of com- pound nouns ? 4. When are nouns written in the plural even when the compound noun is in the singular ? 5. How are nouns translated into French which in English follow each other withfiut the interposition of any preposition ? 6. When is the preposition & used to unite two nouns instead of de or en ? Conversation. Where does your grandfather live since he arrived in London ? He lives in the house which he has let as an occasional resi- dence. Are there any entresols in the houses of this street ? No, there are none ; hut the ground-floors are very high above the street level. Has this district been long built ? Only about two or three years ; before it was nothing but waste ground, and the roads which led there were real bone-breakers. What rank did your brothers-in- law hold in the army ? They were both lieutenant-colo- nels, and my first-cousins were aides-de-camp to the king. Do you know if the news con- tained in yesterday evening's papers have been confirmed ? K 0, I do not know, but I believe they were only rumours. Most likely they were. Oh demeure votre grand-p^re de- puis qu'il est arrive k Londres ? II demeure dans la maison qu'il a louee comme pied-a-terre. Y a-t-il des entre-sol aux maisons de cette rue ? Non, il n'y en a pas ; mais les rez- de-chaussee sont tres eleves au- dessus du niveau de la rue. Y a-t-U longtemps que ce quaiiier a ete h^ti ? II n'y a que deux ou trois ans ; ce n'etaient auparavant que des terrains ragues, et les chemins qui y conduisaient etaient de veritables casse-cou. Quel grade vos deux beaux-freres avaient-ils dans I'armee ? lis etaient tons deux lieutenants- colonels, et mes cousins-ger- maius etaient aides-de-camp du roi. Savez-vous si les nouvelles conte- nues dans les journaux d'hier soir ont ete confirmees ? Non, je ne le sais pas, mais je crois que ce n'etaient que des T on-dit. J C'est tres nrobabft. 229 Reading Exercise No. 47. Le pofete anglais Prior avait ^t^ envoy^ k Paris comme ambassadeur. Son nom y toit connu aussi bien que ses Merits et sa socidtd fut recherclidei par les hommes les plus ^minents et les plus nobles de la cour de France. Parmi eux on remarquait^ le comte de X . . . . qui ne se lassait^ pas d'accompagner Prior partout oti il y avait quelque chose k visiter.* Un jour ils aUferent tous deux k I'Opdra italien, et Ik, d'apres^ une habitude trfes r^pandue^ k cette ^poque' sur le Continent, le comte, d&ireux, sans doute, de montrer la connaissance qu'il avait de la musique qu'on ex^cutait, ne cessait de fredonner^ les airs, assez haut pour incommoder toute personne qui a^irait voulu' ■ecouter les chanteurs avec attention. Prior, quelque^" ennuy^^^ qu'il fut, ne dit'^ rien pendant^^ quelque temps, craignant de blesser la susceptibility du comte ; mais, voyant" que son silence ne faisait qu'^^encourager^^ son compagnon, il se leva^^ et apostro- phant^^ le chanteur au milieu de^^ la stupefaction g^n^rale : " Ne te tairas-tu pas bient6t™, Italien de malheur^i," s'dcria-t-il^^. ' Et comme le comte, qui ne comprenait^ rien a une action aussi extraordinaire lui deraandait de lui en expliquer la raison. " Get homme," lui r^pondit Prior, "a une tr&s belle voix et chante divinement^ ; mais ne voyez-vous pas^ qu'il m'empeche de^^ vous entendre ? " 1 sa sociitifut recherchie, his society was courted, 2 on rema,r- quait, was conspicuous, 3 qui ne se lassait pas, who never tired, 4 d visiter, to be visited, 5 d'apris, according to, 6 tris ripandue, widely spread, 7 a, cette ipoque, at this time, 8 fredonner, humming, 9 voulu, wished, 10 quelque, however, 11 ennuye, worried, 12 dit, said, 13 pendant, for, 14 voyant, seeing, 15 ne faisait que, was doing nothing but, 16 encourager, inciting, 17 il se leva, he rose, ^18 apostrophant, addressing, 19 au milieu de, in the midst of, 20 ne le tairas-tu pas bientSt, wilt thou not be silent soon, 21 de malheur, wretched, 22 s'ima-t-il, he exclaimed, 23 comprenait, understood, 24 dimnement, very well, 25 ne voyez-vous pas, do you not see, 26 il m'empeche de, he prevents me from. 230 Forty-eighth Lesson. Quarante-huitiime Legon. Syntax of the Qualifying Adjective. Agreement of adjectives with nouns or pronouns. EuLB I. — All adjective qualifying several nouns of different tffelttders takes the mark of the plural and resnains in the mascu- mie, even if there be only one noun or pronoun in the masculine gender. Mon p^re et ma mire sant absents. My father and mother are absent. Lui et elle sont tris nUcontents. He and she are very dissatisfied. Elle a v/ne robe et wa chapeau noirs. She has a black dress and hat. Exceptions. — An adjective quaUfying several nouns or pronouns agrees with the last : 1. — When the nouns are joined by the conjunction ou. Monpire ou ma mire sera priserUe. My father or my mother will be present. 2. — When the nouns express nearly the same idea and form a gradation, the strongest expression being the last. II a un esprit, une intelligence vraiment itonnante. He has a wit, an intellect truly astonishing. 3. — When the attention is specially called to the last noun. n avail miriU Vamomr et la reconnaissance givArale. He had deserved general love and gratitude. Etjle II. — The adjectives nu, bare ; demi, half, and the par- ticiples ci-inclus and ci-joint, enclosed ; wcept^, excepted ; vu, seen; y compris, included ; suppose, supposed, agree with the noun when they follow it, but remain invariable when they precede it. II itait nu-tUe, il avaii la tile mm, he was bare headed ; une demi- livre, half a pound ; ume livre et demie, a pound and a half. J Excepts voire smwr or votre sceur exceptie, except your sister. ' Je vous envoie ci-inclus or ci-joint «?i« lettre, I forward you herewith a letter. — La lettre ci-incltise or ci-jointe, the enclosed letter. Exception. — Ci-jointjj)d d-inclus agree with the noun even when placed before it, when the noun is determinate. Je vous envoie ci-jointe la lettre que, vous m'avez demandde. I forward you herewith the letter you asked me for. Rule III.— The adjective /cm, late, deceased, agrees with the noun when placed between the article or the possessive adjective and the noun, but remains invariable when placed before the ar- ticle or the possessive adjective. Ma f cue mire, my late mother. Feu la rei/ne, the late queen. Feu m^es amis, my late friends. Les feus princes, the late princes. 231 accent, accent m. to awake, iveiller bare, nu \m. benefactor, Hemfaiteur charitable, charitable to conduct, coTidwire to curse, mavMre decree, dicret m. to denounce, dincmcer disinterestedness, di- sintiressement m. to destine, destiTier to drink, toire edict, Mit m. escort, escorts f. to fear, craindre to forbid, difendre fresh, frais goods, marchandises f-P- government, gouveme- ment m. harmonious, Tiarmo- nieux information, renseigne- ment m. invoice, facture f. liquor, liqueur f. to join, joindre mace, masse f. to offer, offrir pipe, pipef. probity, proHtif. to read, lire remarkable, remarqiM- ble % .Sastv ceiviure/,, to seize, saisir to sell, vendre shore, rivage m. to smoke, fumer spot, endroit m. state, etat m. subject, svjet m. suspicion, scmpijon m. to take, prendre to transport, trans porter use. toweigh, feser jeaL ^iiS TO. Exercise No. 48. 1. To join. To read{*). To curse. He joins They fm. ^ curse. He joined (imp.). I read (pres.). They (f.) cursed (imp.). I read (p.d.). He joined f^. d.). They (f.) cursed (imp.). You join. They (m.) will curse. Join. He will join I read (imp.). They (m.) join. I shall read. You wiU. read. Kead. He would join. Tkey (f.) would curse. Let us join. I should read. That they (m.) may curse. You should read. That I may read. That he may join. 2. Le vin et I'eau que vous m'avez apportes ne sont pas frais; Ce petit gargon et sa soeur sont tr^s paresseux. Votre cousin ou votre cousine sera pimie. Votre soeur ou votre fr&re sera recompense. Elle a mi respect, uue ven&ation profonde pour son bienfaiteur. II etait re- marquable par un desinteressement, une probite sans egale'. La lettre que vous trouverez ci-inoluse est destin^e k'' votre beau-frere' et je vous serai tres oblige de la lui faire parvenir*. Ses pieds et ses mains etaient . nus. N^e sortez pas nu-tSte', vous vous enrhumerez'. Feu ma mbre etait aimee de tous ceux qui la connaissaient. La feue reine etait charitable. Her voice and accent are harmonious. Have you any brother or sister older than you ? His zeal and activity are' marvellous. The enclosed letter contains^ much information about' your late sister. I was bare-headed although the wind was very high^". This fish weighs two pounds and a half. He has bought half a pound of sugar and three pounds and a half of ilour. You will find herewith the invoice for the goods you have received last week". All the family, the eldest" daughter excepted, wOl be here to-morrow evening. 1 Kin5 ^j/ale^ unparalleled 2 A, for 3 6eau/r*re, brother-in-law 4 /aire jsanjewir, to forward 5 mi-Ute, bare-headed 6 vous vous enrMtmerez^ you will catch « cold 7 are, sont 8 contains, contunt 9 about, au sujet de 10 high, fort, 11 received last week, regues la scmai'm demiire 12 eldest, ai-tUt. (*) See Supplement, page 23. 232 Questions on Grammar, 1. AVliat is the rule for the agreement of an adjective when qualifying several nouns or pronouns ? 2. With what noun does the adjective agree when the nouns are united by the conjunction ou ? 3. What is the rule for the agreement of the adjective qualifying several nouns expressing nearly the same idea and placed in gradation ? 4. When does the adjective agree with the last noun when the two nouns express different ideas ? 5. What adjectives and participles agree with the noun when placed after it, but remain invariable when before it ? 6. What is the rule peculiar to the adjective /«« ? Conversation. How do you like this fan and dress ? I bought them for the ball at the embassy. I think them exceedingly hand- some ; the fan is very rich, and the lace that covers it is of great value ; but it matches badly in colour with the dress. Do you believe that either ought to be changed ? Certainly, the fan ; the dress is really exquisite, and will suit you admirably. It was made by Worth and every- body acknowledges that he has real talent and genius, although he is but a ladies' tailor. Do you not think that these arti- ficial flowers are a good imi- tation ? The colours are of an incompar- able brightness and look per- fectly natural. I especially admire this half opened rose. Where did you buy these flowers ? I did not buy them ; they were given to me by my late mother. Comment trouvez-vous cet even- tail et cette robe ? Je les ai achetes pour le bal de I'am- Je les trouve tres beaux ; I'even- tail est tr^s riche ; la dentelle | qui le re couvre est d'un" grand / prix ; mais iTest d'une couleur mal assortie h, celle de la robe. Croyez-vous que I'un ou I'autre doive Stre change ? Oui, I'eventail ; la robe est d'un gout exquis et vous ira admi- rablement. EUe a ete faite par Worth et tout le monde reconnait qu'il a un talent, un genie veritable, quoi- que ce ne soit apres tout qu'un tailleur pour dames. ITe trouvez-vous pas que ces fleurs artificielles sont bien imitees ? Les couleurs en sont d'un eclat incomparable et d'un naturel parfait. J'admire particuliere- ment cette rose a demi epanouie, Oti avez-vous achete ces fleurs ? Je ne les ai pas achetees ; elles m'ont ete donnees par feu ma mere. 233 Reading Exercise No. 47. Le Sultan Amurat avait I'habitudel de se deguiser «t de se promener,2 pour s'assurerS que ses ordonnanoes* etaient fidelement executees et pour entendre ce que ses eujets pensaient de lui et de son gouvemement. Quelques jours apres la publication d'un edit qui defendait I'usage du tabao dans ses etats, il prit^ passage dans le bateau qui transportait les voyageurs de Scutari k Constantinople, et y rencontra un soldat qui lui offrit une— prise de tabac^ : le Sultan demanda au delinquant^ s'il ne craignait pas d'etre denonce et puni de son meprisS pour les decrets. Le soldat ne fit que rire de^ cette observation, et, ne voulant pasl" exciter sa defiance^, le sultan sortit^^ une pipe de sa ceinture et se mit^^ a fumer, en affectant de prendre toutes les precautions pour ne pas etre vul^. En approcbant duis rivage, il invita a^* son tour le soldat h I'accompagner a terrei'^: "il le conduirait, disait-il,l8 dans une maison oil Ton vendait d' excellent vin." L'invitation fut acoeptee et tous deux se dirigerent vers^^ I'endroit ou le sultan avait donne rendez-vous^O a son escorte et oii il comptait faire arreter^i celui qui prisait22 et ne refusait pas de boire la liqueur interdite au vrais croyants^S. Mais ses manieres avaient eveille les soup^ons de son compagnon, qui saisit soudain la massue qui pendait h^ sa ceinture, I'en frappa^s si fort qu'il le fit^s tomber, et prit la fuite^^ avant que le sultan eiit eu le temps de se relever^S. ^ 1 avait I'habitude, was in the habit, 2 de se promener, of taking walks, 3 s'ssOTirer, to assure himself, i ordomiances, oiiiannces, Sprit, took, SfuTie prise de tabae, 3, 'piachoISTmS, 7 diUnquant, oSeuAev, 8 mdpris, contempt, 9 ne fit que rire de, did nothing but laugh at, 10 ne voulant pas, not wishing, 11 sa d&fwmce, his suspicion, 12 sor- tit, pulled ... out, 13 se mit A, began to, 14 powr n^pas 6tre vu, not to be seen, 15 en approchant du, on approaching the, 16 d,, in, 17 4 terre, onshore, 18 disait-il, said he, 19 se dirigirent vers, proceeded to, 20 oii ... avait donne rendez-vous, which ... had appointed as a place of meeting, 21 il comptait faire arrUer, he intended to give in charge, ilprisait, took snuff, 23 to wais croj/amis, true believers, 2i pendait d, hung from, 25 Ten frappa, struck him with it, 26 fit, caused, 27 prit lafuite, ran away, 28 de se relever, to get up again. 234 Forty-ninth Lesson. Quarante-neuvieme Legem. Syntax of the Qualifying Adjectives (amiinued). Agreement of adjectives with nouns or pronouns (coTidvded). Edle IV. — In compound adjectives, formed of two adjectives, botli agree in gender and number with the noun. Des jeunes filles soiirdes-muettes. Deaf and dumb girls. Des pommes aigrcs-douces. Sourish apples. Rule V. — When one of the adjectives is used as an adverb, it does not agree with the noun. Des enfants nouveau-nis. Newly born children. Da Vavoine dair-semie. Thinly sown oats. Exception. — However, frais, in the sense of newly, agrees with the noun for the sake of euphony. Des /raises fraiches-cueillics. Newly gathered strawberries. Rule VI. — When one of the adjectives qualifies the other, the first being expressive of colour, both remain unchanged. Unc robe gris-elair, A light grey dress. Exception. — However, both adjectives agree with the noun when they indicate two separate colours belonging to it. Les plumes de ce perroquet sont jaunes vertes. This parrot's feathers are yellow and green. I Rule VII. — Nouns used as adjectives of colour do not vary. Des gmnts pwille. Straw-coloured gloves. Des rubans orange. Orange-coloured ribbons. Rule VIII. — Adjectives take the n^imber of the noun, but the noun will never be written in the plural for beiug preceded or followed by two adjectives. Le premier et le second e tage and not le premier et le second etages, the I ursT' and second Hoors. ' L'un et I'autre metal and not Vun et I'autre metaux, either metal. La liltifrature fran<;aise et la litt&rature anglaise, and not les littira- turcs franfaise et anglaise, the French and English literature. Rule IX. — Adjectives used to modify a verb are considered as adverbs and remain invariable. Nous avons payi cette maison tris cher. We have paid very dear for this house. Vovs parlez trop haut. You speak too loud. Rejiakk. — Some adjectives can only be used to qualify persons, others to qualify things. Une personne inconsolable. An inconsolable person. Unefaute impardonnjible. An unpardonable fault. Only usage and' the reading of good authors can make the student of the French language familiar with these difficulties. authorisation, autori- sation f. boldness, hardiesse/. to cause, causer dahlia, dahlia m. to deserve, miriter error, erreurf. to gi'ind, moudre 235 unpardonable, impa/r- donnable inconsolable, incon- solable to justify, jvMifier kingdom, royaume m. le&i, feuille f. loud, haut malicious, malvn partisan, partisan m,. lEHroh.ass«.fl!i;Aai.TO. ^^'"^ to put, tnettre rose, rosef. to rain, pleuvoir to seem, semMer to slander, medire to specify, spvcifer university, universiUf, /viplfit, OToJei ( jiolet , molettef. Exercise No. 49. 1 . To slander. To put(*). To grind. We slander. He puts. We slandered (imp.). He put (imp.). You grind. He slanders. Let ua grind. He put ('y. (Z.J. You slandered f"^. d.^. They ('m.^ slandered. You ground (imp.). He will put. You ground (p. d.). We shall •lander. We should put. You will grind. They would slander. She would put. We should slander. . That we may slander. That he may put. You would grind. We put (imp.). Grind. That we might slander. Let us put. That he might put. You put (pres.). We griad. They (m.) put (imp.). I shall put. 2. J'avais dans mon jardin des roses rouge fonce* et des dahlias- violet clair^. Ma soeur avait les yeux bleufonc^ et les cheveux blonds'. EUe avait une robe marron*. Ces fleurs sont fraiches-cueillies : elles m'ont ete envoyees ce matin par mon jardinier, et je vais les porter hk I'hospice des" sourds-muets. J'ai aohete ce matin une ^toffe bleue noire. L'un et I'autre village ont beaucoup souffert de la grele cette ann6e-ci st I'annee deml&re. Le premier et le second volume de oet ouvrage sont trfes interessants. L'armee anglaise et I'arm^e franjaise ont com- battu^ c8te k c6te' sur les champs de bataille^ de la Orimfo'. Si vous ne parlez pas plus haut je ne pourraii" pas vous entendre. Votre erreur eat impardonnable. Sa famiUe est inconsolable. On^' the occasion of the Universities Boat-raoe^^, light blue ribbons are worn^ by the partisans of Cambridge and dark blue ribbons by those of the Oxford University. Two newly born children have been brought" to the home'^. You paid too dear (for) that piano. They sang (p.d.) so loud that I was obliged to teU^* them to be silent^'. They'* were very estimable women. The first and second days were very fine ; but it rained (on) the third. She wore''' orange-coloured feathers. These violets have a nice™ smeU^^ 1 ftmce, dark 2 claw, light 3 hlonds, fair 4 marron. maroon 5 I'lioapice des, the home for 6 comiattu, fought 7 c6te a cdte, side hy side 8 champs de hataille, battle fields 9 la Crimee, Crimea 10 pourrai, shall be able 11 on, a 12 Universities boat race, laregate des UniversiUs 13 woni, portes 14 brought, apporUs 15 home, asile 16 to tell, c/.e dire 17 to be silent, de ce iaire IS they, c' 19 wore, avait 20 nice, ion 21 smell, odeur. («) See Supplement, page 23. 236 Questions on Grammai-. 1. Give the rule for the agreement of compound adjectives formed of two adjectives ? 2. Is an adjective used as an adverb in a compound adjective variable or invariable ? 3. What is the rule for compound adjectives formed of two adjectives the one qualifying the other ? 4. Is it correct to write a noun in the plural after two adjectives in the singular ? 5. Are adjectives used to qualify verbs variable ? 6. Give a few adjectives which can only be used to qualify persons, and others which can only be used in speaking of things ? Conversation. What is the building which I- per- ceive down there on the hill, and has the appearance of a hospital ? It is the hospital for deaf and dumb people. How are they dressed ? Their uniform consists of a light grey coat and trousers, and a cap of the same colour. How are they admitted into this hospital ? Many come from the asylum where foundlings are received ; the second and third floors are reserved for those poor creatures. By whom is the first floor occupied then? The first is devoted to deaf and dumb people who are in a more independent condition, and pay a certain amount. AVhence do those young girls come? They come from the hospital gar- den, and carry newly gathered raspberries in their baskets. How do they provide for the ex- penses of the Institution ? It was founded and is niaintfiined by means of a sum of money bequeathed by a charitable lady. Quel est I'edifice que j'aper9ois li-bas sur la colline et qui a I'apparence d'un hdpital ? C'est I'hospice des sourds-muets. Comment sont-ils vetus ? Leur uniforme consiste en un habit, en uu pantalon gris clair, et en une casquette de meme couleur. Comment sont-ils admis dans oet hSpital ? Beaucoup y viennent de I'asile ou Ton recueille les enfants- trouves ; le deuxifeme etage et le troisi^me sont reserves a ces pauxTes creatures. Par qui est done occupe le premier etage ? Le premier est affect^ aux soui'ds- muets qui ont une position plus independante, et qui paient une certaine somme. D'ou viennent ces jeunes filles ? EUes viennent du jardin de I'hos- pice, et portent dans leurspaniers des framboises fralches-cueillies. . Co mrnent ^ pourvoit-on aux frais J de I'institution i EUe a ete fondee et est entrctenu e i au nioye n d'une so mmg_d;argent j Mgube par une dame cliantable. 231 C Beading Exercise No. 49. Alphonse d'Aragon, comme la plupart des rois^ de cette ipoque,^ avait un fou'* aussi prudent que malin. Un jour, le roi remarqua qu'il avait k* la main un beau livre richeinent relid,^ et, le lui ayant demand^, il vit^ que ce livre ne contenait que' des pages blanolies. Interrog^, le fou r^pondit qu'il avait I'intention d'y inscrire* le nom de tous les fous du royaume. Le roi lui accorda, en riant,^ rautorisation d'y inscrire les' noms de tous ceux qui lui paraitraient meriter d'etre appelfe fous^", i" la con- dition toutefois d'indiquer la cause qui lui semblerait justifier cette inscription. Quelque temps aprfes, ayant ouvert le livre, il y lut^^ les noms de plusieurs grands seigneurs de sa cour, et, k son grand ^tonnement, sonpropre^^ nom. Cette audace lui causa d'abord de la colere et de I'indignation : puis, ayant lu^* I'anno- tation qui accompagnait son nom, il vit que le livre specifiait qu'il avait eu la folie^^ de confier deux mille pifeces d'or ^i*" I'un de ses officiers pour I'acliat d'un cheval k I'^tranger^'. " Comment se fait iP^," s'ecria^' le roi, " que vous me traitiez de fou^" pour cette raison ? " " Le mandataire^^ de votre Majestd ne reviendra jamais^^ ; repondit le boutfon^^ « gt gj par hasard^ il revenait, je m'empresserais d'y inscrire^* son nom k la place de^ celui de votre Majesty." 1 la plupart des rois, most kings, 2 epoque, time, 3 fou, jester, i A, in, 5 relii, bound, 6 vit, saw, 7 ne contenait que, only con- tained, 8 d'y inscrire, to put down in it, 9 en riant, laughingly, Wfous, madmen, 11 (i, under, 12 il y lut, he read in it, IZ propre, own, 14 ayant lu, having read, \5 folic, madness, 16 de confier deux mille piices d'or A I'un, to entrust one . , . with two thousand gold pieces, 17 (i I'itranger, abroad, 18 comment se fait-il, how is it, 19 s'icria, exclaimed, 20 que vous me traitiez defou, that you call me a madman, 21 mandataire, mandatary, 22 ne reviendra jamais, will never come back, 23 bouffon, jester, 24 par hasard, by chance, 25 je m'empresserais d'y inscrire, I should hasten to put down in it, 26 & to place de, instead of. 238 Fiftieth Lesson. Oinqua/ntiime Legon. Syntax of the Qualifying Adjectives (concluded). Place of Adjectives. "We have already said (see lesson 9) that the place of quali- fying adjectives was usually after the noun. The following is a list of the adjectives which, because of their shortness, are generally placed before the nouns : ancieii, -ne, ancient gros, -se, thick, large premier, -ire, first beau, belle, beautiful jeime, young sage, wise bon, -ne, good joli, -e, pretty sami, -e, holy dernier, -ire, last mauvais, -e, bad itieux, meille, old digne, worthy petit, -e, small vilam, -e, ugly grand, -n, large and all numeral adjectives, except when joined to names of kings, and sometimes to nouns indicating the divisions of books. The sense of some adjectives changes according to the place they occupy : un brave homine, an honest man «?te certaine nouvelle, a certain piece of news uTie commune voix, a unanimous voice la derniire seinaine, the- last week unefausse clef, a skeleton key un galant Twmme, a gallant man un grand homme, a great man le haul ton, the fashion un honnSte Tiomme, an honest man iTO maigre diner, a bad dinner le malin esprit, the evil one le mauvais air, the unhealthy air, the awkward appearance un nUchant poime, a badly written poem wn nouveau cTiapeau, a hat newly bought le nouveau vin, the newly bought wine Mji pauvre hormne, an unhappy man, a man of httle talent une plaisante histoire, a strange, unlikely story ses propres mains, his own hands un seul homme, one man only vm, tristeprofesseur, a bad professor twi vilain homme, a vile man un homme brame, a courageous man une noimelle certaine, an authentic news une voix commune, a disagreeable voice la seinaine demiire, last week une clef fausse, a wrong key un hoTn/me galant, a man polite to ladies un homme grand, a tall man le ton haul, the haughty manner of speaking un homme honntte, a polite man un dinger maigre, a fish dinner V esprit malin, the malicious mind Vair maumais, the wicked ap- pearance un poime m4chant, a wicked poem un chapeau nouveau, a new fash- ioned hat le vin nouveau, the wine recently made un homme pauvre, a poor man, a man without means une histoire plaisante, an amusing story ses muins propres, bis clean hands un homme seul, a man alone un professeiir triste, a sorrowful professor un homme vilain, an ugly man 239 actor, acteiir m. to appear, parattre to te born, nattre ■chess,_^ hecs m. p. B'lidrus7cA(53Mr m. to consider, coTisidireri foreina .Ti, r.ifnt.ri'.-mMt re, to cultivate, cuUimr drawing-room, salonm. duke, diic ni. to envy, envier false, /osMa; fate, sort m. iirmness, fermeUf. to hurt, nuin lodgings, logemmt m. move, mouvement in. riclies, richessef, to start, parlir to sti'ike, frapper to surround, entourer tone, ton m. unanimous, unaniim Exercise No. 50. 1. To be born. He liurts(*). "Weappear. Heisbom. Youhurt (pres.). He appears To hurt. He was ('inip.^ bom. You will hurt. We appeared f'lm^''/'- He hurt f'lmp. j. He hurt f^. A J. To appear. We appeared (p. d.). He wiU be born. Does he hurt? We shall ap- pear. He was bom (p. d.). He had appeared. He would be bom. They were (imp. ) born. He would hurt. We should appear. You were fj9. (i.^ born. That he may hurt. That he may be born. That we may appear. That he might be born. Appear. That he might hurt. We are born. Let us appear. That we might appear. They (f.) had appeared. We do not appear. 2. C'est nne belle con tree. ITous avons une grande maison. La premiere page est mieux ecrite que la derniere. C'est une sage reso- lution. J'ai rencontre une pauvre vieille femme au coin de la rue. Get homme a une vilaine figure. Totre contre-mattre est un brave homme. Je connais une certaine rue on les logements sont tr^s bon- marche. lis nous ont servi un maigre diner et nous n'avons eu h, boire •que du vin nouveau. En depit de^ toutes ses richesses c'est un pauvre homme, et jen^enyjejDas'soir'sort. Je viens^ de mon jardin et je n'ai pas les mains propres : je le cultive de mes propres mains. Demeurez- vous'' dejk dans votre nouvelle maison ? Nous avons ^te au concert hiei apris-midi, et nous y avons entendu de la musique nouvelle. The unhealthy air of this place has greatly injured* his health. My father was a very tall man. She is a pretty girl. He has a very small hand. The last chorus is considered as the best piece of the new opera. He is a very poor man : he is too old to' work, and has neither relations^ nor friends. He told' me a very amusing story, but I do not believe it. He is a bad actor, nobody likes him. I saw' him last week, and he told me' that he wOUld start in the last week of this month. 1 eu di%iit de, in spite of 2 je viens, I come 3 demeurez-voiiSf do you live 4 lias greatly injured, a fait ieaucoup de mal a 5 to, pour 6 relations, parenta 7 told, raoonta 8 saw, ai vu 9 told me, <•) See Supplement, page 23. rft'a dit. 240 , Questions on Grammar. 1. What is most frequently the place of quaUfying adjectives ? 2. What will generally decide that the adjective ought to be pUoed either before or after the noun ? 3. Name a few adjectives which are, as a rule, placed before the nouns. 4. AVhere are numeral adjectives placed ? 5. What is the difference between un brave horrvme and v/n, homme bravef 6. AVhat does la demiire setnaine mean ; what la semaine demUre ? 7. What is the difference between un grand Twinme and un hmnme grand ? 8. What is the difference between un seul homme and un homme seul ? Conversation. Here is an old mansion whose architecture I much admire. It was built in the last half of the eighteenth century. Do you not like the neighbouring house as much ? It is not that it looks bad, but good judges, uDanimoucly criti- cise its pretentious and over- loaded style. Are theit any historical recollec- tions connected with these two mansions ? The one on the right belonged to Field-Marshal X..., one of the greatest generals of his age. And what do you know about the second ? Several pleasant anecdotes are related about the different owners who have successively occupied it. Are there many old houses left in the town ? No ; and they become rarer eveiy day. Voici une ancienne maison dont j 'admire beaucoup I'architec- ture. Elle a ete bsttie dans la dernifere moitie du dix-huitieme sifecle. N'aimez-vous pas autant la maison voLsine ? Ce n'est pas qu'elle ait mauvais air, mais les connaisseurs, d'une commune voix, en critiquent le style pretentieux et sur- charge. Y a-t-il quelques souvenirs his- toriques qui se rattachent k ces deux maisons ? Celle de droite a appartenu au Marechal X..., un des plus grands generaux de son temps. Et que savez-vous au sujet de la seconde ? On raconte plusiei^jk plaisantes anecdotes au sujet aes differents proprietaires qui I'ont occupee successivement. Reste-t-il beaucoup de vieilles maisons dans la ville ? Non ; et elles deviennent chaque jour plus rares. 241 Beading Exercise No. 60. Louis XIV, roi de France, ainiait lieaucoup les tehees. Un. jour, qu'^il jouait^ avec I'un de ses courtisans, il fit* un faux mouve- ment, et son adversaire risqua timidement uue observation. Mais- le roi, qui ne souffrait pas facilement la contradiction, ne voulut pas^ reconnaitre* qu'il avait tort,' et en appela* aux gentils- hommes^ qui entouraient la table ; personne ne repondait,Jx)i'sque le due de Grammont entra dans le salon. Aussitot que le roi le vit, il I'appela et voulut lui expogejlJJe sujet _de la_contestatinn; ma isle due nej£jaiasa_Eas^j_acheyer'^. "Votre Majesty a certaine- ment tort," dit-il,^'ec un ton de fermete qui 6tonna le roi et qui lu i fit fronc er'^ le souroil. " Comment savez-vous" que j'ai tort,. Monsieur le Duo?" reprit^^ Louis XIV ; "vous ne m'avez menie pas laisse le temps de vous expliquer ce dont il s'agissait'^" " Je le sais^' k n'en pas douter^s," rdpondit le due de Grammont ; " car- tous ces Messieurs, que votre Majeste consultaitj^" au moment oti^"' je suis arriv^, ne ripondaient que par leur silence. lis se seraient unanimement empressds^' de prendre yotre^ parti^^, si votre- Majeste avait eu raison^^" Le_roi fut frspps .(Je. la plausibilite^* de cet argument, et admif'^'^ qu'il s'&ait tromp^^". 1 aimait iemicoup, wsisvevy {onA, 2 qu', as, 3 /oiiaii, was playing, 4 il fit, he made, 5 ne voulut pas, did not -wish, 6 fo reconnattre, to acknowledge, 7 qii-'il avail tort, that he -was wrong, 8 en appela, appealed, 9 aux gentilhommes, to the noblemen, 10 exposer, to explain, 11 ne le laissa pas, did not allow him, \2achever, to finish, 13 qui lui fit froncer, caused him to frown, 14 savez-wus, do you know, 15 reprit, rejoined, 16 ce dont il s'agissait, what the question was, n je sa-is, I know, 18 a n'en pas douter, undoubtedly, 19 con- sultait, was consulting, 20 oil, when, 21 ils se seraieiil unanime- ment empressis, they would have been unanimously eager, 22 prendre votre parti, to take your part, 23 avait eu raison, had been right, 24 plausibility, plausibility, 25 admit, admitted, 26 qu'il s'itait irompi, that he had made a mistake. 242 Fifty-first Lesson. Cinquante et unUme Legon. Syntax of the Qualifying Adjectives (concluded). Adjectives of Dimensions. Adjectives of dimension are placed in Prench before the name of the measure from which they are separated by the preposition de. La maison est haute de vingt mUres. The house is twenty metres high. La riviire est profonde de trois pieds. The river is three feet deep. La table est ipaisse d'unpoiice. The table is one inch thick. Ld'fue est longuede miUe mi{res. The street is one thousand metres long. However, the same construction should be observed as in English, the verb avoir being used instead of etre, and the adjective being translated by the corresponding noun. La maison a vingt mitres de hauteur. The house is twenty metres La rivUre a trois pieds de profondeur. The river is three feet deep. La table a un pouce (^'epaisseur. The table is one inch thiclc. La rue a inille mitres de longueur. The street is one thousiind metres long. The Adjectives haut, long and large, can be used instead of hauteur, longueur and largeur. Cet arbre a cinq metres de haut. This tree is five metres high. I Ce baton a deux pieds de long. This stick is two feet long. Le ruisseau a vingt pieds de large. The stream is twenty feet wide. Adjectives after the expression avoir Fair agree with the sub- ject when avoir I'air means to seem,, but remain invariable when it means to have a physical appearance. Kotre mire a fair tr^s bonne. Your mother seems very kind. Cettc dame a I'air hautain. This lady has a hMughiy countena-iue. Adjectives can have the same complement when they govern the same preposition. Ce livre est utile et agreable A tout le monde. This book is useful and agreeable to everybody. Ma mere etait bonne et bienveillante pour tout le monfle. My mother was kind and benevolent to everybody. But every adjective must have its own complement if they govern different prepositions. Votre frire est reconnaissant envers ses amis et leur est Jidele, Yoiw brother is grateful and faithful to his friends. Sa maison est voisine de Viglise et y est contiguS. His house is near and close to the church. 24:3 angle, angle m,. -assiduous^ assidu brick, hriquef. broad, large to cherish, cMrir to cement, dmentcr to feast, se repaUre fertile, fertile historian, historien in. high, liaid ice, glace f. inch, pouce m. league, lieuef. majestic, majestueux massive, masdf moat, fossi m. mortar, mortier m, to mount, monter to place, placer ■plain, plaine f. to plant, planter to please, plaAre _praise, iloge m. prodigious, prodigieux proud, ficr to resolve, risoiidre to respect, respecter sensible, sensible situated, situd size, grandeur f. staircase, escalier m. stone, pierref. terrace, terrassef. Tliaraes, Tarnisef. to water. a rroscr wonder, incrvcilh' f. Exercise No. 51. 1. To please. To feast. To resolve(*). We please. That I might feast. "We pleased (imp.). I feast. You resolve. They (m.) pleased (imp.). You resolved (imp.). They (in.) would resolve. I feasted (imp. ). "We shall please. That you might resolve. "We pleased (p. d.). You resolved f'^. d.^. Let us feast. Ifeastei (p. d.). "We shall resolve. "We should please. They will feast. They (m. ) would please. I shall feast. Please. That we may please. That I may feast. You wotdd resolve. That we might please. I should fear. They (/. ) please. I should feast. That you may resolve. They have pleased. 2. La grande muraille de la Chine avait environ trois mille kilo- ' metres de longueur. La glace ^tait epaisse de deux pouces. La rue a trois cents mHres de long sur^ vingt mfetres de large. Les fosses out douze metres de profondeur. L'arbre que vous avez plants il y a? deux ans a beaucoup grandi' : il a maiutenant trois mfetres de haut. La Tamise h cet endroit n'avait que cinquante mfetres de large, Co ruban n'a que trois metres de long. Votre soeur a I'a ir trfes bien portaitts^^^ La princesse avait I'air majestueux. Elle esif bonne pour ses freres et leur est devouee. Nous sommes attentifs et assidus Ji ses logons. "Vous etes necessaire k vos enfants et vous en etes cheri. II est digne des eloges qu'on lui prodigue* et il y est tr& sensible^ This room is twelve feet long and six feet wide. The river is ten feet deep. That young girl seems very industrious. This princess has a very proud countenance. I am ready and contented to start. Be faithful and respectful towards your masters. My house is sixty feet long, twenty feet broad and thirty feet high. My uncle was respected and loved by everybody. Let us be generous and benevolent towards our fellow-creatures.' 1 mr, by 2 i! j/ a, ago 8 grandi, grown 4 iris Mm portante, very healthy 5 qu'on lui prodigue, which they lavish upon him 6 ily est tres sensible, he quite appreciates them 7 fellow-creatures, semblables. (*) See Supplement, page 23. 244 Questions on Grammar. 1. What is, in French, thfe place of adjectives of dimension ? 2. When should the same construction be used as in English ? 3. Name the adjectives of dimension which can be used instead of substantives. 4. When do adjectives agree with the subject after the expression avoir I'air ? 5. When is one and the same complement sufficient for two adjectives? 6. What is to be done when the adjectives govern different prepo- sitions ? Conversation. What bridge is it which we see down there ? The Royal Bridge. What are its principal dimensions? It is one hundred and twenty- eight metres long and seventeen metres wide. Of how many arches is it com- posed? Of iive arches, whose diameters have an average of twenty-two metres. What is about the depth of the Seine? I do not know it exactly ; but I think that it is about ten metres deep. It does not look very rapid. It is not very rapid, but the speed of its current considerably increases during inundations, which take place nearly every year. The numerous bridges of Paris are agreeable and useful to pedestrians, who can thus easily pass from one bank to the other. .4re there any steamboats that ply on tlie Seine ? Yes, there are small boats which are called mouches (flies). Quel est le pont que nous voyons la- has ? C'eSt le pont Royal. Qnelles sont ses priuoipales di- mensions ? II a cent vingt-huit metres de longueur et dix-sept metres de largeur. De conibien d' arches se compose- t-il? II se compose de cinq arches, dont le diametre moyen est de vingt- deux metres. Quelle est Ji peu pres la profondeur de la Seine ? Je ne le sais pas au juste ; mais je crois qu'elle a^ environ dix metres de profondeur. Elle n'a pas I'air bien rapide. Elle n'est pas tres rapide ; mais la vitesse de son courant augmente considerablement au moment des inondations, qui ont lieu .presque toutes les annees. Les nombreux ponts de Paris sont agreables et utiles aux pietons, qui peuvent ainsi passer facile- ment d'une rive a I'autre. Y a-t-il des bateaux a vapeur qui font le service sur la Seine ? Oui, il y a de petits bateaux qu'on appelle mouches. 245 Heading Exercise No. 51. Babylone' ^tait situde dans une plaiiie arrosde par I'Euphrate', et dont le terroii'^ 4tait extremement fertile. Ses murailles, qui ont pass6 pour une des sept merveilles du monde, etaient, suivant le rapport* de quelques historiens, d'une grandeur prodigieuse. EUes avaient douze toises^ et demie d'epaisseur, cinquante de hauteur, et vingt-quatre lieues de circuit.'' Elles dtaient toutes baties de larges briques, oimentdes de bitume/ liqueur dpaisse et glutineuse^ qui sort' de la terre'" dans ce pays-l&, et qui lie^^ plus fortement que le mortier, et devient^^ beaucoup plus dure que la brique ou la pierre, auxquelles elle sert de'^ ciment. Ces murailles etaient entourtes d'un vaste^'' foss4 revetu de'^ briques des deux'^ c6tes. Chaque c6t4 de ce grand carr^" avait vingt-cinq portes d'airain^^ massif ; entre ces portes, et aux angles de cbaque carre, il y avait plusieurs tours elevees^' de dix pieds plus haut que^" les murailles. Dans les palais de cette immense et magnifique cite Etaient ces jardins suspendus^"^, si renommds^^ parmi les Grecs^'. lis formaient un carr^, dont chaque cote avait quatre cents pieds. lis etaient Aleves et formaient plusieurs larges terrasses, poshes en forme d'^amphitheatre^^, dont la plus haute dgalait la hauteur des-" murs de la ville. On montait d'une terrasse ii I'autre par un escalier large de dix pieds. RoLLiN {Hiatoire ancienne). (to he continiKd.J 1 Babylrme, Babylon, 2 Euphrale, Euphrates, 3 terroir, soil, 4 rapport, relation, 5 toise, fathom, 6 circuit, circumference, 7 hi- tume, bitu&en, 8 rjlutineux, glutinous, 9 sort, issues, 10 terre, ground, i 11 lie, binds, 12 dement, becomes, 13 sert de, serves as, 14 tiosste, vast, 15 rracte cfe, lined with, 16 des deux, on hofh, 11 carri, square, 18 airain, brass, 19 iUvi'cs, raised, 20 plushaul que, above, 21 suspeiidus, hanging, 22 renommis, renowned, 23 Grecs, Greeks 24 en forine d', in the shape of, 2.5 amphithedtre, amphitheatre, 26 egalcdt la hauteur des, had the same height as the. 246 Fifty-second Lesson. Cinquante-deuxienw Legon. Syntax of the Determinative Adjectives. Possessive Adjectives. In French, possessive adjectives can only be used before nouns indicating parts of the body w hen tlie sense does not in- dicate clearly enough what person is meant. Moii bras droit a Ui easse deux fois. My right arm has been broken twice. Eegardes ma Utc. Look at my head. After active verbs, possessive adjectives are translated by the definite article, but the verbs are used reflectively. Je me suis casse le doigt. I broke my finger. H se lave les mains. He washes his hands. In speaking of things, the possessive its and theirs can only be translated son, sa, ses, lew, lews when the nouns to which they refer are in the same sentence. ChaqiM chose a son bon et son mav/oais c6U. Everything has its good and its bad side. Ces Uvres ont lears beautis. These books have their beauties. But if the iJossessed thing be not in the same sentence as the possessor, possessive adjectives could not be used in French, and the pronoun en would be placed before the verb. Je connais cette langue, fen ai itudii toutes les difficuUis. I know that language, I have studied all its difficulties. J'ai iU d Paris; fen connais les principales curiositis. I have been at Paris ; I know its principal curiosities. However, the possessive adjective ought to be used if the noun expressive of the possessed object be the complement of a prepi isition. J'ai acheti cette grammaire ; je vous la recommande a cause de la sim,plicite de ses regies. I have bought this grammar ; I recom- mend it to you because of the simplicity of its rules. Possessive adjectives, like articles, must be repeated before every noun or adjective, except when the second noun is used to explain the first, or when the two adjectives qualifythe sajne noun and refer to the same person. Cliaque ville dans ce pays a son bourgmestre ou maire. Every town in this country has its burgomaster or mayor. II a iti pour lui un bon et fidile ami. He lias been a good and faith- ful friend to him. adviser, co nseiller m. tb iiuhe, jaire mal antiquity, antiquity/. aristocratic, aristocra- to break, casser to cover, coutyiir element, ilSDient m. fiat, plat [_ historical, liistorique 'A iflJsnc£kj_Ae « Her to laugh, rire left, gauche lead, plomh in. mass, masse f. ^_ .peculiarit y, particu- laritef. pump, pompef. reed, roseau m. remembrance, souvenir m. right, (Zmi root, racinef. to separate, sSparer shape, /or?)ie/. space, espaee m. to suffice, st«^re together, ensemble vault, voiltef. Exercise No. 52. 1. To laugh. To break. To suffice(*). "We break. You suffice. He laughs. We 'bioke {imp.) You sufficed (^J. <^.) They (m.) broke. You sufficed (i«ip. ) They (/■.) sufficed (^.d.) "Wehroke (p. d.) He laughed(tmp.) "We shall break. Laugh. He laughed (^J.c^.) You will suffice. Let us laugh. He will laugh. You would suffice. They (m.) laughed. He has sufficed. That you may suffice. "We should break. He would laugh, "ffe had laughed. They {/.) would laugh. That he may laugh. That they might suffice. That we may break. That we might break. Let us suffice. That he might laugh. 2. Mon pied droit me fait tres mal depuis que je me suis casse la jamhe. Je me suis heurte la tete coiitre la porte. Ma main gauche est plus faible que la droite. H a/Tes cheveux blonds^ et les yeux noirs. Chaque ville de Bretagne- a ses antiquites qui rappellent^ das souvenirs historiques. I J'al voyage ijar t oute la jSTormandie'* et j'en eonnais les plus petits villagps. Ce cheval a ses qualites, mais Je n'en aime pas la couleur. Gonnaissez-vous Paris et ses environs '? — ISTon, je n'y suis reste que quelques jours et je n'en ai vu que les principaux ediiices. Je eonnais sou frere et sa mere, mais je ne eonnais pas ses sceurs. Nos invites et amis sent arrives hier soir. Yous etes son eu- nemi ou son ami : prouvez ce que vous etes par vos actions. Conduisez- moi dans^ un h6tel situe dans un des plus beaux quartiers^, pourvu que' vous en sachiez' les prix et que ces prix soient moderes. He had his hat on his head all the time he was in the room. His small hand and foot are of a very aristocratic shape. I am studying the French language and all its peculiarities ; I have already gone through' the elements of its grammar. His friends and relations^" visited him yesterday on the occasion of his birthday^^. He is my good friend and best adviser. "What do you hold^" in your hand ? 1 hlonds, fair 2 Bretagne, Brittany 3 rappellent, call to mind 4 par toute la Nor- mandie, all tlirougli Normandy 5 dans, to 6 quartiers, districts 7 pourvu gue, provided that 8 sachiez, know 9 I have gone through, fai parcouru 10 relations, parents 11 his birthday, I'anniversaire de so, naissance 12 do you hold, tenez-vous. (*) See Supplement, page 28. 248 Questions on Grammar. 1. When are possessive adjectives used in French before nomis indi- cating the parts of the body ? 2. How are possessive adjectives translated before nouns whicli are the objects of active verbs ? ■3. How are its and their translated in speaking of things when the thing and possessor are in the same sentence ? 4. How are its and their translated when the possessed thing and the possessor are not in the same sentence ? 5. When have possessive adjectives not to be repeated before nouns or adjectives joined by the conjunctions et or ou. Conversation. You look rather unwell ; what is the matter with you ? I have a head-ache ; and my teeth have prevented me from sleep- ing the greater part of the night. Put a little cotton-wool soaked in olive oil into your ear, to ■preserve that organ from the contact of the air. Do you think it will do me good ? You will find that the pain will disappear and never come back as long as you take the same precaution. Who gave you that remedy ? I found it in an old book of medicine. I read that book and its preface, and admired its clearness. I do not believe much in old women's remedies ; they have at any rate the merits of sim- plicity and cheapness. Eead this book ; you will find it a useful and sincere adviser. Thank you, I havejust now plenty of time and will occupy my evenings by studying it from beginning to end. When you have finished, let me know your opinion about it. Vous avez I'air un pen souflTrant ; qu'avez-vous ? J'ai mal k la tete ; et les dents m'ont empeche de dormir une grande partie de la nuit. Mettez-vous un peu de coton im - bibe d^huile d'olives danl I'o- reille, pour gaiantir cet organe du contact de I'air. Pensez-vous que cela me fasse du bien? Vous verrez que la douleur dis- / paraitra et ne reviendra pas tant que vous prendrez la mgme precaution. Qui vous a donne ce remede ? Je I'ai trouve dans un vieux livre de medecine. J'ai lu ce livre et sa preface, et j'en ai admire la clarte. Je ne crois pas beaucoup aux remedes de bonne femme ; ils, ont dans tons les cas le merite de la simplicite et du bou marche. Lisez ce livre ; vous j trouverez un utile et sincere oonseiller. Merci, j'aijustement beaucoup de temps et je veux employer mes soirees a I'^tudier depuis le com- mencement jusqu'a la fin. Lorsque vousra urez fini.faites-moi i savoir ropiuTonquci'ousenavei!. 249 Reading Exercise No. 52. (Continued J rom No. 51.^ La masse entifere etait soutenuel par de grandes voiltes baties I'une sur I'autre, et fortifiee d'2 une muraille de vingt-deux pieds d'epaisseur qui I'entourait de toutes parts.3 Sur le sommet* de ces voiltes on avait poseS de grandes pierres plates, de seize pieds de long et de quatre .de large. On avait mis 6 par dessus^ une couche* de roseaux enduits* d'une grande quantite de bitume, sur laquelle il y avait deux rangsl" de briques lieesH fortement ensemble avec du mortier. Tout cela etait couvert de plaques^^ (jg plomb ; et sur cette derniere coucbe etait posee la terre^S du jardin. Ces plateformesl* avaient ete ainsi construites afin que rhumiditeis de la terre ne per5atl*' point en bas et ne s'ecoulati'^ point au travers des vodtes. La terre qui y avait ete jeteel^ etait si profonde, que les plus grands arbres pouvaient^S y prendre racine : aussi^O toutes les ter- rasses en etaient-elles couvertes, aussi bien que de toutes sortes de plantes et de fleurs propres a embellir^l un lieu de plai8ance22. Sur la plus haute terrasse, il y avait une pompe qui ne paraissait point^S, par le moyen de laquelle^* on tirait25 en baut^e I'eau de la riviere, dont on arrosait de la tout le jardin. On avait menage^^ dans I'espaoe qui Beparait les voltes sur lesquelles etait appuye28 tout I'edi- fice, de grandes et magnifiques salles^S qui etaient fort eclairees^o et avaient une vue tres agreable. EoLliN (Histoire ancienne.) 1 soMfewMe, supported, 2 /orfi;?^e d', strengthened by, Zde toutes parts, on all sides, i sommet, summit, 5 posi, laid, 6 mis, put, 7 par dessus, over it, 8 couche, layer, 9 enduits, covered, 10 rangs, rows, 11 liees, bound, 12 plagues, plates, 13 terre, mould, 1 4 ^toie/ormas, platforms, 15 hwmidiU, Tnoisture, 16 per^dt, shovili penetrate, 17 s'^cowMi, should flow, 1 8 yei^c, thrown, 19pouvaient, were able, 20 aussi, therefore, 21 emhellir, embellish, 22 lieu de plaisance, pleasure resort, 23 ne paraissait point, was not visible, 24 par le moyen de laquelle, by means of which, 25 on tirait, they drew, 26 em haut, up, 27 menagi, contrived, 28 appwyi, supported, 29 salles, halls, 30 iclairies, lighted. 250 Fifty-third Lesson. Oinquante-troisieme Legon. Syntax of the Determinative Adjectives (amcluded). Indefinite Adjectives. Meme is sometimes- an adjective and sometimes an abverb. According to the general definition of the parts of speech, meme is an adjective vrhen determining a noiin or pronoun and is equivalent to the English words same and self; it is an adverb when modifying a verb, adjective or another adverb and answers to the English word even. Ces livi'es ne soTit pas les memes. These books are not the same. Je leur en parlerai d. eux-mSmes, I shall speak of it to themselves. lis travaillaient mimependant la nuit. They worked even during the night. lis sont durs et mhne cruels. They are hard, even cruel. Toitt is sometimes an adjective and sometimes an adverb. It is an adjective when it means all, each or whole ; it is an abverb when it means quite. Toutc ville, every town ; toute la contrie, the whole coimtry ; toMS les hommes, all men. lis sont tout itonnis. They are quite astonished. I However, tout, as an abverb, takes the mark of the feminine ' before a singular feminine adjective beginning with a consonant, for the sake of euphony. 1 I Elle es tjoufj', triite de son depart. She is quite sad because of hia I ' departure. Qwlque is sometimes an adjective, sometimes an adverb ; it is an adjective before a noun in the sense of some, a feiv, and an adverb before an adjective or an adverb in the sense of however. U J'ai qiuilques amis. I have some friends. I Quelmie riche s. aw' ils soient ils ne sont pas Tiewrcux. However rich they may be they are not happy. Quel que, written in two words, is used before the verb ^tre. j Quel is then variable, and que remains invariable. It translates I the English whatever. Quelles que soient ses raisonsje ne les admettrai pas. Whatever hia reasons may be I shall not admit them. Quels que soient ses talents il ne reussit pas aussi lien que je It croyais. Whatever his talents may be he does not succeed as well as I thought. . Aucun, aucune, nul, nulle, no, none, can only be used in the t, lural before nouns which are never used in the singular. ' Aucunes fuTiArailles nefurent jamais aussi solennelles que celles de Napoleon premier. No obsequies were ever so solemn as those of Napoleon the first. V V. to be silent, se taire betrothal, fian(;ailles f-P- cabbage, chou m. cask, tonncau m. cellar, cam f. V-Jo chop, hacJier .[flepartiife7 depart m. to draw, tirer to dye, teindre egg, ceuf m. fenterprising, entre- ' p't'H'IM'ICt ' 251 fl expe ctation, attentef. T6 follWW, suivrr. to hesitate, hisiter \ hen-house, poulailler m. mature, mUr nest, nid 7n. .pail sea« m. predilection, prMilec- tionf. prodigal, prodigue proud, fier leasonsshle.raisonnable rest. nsU ^ _ to rock, bercer serviceable, setyiable tjsmV, &iiier m. to skim, icumcr stockiijg, las in. table-cloth, nappe f. Ltap, robine t m. undertaking, entreprise /■ until, jusqu'A ^well, pidts TO. yard, courf. Exercise No. 53. 1. TofoUow. Tobesilent. Todye(*). Heissilent. LetusfoUow. We follow. You dye. He wUl be silent. Follow. He was silent (imp.) He was silent (p.d.J We followed (imp.) You dyed (p.d.) He has followed. They ('m.^ will be silent. We followed fp.i^.j Yon will dye. We shall follow. You dyed (imp.) They (f.) would he silent. We shall hold. You would dye. We should follow. We had followed. That they (m.J may be silent. That we may follow. That he might be silent. That you may dye. That you might dye. 2. Les mSmes conditions conviendront-elles a* votre associe ? Nous irons nous-mSmes les voir et nous esperons qu'ils accepteront ce que nous leur proposerons. lis sont genereux et meme prodigues. Toute mere a une predilection bien^ naturelle pour ses propres enfants. Toute ma famOle est a la campagne^ et elle ne reviendra* pas avant la fin du mois. Tous les ofliciers etaient en grand uniformed ^ Nous sommes tout etonnes de^ son depart. Elle's sonTToutes contentes de cette nouYelle. EUes sont tout emues'. Nous avons fait^ quelques visites aujourd'hui. Quelgu/mstruits' que vous soyez vous etes loin de savou'^" tout. JJuels que soient~les obstacles, vous reussierez. Aucunes fian^ailles ne furent jamais si magnifiques. Do not give me the same books. Their friends themselves blame them for^^ their conduct. Even the most enterprising men hesitate to take part in^^ that undertaking. Everything is in his favour. The whole of the house was burnt. All my acquaintances received Mm with much kindness. He had some difficulty in being^^ admitted to his presence. However patient he is, he was compelled to put an end" to sucy^ insolence. Whoever they may be, they will be disappointed in their expectation 1 conviendront-elles a, will they suit, 2 6ic7i, quite, Zhla campcmiie, in the country, . 4 reviendra, will return, 5 en grand uni/orme, in full dress, 6 de, at, 7 emues, moved, 8/aii, paid, 9 instruits, leameA, 10 iom de'sawir, far from knowing, 11 for, de, 12 to take part in, d prendre part d, 13 in being, pour etre, 14 he was eompelled to put an end, ilfut oUigi de mettre un terme^ 15 such, une telle^ (*) See Supplement, page 23. 252 Questions on Grammar, When is inline an adjective ? When is nUme an adverb ? When is tout an adjective ? When is tout an adverb ? When is tout variable in the sense of quite f Wlien is quelqu^ an adjective ? When is quelque an abverb ? When is quel que used ? When can aucun, aiKune, nul, niille be used in the plural t Conversation. Francis, have the same persons come to ask for me during my absence 1 Yes, sir, they came back; they even waited about a quarter of an hour, saying that they ab- solutely must see you. You were wrong to show them in ; any time I am out, I forbid you to allow anybody to get in. It was because, sir, they seemed very much annoyed at not seeing you. Did you not speak to Madam about it ? Madam herself was quite put out by their obstinacy. That is enough. You will find this evening a few letters on my desk ; you will not forget to post them before you go to bed. No, sir. Do not disturb me any more. I am exceedingly tired, and as I must get up to-morrow morning very early, I want a night of complete rest. Francois, les monies personnes sont-elles venues dein ander apres moi pendant mon absence ? I Oui, monsieur, ellessont revenues; elles ont meme attendu pres d'un quart d'heure, disant qu'el- les avaient absolument besoin de voir monsieur. Vous avez eu tort de les faire en- trer ; toutes les fois que je serai sorti, je vous defends de laisser entrer personne. C'est que, monsieur, elles avaient I'air toutes contrariees de ne pas vous voir. N'en avez- vous rien dit a madame ? Madame etait elle-meme trts ennuyee de leur obstination. C'est assez. Vous trouverez ce soir quelques lettres sur mon bu- reau ; vous n'oublierez pas de les mettre a la poste avant d'aller vous coucher. Non, monsieur. Ne me derangez plus. Je suis ex- tremement fatigue ; et comme je dois nie lever demain matin de tres bonne heure, j'ai besoin d'une unit de repos complet. 2d6 Reading Exercise No. 53. Notre pere etait trop pauvre pour donner une servante h ma mere, et j'etais trop petite^ pour faire toute seuie le menage.2 Les voisines venaient bien^ de bon ooeur,* quand je les priais, tirer pour nous le seau du puits, mettre la grosse buolieS au feu, et pendre la marmiteS a la cremail- lere'' ; mais ma mere et moi, nous faisions^ tout le reste. Aussitot que j'avais pu® marclier seule danS la Ijbambre, j'avais ete la servante neel" de la maison, les pieds de ma mere, qui n'en avait plus d'autres que les miens. Ayant sans cesse besoinil de quelque chose qu'elle ne pouvait aller c]ierolierl2 au jardin, dans la cour, dans la chambre, au feu, sur I'evier, sur la table, sur un meublel^, elle s'etait aoooutumeel* a se servir dels moi avant I'ageis, comme elle se serait servie d'une troisieme main; et moi, j'etais fiere toutel'^ petite que j'etais, de me sentiris necessaire, utile^ Berviable comme une grande personnels ^ la maison20, Cela m'avait rendue^l attentive, milre, serieuse, raison- nable, avant I'age de buit ans. Elle me disait22 : " Gene- vieve, il me faut23 cela, il me faut ceci; apporte-moi ta petite soeur Josette sur men lit, remporte-la2* dans son berceau, et berce-la du bout de ton pied jusqu'a ce qu'elle dorme; va me cbercher mon bas; ramasse mon pe- loton25, va couper une salade au jardin; va au poulailler tater26 s'il y a des ceufs cbauds dans le nid des poules ; hacbe des cboux pour faire la soups a ton pere; bats27 le beurre ; mats du bois au feu ; ecume la marmite qui bout ; jettes-y le sel; etends28 la nappe ; rince29 les verres ; des- cends a la cave, ouvre le robinet, remplis au tonneau la bouteille de vin. Lamaetikb (Histoire d'une servante.) (to be continued.) 1 trop petite, too young, ' 2 mAnage, housekeeping, 3 venaient Men, came indeed, 4 de ion coeur, very willingly, 5 Mche, log, 6 marmite, pot, 7 crimailUre, hook, SfaisioTis, did, 9 aussit6t que j'avais pu, as soon as I was able, 10 nie, bom, 11 ayant lesoin, being in need, 12 elle ne pouvait aller chercher, she could not go and- fetch, 13 meuhle, piece of furniture, 14 s'itait accoutumie, had ac- customed herself, 15 se servir de, employ, 16 avant Vdge, though' very young, 17 toute, however, 18 de me sentir, to feel I was, 19 grande persorme, grown up person, 20 A la m.aison, at home, 21 rendue, made, 22 disait, said, 23 il me faut, I want, 24 rem- porfe-te, take her hack, 25 ^rioiom, clew, 26 tdter, to feel, 27 bats, churn, 28 itends, spread, 29 rince, rince. 254 ruTY-FOURTH Lesson. Ginquante-guatrieme Legon. Syntax of the Pronoun. Personal Pronouns. Conjunctive personal pronouns, used as subjects to the verb, are placed before tbe verb. Except : 1. In interrogative sentences. Mes-vous content ? Are you contented ? Est-elle Tnalade ? Is she ill ? 2. In some exclamatory sentences. JSst-il intelligent t How intelligent he is ! 3. When the verb is in the subjunctive mood at the beginning of the sentence, without being preceded by any conjunction. Eussi-je su cela auparavant. Had I known that before. 4. When the verb forms a separate proposition, stating that somebody's words are reported. Je vcmdrais, dit-il, que vous I'eussiez amenS. I wished, he said, that you had brought him. Aussi, also ; peut-Ure, perhaps ; eyicore, yet ; toujours, however ; en vain, in vain ; du mains, at least ; di, peine, hardly, and a few others. 5. Wlien the sentence begins with one of the adverbs : — Peut-Ure ne me croirez vous pas. Perhaps you will not believe me. Du moiTis m' icouteres-vous. At least you will listen to me. A peine etait-ii arrivi. Hardly had he arrived. The inversion of the noun subject also takes place in sentences beginning with relative pronouns, which are not the subjects of the following verbs, the abverb ou, and the conjunction qxiand. Ce n'itait pas U, ce que voulait man ami. This was not what my friend wanted. Est-ce le livre dont parlait votre pire ? Is it the book of which your father spoke ? Dites-moi oil demeure le docteur. Tell me where the doctor lives. Je ne sais quand reviendra la reina. I do not know when the queen returns. Personal pronouns subjects to the verb must be repeated before every verb when the sentences are connected by any conjunctions other than et, ou, ni, mats. Je viendrai sifai le temps. I shall come if I have time. Vous nous dire:: quand vous partirez. You wHl tell us when you start. Je lis et 6cris beaucoup. I read and write much. Je ne le sais ni ne le saurai jamais. I do not know it, neither shall I eyer know it. 266 to breathe, respirer to conqiier, conquerir correct, correct to dine, diner guilty, coupable to live, demeurer to milk, traire office, bureau m. pale, pdle to rise, se lever saint, saint single, seul to stand, Stre debout sun, soleil in. threshold, seuil m. Exercise No, 54. 1. To milk. To conquer. Tolivej;*). He conquers. That he may conquer. We milk. He will conquer. You live. He has conquered. He conquered (imp.) They (to.) milked {■kap.) That you may con- quer. You will live. We had conquered. Let us live. He would conquer. We shall milk. You lived. That you might conquer. He conquered (p. d.) We should milk. You would live. That we may milk. They would have conquered. That he might conquer. Let us conquer. They will have conquered. 2. Avez-vous vu la reine ? Est-il venu^ aujourd'hui a son bureau? Est-elle belle ! Eussions-nous appris^ cela : nous ne 1' aurions pas attendue. Que voulez-vous', me dit-il ? Je I'estime ; aussi ferai-je* tout mon possible' pour I'aider dans cette circonstance. Peut-etre le connaissez-vous ? En vain I'attendlmes-nous, il ne vint^ pas. Du moius m'expliquerez-vous pourquoivous venez' sitard. Apeine^ etiez- vous sorti, qu'il est venu. Je parlerai si j'ai le temps. Vous irez chez lui ou lui ecrirez. Wi Ini ni elle n e sont malades. Vous etes coupable, mais je vous absous. Je crois que vous avez tort' : car vous hesitez. Je lis le livre dont m'a parle mon maitre. Je ne sais pas ou va mon pere. Where are you ? Had you said that I would have waited for you. How generous he is ! Carry that, he said, to the grocer who lives in the other street. Perhaps he will bring me some money. In vain they waited for their cousins, they did not come^". You wi'ite and speak that language correctly.' He has learned and recited it by heart without making!' ^ single^^ mistake. I do not know him ; therefore'^ I shall not receive him. Had I known'* that : I would not have come'". I have met the officer whom your father knows. Do you know when the train leaves ? 1 est-il vcnu, did he come 2 appris, heard 3 roulez-votts, do you wish 4 ferav-Jf, I shall do 5 tout monpossihU, all I can 6 il ne vint pas, ho did not coine 7 v&nez, come 8 a peine, hardly 9 vous avez tort, you are wrong 10 they did not come, ilsne vinrent pas 11 without making, sans /aire 12 a single, une seule 13 therefore, aussi 14 known, su 15 come, venu. <*) See Supplement, page 23. 256 Questions on Grammar, 1. In what sentences are conjunctive personal pronouns, used as sub- jects to the verb, placed after the verb ? 2. When are they placed after a verb in the subjunctive mood ? 3 . What is their place in a separate proposition stating that some- body's words are reported ? 4. Which are the adverbs which, placed at the beginning, of the sen- tence, rec[uire the pronoun subject to be placed after the verb ? 5. What are the pronouns, the adverb of place, and the conjunction which allow the inversion of the subject to take place ? 6. Which are the four conjunctions which do not require that the pro- noun subject should be repeated before every verb ? Conversation. Are you satisfied with your new servant ? Fairly ; she is industrious, and, above all, very honest ; but she has a very bad temper. Had you said that to me before, I should have made her some observations on the subject yes- terday. Perhaps she would have felt offen- ded at my having complained to you about this fault. At least she would have known that I was informed of it, and she would, I am certain, have endeavoured to repress hence- forth her fits of bad temper. Will you come to see me to-morrow if you have time ? I shall probably come, but I will write you a few lines, if I be prevented by any unexpected cause from doing so. Did you know my uncle ? I knew and venerated him : his memory is honoured by every- body in the town. Do you know my cousin ? I know him a little and meet him occasionally. Etes-vous satisfait de votre nou- velle servante ? Passablement ; elle est laboriense et surtout tres honnete ; mais elle a un tres mauvais caractere. M'eussiez-vous dit, cela plus t6t, que je lui aurais fait bier des observations a ce sujet. Peut-gtre se serait-elle formaUsee de ce que je m'etais plaint a. vous de ce defaut. Du moins aurait-elle su que j'en etais informe, et elle aurait, j'en suis certain, fait des efforts pour reprimer dorenavant ses acces de mauvaise humeur. Viendrez-vous me voir demain, si vous avez le temps ? Je viendrai probablement ; mais- je vous ecrirai quelqueilignes, si j'en suis empechepar un motif inattendu. Avez-vous connu mon oncle ? Je I'ai connu et venere ; sa me- ' moire est honoree de toute la ville. Connaissez-vous mon cousin ? Je le oonnais un peu et le rencon- tre de temps en temps. 257 Beading Exercise No. 54. (concluded from No. hZ.) Et puis, quancl j'avais fini, qu'on avait dine et que tout allait l)ien,' elle me disait : " Va t'amuser^ maintenant sur la porte aveo les enfants des voisines, qu'ils voient^ que tu es aussi propre, ausai bien mise* et aussi peignde^ qu'eux." Et j'y allais un moment pour lui faire plaisir^ ; mais je n'allais jamais plus loin' que le seuil de la cour, pour pouvoir' entendre si ma mere me rappelait, et je n'y restais pas longtemps, parce que les enfants se moquaient de^ moi et disaient entre eux'" : " Tiensi^, la s^rieuse, elle ne sait'^ jouerjijien, laissons-la^^." J'aimais mieux rentrer'* et me tenir Aebout aupr&s du lit de ma mere, ^piant^^ dans ses yeux ce qu'elle pouvait avoir k demander. Tous les jours se passaient ainsi ; je me levais la premiere, je me couohais'^ la dernifere. Je ne respirais I'air que par la fenetre, je ne voyais le soleil que sur le seuil de la porte, et voil^i' pourquoi, Monsieur, j'avais le visage blano. On disait & ma mere: "Votre petite a done les pales couleursi8 ? " — " Oh. ! non," repondait-elle, " mais e'est qu'elle a la pale vie." Je n'allais pas meme h I'ecole. Cette longue infirmity de ma mfere, en la retenant^^ tant d'anntes ainsi immo- bile^o et d^scEuvree de corps^' dans son lit, I'avait rendue instruite^^ comme une dame et d^vou^e comme une sainte. Les fils de nos voisines qui allaient en classe^^ ou qui revenaient en vaoanoes^f cbez leurs parents, pretaient leurs vieux livres par charity h. la pauvre vitriere^ infirme, par I'entremise^* de mon jeune frere, pour lui abrdger le temps^. Lamaetinb {Histoire d'une servante.) 1 iout allait bien, all was going on satisfactorily, 2 va t'amuser, go andenjoy yourself, 3 qu'ils voient, that they may see, 4 hien mise, well dressed, 5 peignie, combed, 6 lui faire plaisir, please her, 7 plus loin, farther, 8 pour poumir, in order to he able, 9 se moquaient de, laughed at, 10 enire eux, among themselves, 11 liens, see, 12 elle ne sail, she cannot, 13 laissons-la, let us leave her alone, 14 rentrer, to go in again, 15 4piant, watching, 16 je me couchais, . I went to bed, 17 voiUi, this was, 18 les pdles couleurs, the green sickness, 19 retenant, keeping, 20 immobile, motionless, ^ d4- sceuvrie de corps, bodily helpless, 22 instruite, learned, 23 en classe, to school, 24 en vacances, for the holidays, 25 mtriire, glazier's wife, 26 eniremise, mediation, 27 abreger le temjjs, to cause time to pass away. French Grammar, 9 258 PrpTY -FIFTH Lesson. Cinqiiante-cinquikne Legem. Syntax of the Pronouns (cmitinued). Personal Pronouns (contimied). Wten two or more subjects of a verb are of different persons, the verb must be in tbe plviral, and is generally preceded by a pronoun of the first person plural if one of the subjects is a [ pronoun of the first person, and of the second person plural if the subjects are of the second and third persons. I I Lui et moi, nous viendrons. He and I shall come. J^oiis et eux, v supple, souple to surprise, surprendre tender, tendre to touch, toucher to trust,se,;?er it, \rdble unfavoura ble. di[fn,iio- while, pendant que to worry, ennuyer youth, jeunessef. Exercise No. 56. 1. To gather(*) — to die — I gathered (i) — we shall gather — he gathers — he gathered f^. (i. J— we die — that you might gather — they fm.J die — we gather — he would die — do we gather? — die (sing.) — would they (f.) die? — you do not gather — we shall not die — we gathered f^. (Z.^ — did fhey (f.) gather? — that he may die — do they (m.) gather ?— I gather — ^that you might die — he will gather — that we may die — she died (p. d.) — he gathered (i.) — she should die — that we may gather. (i.__XL5e promet de ne plus retourner^ dans cette ville. Elle se rejouit de voir sa fille. lis s'amusent beacoup. Chacun pense a^ soi avant de penser aux autres. Aucun livre ne renferme' en soi plus de beautes. Nul n'attribue a soi son infortune Personne n'a de soi une opinion defavorable. Quelqu'un qui parle toujours de soi ne pent manquer^ d'ennuyer ceux qui I'ecoutent. Quiconque se mefle trop de' soi ne reussira jamais. Tout le monde_a_en soije germe de bonnes et de _mauvaises qualites. Tout^aute entratne apres soi un chfttiment inevitable. Mon ami ne se fie qu'k lui pour ses affaires. Ma m^re ne parlait d'elle qu'avec une grande circonspection. J'aurais besoin de° quelques timbres ; en avez-vous ? Mon frke appartient' k la Soci^te des Arts ? y appartenez-vous aussi ? They worry themselves very much in that little town. He flatters himself that he will succeed. She burned herself. Every one ought^ to speak of himself with the greatest modesty. This intelligence' is in itself something so^" extraordinary that it is nearly impossible to believe it^^. My father always spoke of them with praise. He often speaks of it, but I do not believe it. I do not like that people should speak only of themselves. He went to^^ his rooms to dress himself, to accompany us to the theatre. This poem has in itself something that touches and charms all those who read it. 1 rttvumer, to go Taack 2 p^nse a, thinks of 3 ren/erme, contains 4 me pent manquer, cannot fail 5 se mefie de, distrusts 6 j'aurais hesom (fe, I should want 7 appartient, belongs 8 ought, devrait 9 intelligence, nouvelk 10 something so, quelque chose de si 11 it, y 12 to, daTls. (*) See Supplement, pages 24 & 25. 264 Questions on Grammar. 1. When must the reflective pronoun se be used ? 2. When must soi be used in speaking of persons ? 3. When must itself be translated soi ? i. What are the words which must be used as indirect objects in a definite manner in speaking of persons ? 5. What are the pronouns which must be used instead of lui, die, eux, elles, as indirect objects in speaking of things ? Conversation. Is not every man subject to make mistakes ? Undoubtedly ; one ought never to trust to one's own judgment, when one can have the advice of those who know life. That is a matter of course. Have you never heard young people who are completely ignorant of the things of this world, speak of them with unparaUeled assurance and effrontery ? Too often. Do you think this assurance and effrontery are genuine ? I do not believe it, for it is im- possible to admit that those who have no experience know life as well, if not better, than those who have experienced its vicissitudes. True wisdom really consists in mistrusting one's self. My friend's father often told him that maxim ; and every time he thinks of him and his good advice, he asks himself why he did not profit by it. Chaque homme n'est-il pas sujet k se tromper ? Sans aucun doute ; on ne devrait jamais s'en rapporter k soi, quand on peut avoir les conseils do ceux qui connaissent la vie. Cela va de soi. N'avez-vous jamais entendu des jeunes gens, qui ignorent com- pletement les choses de ce monde, en parler avec une assurance, une efifronterie sans pareille ? Trop souvent. Croyez-vous que cette assurance, cette effronterie soit sincere ? Je ne le crois pas, car il est im- possible d'admettre que ceux qui n'ont pas d'experience con- naissent la vie aussi Men, si ce n'est mieux, que ceux qui en ont eprouve les vicissitudes. La vraie sagesse consiste reeUe- ment h se mefier de soi. Le p^re de mon ami lui disait sou- vent cette verite ; et chaque fois qu'il pense a lui et k ses bons conseils, il se demande pourquoi il n'en a pas profite. 265 Reading Exercise, No. 56. Le premier combat^ fut celui de la lutte.^ Un Ehodien' d'environ trente-cinq ans* surmonta^ tous les autres qui osferent se presenter k lui ; il dtait encore dans toute la vigueur de la jeunesse; ses bras ^taint nerveux et bien nourris ; au moindre mouvement qu'il faisait,^ on voyait tous ses muscles ; ' il ^tait dgalement souple \,^-. : «t fort. Je ne lui parus pas di^i d'etre^ vaincu, et, regardant avec pitie ma tendre jeunesse, il voulut^ se retirer^" ; mais je me pr&entai k lui. Alors nous nous saisimes I'un I'autre, nous nous serrSmes" k perdre la respiration^^. Nous etions ^paule contre ^paule, pied contre pied, tous les nerfs tendus^^ et les bras entrelaces^* comme des serpents ; ohacun s'efforgant'^ d'enlever'' de terre^' son ennemi. Tantot^' n essayait de me surprendre en me poussant du c6t4 droit^^ ; tantot il s'efforgait de me pencher^" du c6_t^ gauche^'. Pendant qu'il me t&tait^^ ainsi, je le poussai avec tant de violence que ses reins plierent^ ; il tomba sur I'ar&ne^, et m'entraina'^ sur lui. En vain il tS,clia de me mettre dessous^, je le tins^' immobile sous moi ; tout le peuple^ cria, " Victoire au flls d'Ulysse^'' " ; et j'aidai au Eliodien confus i se relever^". F^NELON (Aventures de TeUmaque). 1 combat, contest, 2 lutie, wrestling, 3 Ehodien, Ehodian, 4 d'en- viron f-rente-einq ans, about thirty-five years of age, 5 surmorda, overcame, 6 faisait, made, 7 ore voyait. tous ses muscles, all his muscles could he seen, 8 d'iire, of being, 9 voulut, wished, 10 se retirer, to withdraw, 11 serrdiri^es, pressed, 12 A perdre la respira- tion, till respiration was almost stopped, 13 tendiis, stretched, 14 en- trelacis, entwined, 15 s'efforqant, endeavouring, 16 enlever, to lift, 17 de terre, from the ground, 18 tantSt, sometimes, 19 du c6ti droit, to the right, 20 pencher, to incline, 21 du c6U gauche, to the left, 22 tdtait, was handling, 23 pliirent, bent, 24 arine, arena, 25 m' entralna, dragged me down, 26 cfo me mettre dessmis, to put ma beneath him, 27 tins, held, 28 tout le peuple, all the people, 29 Uly'sse, Ulysses, 30 4 se relever, to rise again. French Grammar, o* 266 FiFTT-BEVENTH Lesson. Cinquante-septieme Leqon. Syntax of the Pronouns (continued). Demonstrative Pronouns. Although ce is ordinarily used before the verb itre, it can ftlso be used before the verbs devoir, pouvoir, when followed by Itre, and before semller. Je n'ai jamais mcmU d, cheval, ce doit itre tris agriable. I never Todfi on horseback, it must be very pleasant. Je ne I'ai pas tntendu dire, mais ce peut Stre vrai. I have not heard of it, but it may be true. Vous arrivez bien iard, ce me lemhU. It seems to me that yon arrive very late. Ce nrast be nsed pleonasticaHy before Stre when the verb tire is placed betweMi two inHnitives. jj imer, c'eet souffrir. To love is to suffer. Ce must also be used when the first sentence begins with ce. followed by a relative pronoun, such as qui, que, dont. Ce qu'il pri/ire c'est de consacrer son temps d, Vitude des seienas et des arts. What he prefers is to devote his time to the study of science and art. Ce dont je me plains le plus, o'est sa paresse. "What 1 chiefly com- plain about is his laziness. Ce, however, must not be used when the verb ^tre is followed by an adjective or a noun preceded by the indefinite article un, une. Ce que vous me racontez est inconcevable. What you tell me is incon- ceivable. Ce qui vous est arrivi est un grand malhmir. What happened to you is a great misfortune. Ce qu'il dit est trndmnment un mensonge. What he says is evidently a lie. Ce is also used to sum up a whole sentence which is subject to the verb etre, and to give more force to the idea. ie plus grand malheur qui puisse arriver A un Twmme, c'est de n'avoir conjiance en personne. The greatest misfortune that can happen to a man is to have confidence in none. When the sentence begins with c'est, c'etait, ce sera, &c., the infinitive which follows must be preceded by de, que or ^ue de. Ccst lire iTtypudent que de me demander cela. It is impudent to ask me that. Ce que je vous denumde, c'est i^Ure patient. What I ask you is to be patient. Cest renoncer d. la fortime que de signer v/n pareil conirat. To sign such a contract is to renounce fortune . 267 to admire, admirer around, autour de august, auguste to balance, ialaricer black, noir bosom, sein to. character, caracth-em. LJ__charm, cJiarme m. to come, venir _ coral, email m. to cover, cowerir drop, gouttef. duty, devoir m. to hold, tenir humid, Jmmide incomprehensible, m- compriheiisibU inconsiderate, incon- sidiri ivory, ivoire m,. lily, lis m. to raise, ilever to recognize, recon- naUre to reflect, riJUcMr repentance, repentir m. rock, rocker in. scarlet, icarlate shelter, asiU m. to shine, iriller stem, iigef. to talk, causer task, tdcTtef. tear, larmef. thorn, ipinef. towards, eniiers valley, valUef. ■whiteness, Uancheur f. wonderful, merveilleux zephyr, z^hir m. Exercise No. 57. 1. To hold — to come{*) — did he come! — he held (i) — we come — Tfoulji you hold ? — I shall come. They (m.) will hold — she came (fi^.) — I hold — he comes — ^we held (p.d.) — we do not hold — that he may come — we hold — he held (p.d.)—'SDi(:j (m.) come— that I may hold — that you might come — did you come? — they (f-) held (p.d.) — do you come? — hold (sing.)—(i desol^ que mes parents eussent k se plaindre de mon applica- tion. Je suis heureux de vous entendre , parler alnsl ; 11 faut qu'un en- fant soit recoimaissant envers ses parents. Je sais quels sacrifices lis s'impo- sent pour mon Education. 297 Reading Exercise No. 64. Eemarquez, je vous prie,l la condiiite des Eomains Apres la defaite d'Anthiocug,il8 etaientmaltresderAfrique, de I'Asie et de la G-rece,2 sans y avoir presque de* villes en propre.* II semblait qu'ils ne oonquissents que pour donner : mais ils restaient si bien les maitres que, lors- qu'ilsfaisaient la guerre a quelque prince, ils I'accablaient, pour ainsi dire, du poids de tout I'uniTers. 11 n'etait pas temps encore de s'emparer* des pays conquis. S'ils avaient garde les villes prises hj Pliilippe, ils auraient fait ouvrir les yeux aux Grecs^ ; si, apres la seconde g-uerre punique,^ ou celle centre Anthiocus, ils avaient pris des terresl" en Afrique ou en Asia, ils n'au- raient pu conserver des conquetes si peu solidement etablies. II fallait attendre que toutes les nations fussent ac- coutumees a obeir comme libres et comme allieesH, avant de leur commander comme sujettes, et qu'elles eussent ete Be perdre^2 peu a peu^^ dans la republique romaine. Voyez le traite qu'ils firent avec les Latins apres la victoire du lac Eegille ; il fut un des principaux fondements de leur puissance. On n'y trouve pas un seul mot qui puisse faire soup5onner I'empirel*. C'etait une maniere lente de conquerir. On vain- quait un peuple, et on ne se contentait pas de I'aifaiblir; on luilS imposait des conditions qui le minaientlS insen- siblement; s'il se relevait^T, on I'abaissait encore davantage. et il devenait sujet sans qu'on piit donner une epoquel^'de sa sujetionl9. MoNTESQUiETi (Grandeur et decadence des BomainsJ. 1 je vous prie, I beg of yon, 2 de V Afrique, de VAsie et de la, Grice, of Alrica, Asia, and Greece, Z presque de, scarcely any, 4 en pru//re, in tlieir possession, 5 cotiquissent, conquered, & s'evnjarer de, to seize, 7 2->rises a, taken from, 8 ils inomient fait ouvrir les yca.e aux Orecs, lliey woald have opened the eyes of the Greeks, 9 jj unique, Punic, 10 irris des terres, seized, tenitovy, 11 aKito, allies, 12 se perdre, to merge, 13 peu a pieu, by degrees, 14 qui puisse fah-e soupgonner I'empire, which would cause any suspicion of sovereiguty, 15 lui, upon it, 16 yninaient, undermined, 11 se relevait, rose ag.in, 18 donner ure epoqtie, &x a, time, 19 S!i/e'«iOi\ subjection. Fren"^. Grammar. 10* 298 Sixty-fifth Lesson. Sovxante-cinquihme Legon. Syntax of the Participles. Present Participle. The Present Participle is always invariable. But as present participles are often used as adjectives, it is necessary to know now to ascertain whether such words must agree or not with the noun to which they refer. A word ending in ant is a pre.^ent participle when it expresses an. action, and is followed by a direct coimplement, or preceded by the preposition en, or the particle me. Ma mire, le voymtt pdlir, lui demamda ce qu'il avail. My mother, seeing Mm turn pale, asked him what was the matter with him. 'C'est en travaillant que vous upprendrez. It is by working that you will learn. Ne sachant ce qu'il demcmdoM ils me Venvoyirettt. Not knowing what he wanted they sent Mm to me. A word ending in ant is a verbal adjective when it expresses a state, and could be replaced by a qualifying adjective ; it is never followed by a direct object, but can sometimes be followed by an indirect object. C'est une histoire inUresswiite. This is an interesting story. Mle se tenait tremhlante devant moi. She stood trerobling before me. In the above example tremhlante is an adjective because it describes the state in which she was when standing before me, rather than the action of tremlsling. Past Participle. The rules relative to the agreement of the Past Participle can be reduced to four cases. 1st. When it is not accompanied by any auxiliary. 2nd. When it is accompanied by the auxiliary Stre. Srd. When it is accompamed by the auxiliary avoir and preceded by the direct object. 4th. When, being accompanied by avoir, it is foUowed by the' direct object. 1st Case. Wlien the Past Participle is not accompanied by any auxiliary, it is a real qualifying adjective, and agrees with the noun it qualifies. J'ai trouve une rose/anee. I found a withered rose. n m'a envoyi une lettre tris mat icrite. He sent me a very badly written letter. 2nd Case. When the Past Participle is accompanied by the auxiliary Hre, the participle agrees with the subject. Sa mmson est bdtie sur la colline. His house is built on the hill. Ces enfants sont towjours iUgwmment vetus. Those cMldren are always elegantly dressed. 299 to applaud, applaudir to tuild, construire to consist, consister to embaiTass, emhar- rasser entirely, entierement . explanation, explica- twnJ7~ failure, faillitef. favourable, favorable to flow, c'ouler impertinence, imper- tinence f. to inaJce, /aire meaning, sens m. I 'pusser-hy, passant m.' peach, pichef. pear, poire f. to postpone, remettre principle, principe m, to produce, produire to ruin, miner to say, dire sentence, phrase f. too muci, trop to tremble, tremiler wit, esprit m. Bxercifse No. 65. 1. To say — to make or to do* — I made (ij—he says — make — he makes — we say — I shall make — we said {p.d.J — ^he made (i) — I shall say — they (m.J make — say (pi.) — we shall do — you could make— we made (i) — do you say ? — we make — we should say — you will make^ that lie might make — they said (i) — you do not make — we shall make —you make (ij — do you not say ? — that you may make — -say (sing. ) — that I may do — would you make ? — that I may say — that we might Bay — ^they (m.) made (i) — we did — they (in.) will do — I shall do. Mes eleves, ne comprenant^ pas mes explications, me priferent de les repeter. Ces messieurs, en vous voyant, ont paru surpris et em- barrasses. Ne connaissant pas leur chemin, ils etaient obliges de demander k tons les passants. Ella etait toute tremblante et j'eus beaucoup de peine k la rassurer.^ J'ai In ce matin une histoire ex- tremement touchante. C'est une jetee entierement construite de la main de I'homme. Les hommes habitues k mentir se figurent' souvent qu'ils disent la verite. La table etait couverte de* fleurs. Les questions posees aux^ candidats etaient tres difficiles. Ces livres ont ete vendus tres bon-marche h. la vente aux encheres.^ Combien ces pSches ont- elles ete payees par votre cuisinifere 1 Les dernites nouvelles arrivees de rinde' ne sont pas tres favorables. ISTot knowing what they would do, my cousins resolved to postpone theii- departure. They learned that language by^ speaking it on every occasion. Believing that you were at home,' we called-"' yesterday, but did not find you. Eead the following sentence. The letter written by you yesterday night" has been posted^^ by the servant. They have been entirely ruined by the failure of this bank. The two volumes are published by our firm. We found on his table an opened letter. 1 ccmiprencmt, understanding 2 ct ?a rcwswrer, in reassuring her Ssefigurent, imagine 4 de, with 5 posees amx, jjut to the 6 venU aux encMres, sale hy auction 7 Inde, India 8 %, en 9 at home, ch&s vous 10 we called, lioits voui presentdmes 11 night, soir 12 to post, mettre a la paste. f*) See Supplement, pages 28 and 29. 300 Questions on Grammar. 1. What is the rule for the agreement of present participles ? 2. When is a word ending in ant to be considered as a present participle ? 3. AVhcn is a word ending in ant to be considered as a verbal adjective ? i. How many cases are there for the agreement of past participles ? 5. What is the rule for the agreement of past participles when not accompanied by any auxiliary verb ? 6. What is the rule for the agreement of past participles when accom- panied by the auxiliary Ure ? Conversation. What a charming ballad ! It is quite new ; the music has been composed by X..., and the words by Y... Two great talents, contributing to a common work, cannot fail to produce something perfect. It ought to be so. However, it seeins to me that a ballad is still more touching when the poetry and the music have been written by the same pen. Do you think a good poet is often a good musician ? Sometimes ; and then the same inspir.ition has dictated both, and the two strings which the charm of the poetry and harmony cause to vibrate, can- not fail to thrill in unison. You have some perfectly-copied music here. It was copied by my sister ; this ballad selling enormously it is very difficult to get it, and I very much wanted to have it to sing it this evening. I should be very happy to hear you, but my doctor forbids me to go out in the evfening. Quelle charmante romance ! EUe est toute nouvelle ; la musi- qne a ete composee par X..., et les paroles par Y.... Deux grands talents, contribuant a une oeuvre commune, ne peu- vent manquer de prodmre qnelque chose de parfait. Cela devrait §tre. II me sernble toutefois qn'une romance est encore plus touchante quand la poesie et la musique ont ete ecrites par la meme plume. Croyez-vous qu'nn bon poete soit souvent un hon musicien ? Quelquefois ; et c'est alors la meme inspiration qui a dicte I'une et I'autre, et les deux cordes, que fait vibrer4g,jfh4rrae_^ du vers et de I'harmonie, ne' peuvent manquer de vibrer a I'unisson. Vous avez ici de la musique par- faitement copiee. EUe a ete copiee par ma scenr: cette romance, se vendant enor- mtMnent, il est tr^s difficile de se la procurer, et je tenais beaucoup k I'avoir pour la chanter se soir. Je serais tres heureuse de vous entendre : mais mon medecin me defend de sortir le soir. 301 Reading Exercise No. 65. H y a des gens qui parlent un moment avant que d'avoir pense. II y en a d'autres qui ont une fadel atten- tion &, oe qu'ils disent, et aveo qui Ton souffre dans la con- versation de tout le travail de leur esprit ; ils sont comme petris2 de phrases et de petits^ tours d 'expression, con- certes* dans leur geste et dans tout leur maintien^ : ils Bont puristes,^ et ne liasardent'^ pas le moindre mot, quand il devrait faire le plus bel effet du monde ; rien d'heureux ne leur ecliappe,^ rien ne coule de source^ et aveo liberteio ; ils parlent proprementu et ennuyeusementi^. L'esprit de la conversation consiste bien moins a en montrer beaucoup, qu'a en faire trouver aux autresl^ : oelui qui sort del* votre entretienis content de soi et de son esprit, Test de vous parfaitement. Les bommes n'aiment point a vous admirer, ils veulent plaire ; ils cberchent moins a^® etre instruits, et meme rejouisl^, qu'a etre goutesis et applaudis ; et le plaisir le plus delicat est de faire celui d'autrui. II ne faut pas qu'il y ait trop d'imagination dans nos conversations ni dans nos ecrits ; elle ne produit souvent que des idees vaines et puerilesi^, qui ne servent point a perfectionner^O le golit et a nous rendre meilleurs ; nos pensees doivent etre prises dans le bons sens et la droite^i raison, et doivent22 etre un effet de notre jugement. C'est une grande misere^^ que de n'avoir pas assez d'esprit pour bien parler, ou assez de jugement pour sa taire. Voila le principe de toute impertinence. La BKUTfeRB (Les Garacteres.) 1 fade, faint, 2 pitris, made up, 3 petUs, petty, 4 concerns, affected, 5 maintien, deportment, 6 puristes, purists, 7 hasardent, risk, 8 ichapps, escapes, 9 de source, naturally, 10 avec liberie, freely, 11 proprement, correctly, 12 ennuyeuseinent, tediously, 13 en faire trouver aux autres, causing others to find subjects for it, 14 sort de, leaves, 15 entretien, conversation, 16 cherclient mains d, seek less to, 17 r^/owis, amused, IS jfo to, appreciated, 19 puirildes, ehiklish, 20 perfectionner, to improve, 21 droife, sound, 22 doivent, should, 23 misere, misfortune. 302 Sixty-sixth Lesson. Soixante-sixi&me Le^on. Ssmtax of the Participles. Agreement of the Past Participle. 3rd Case. Wien the past participle is joined to the auxUiary avoir, it never agrees witn the subject, but agrees with the direct object, when preceded by it. J'airM beaucoup la maison que vans avez acheUe. I like the house you have bought much. Lcs fiewrs que vous m'avez apporties Tne plaisent beaucoup. Tho flowers you have brought me please me greatly. 4th Case. When the past participle is joined to the auxiliary avoir, it remains invariable when followed by its direct object. Vbus avez acheti une maison que j'aime ieavAxmp. You have bought a house which I like very much. Vous m'avez apporU des fleurs qui me plaisent ieaucoup. You have brought me some flowers which please me much. Obsekvations. — 1. The past participle in the compound tenses of re- flective or reciprocal verbs, although joined to the auxiliary itre, follows the rule given for avoir, instead of which it is used. Les fleurs que ces messieurs se sont envoy 6es sont rares. The flowers those gentlemen sent each other are rare. 2. As n euter verbs have no direct objects, their past participles, used with avoir, are invariStteT ^ ' » Les quatreTieures'que j'ai dormi m'ont grandement reposi. The four hours I have slept have greatly rested me. • 3. Past participles, preceded by en, are invariable, as en has the mean- ing of of it, of them, and is an indirect object. Avez-vous vu des lions ? — Oui, fen ai vu au jardin zoologique. Have you seen any lions? Yes, I have seen some at the Zoological Gardens. 4. Past participles, followed by an infinitive, agree with the pronoun that precedes them when it is their direct object, Cette duTne a une ielle voix : je Vai entendue chanter. This lady has a fine voice ; I heard her singing. But they remain invariable when the pronoun is the object of I the infinitive. ! Cest une belle chanson, je Vai erUendu chanter. It is a fine song, I have heard it sung. Notice that in English the infinitive is translated by the present participle in the first example, and by the past participle in the second. 5. Faiijs always invariable before an infinitive. Avez-v(*) See Supplement, pages 2S and 29, 304 Questions on Grammar. What is the rule for the agreement of past participles aooompanied by avoir -when preceded by the direct object ? What is the rule for the agreement of past participles accompanied by avoir when followed by the direct object ? What is the rule for the agreement of the past participles of reflec- tive or reciprocal verbs ? What is the rule for the past participles of neuter verbs when joined to avoir 1 What is the rule for past participles preceded by en t What is the rule for past participles followed by an infinitive • What is the rule foi fait before an infinitive ? What is the rule for the past participles pu, voulu, cru, desiri, su, and permis f Conversation. The goods you sent me did not all arrive in good condition. We are quite astonished at what you tell us ; we superintended the packing and the loading ourselves, and we took every precautions that the whole should reach you safely. Did you receive the letter we wrote you on that subject ? Yes, we received it yesterday, and if 1 did not answer it im- mediately it was because I ex- pected to see you to-day. The invoice you forwarded us contains one ortwo slight errors. We regret it much ; our clerk made several also in other ac- counts, and we have dismissed him. You have very fine embroideries here. 1 saw them embroidered in your workshops. I have expressly engaged the women you saw embroidering, but I did not find as many as I could have wished. Les marchandises que vous m'avez envoyees ne sont pas toutes ar- rivees en bonne condition. Nous sommes ^tonnes de ce que vous nous dites li ; nous avons surveUle nous - memes I'em- ballage et le ohargemen t, et nous avons pris toutes les precautions pour que tout vous an-iv^t & Don port. Avez-vous reju la lettre que nous vous avons &rite h. ce sujet ? Oui, nous I'avons regue hier, et si je n'y ai pas rdpondu imme- diatement, c'est parce que je comptais vous voir aujourd'hui. La facture que vous nous avez fait remettre contient une ou deux petites erreurs. N ous le regrettons beaucoup : notre commis en a fait aussi plu- sieurs dans dVutres comptes, et nousTavons renvbyti./;; Vous avez Ik de trfes belles broderies. Je les ai vu broder dans vos ateliers. J'ai engag^ tout exprfes les ouvriferes que vous avez vues broder ; mais je n'en ai pas trouv^ autant que j'aurais voulu. 305 Reading Exercise No. 66. Monsieur Jourdain. — Je ne parle pas de cela, vous dis-je. Je vous demande ce que je parle avec vous, ce que je vous dis h, cette heure^ — qu'est-ce que c'est2 ? Madame Jourdain. — Des chansons. JIf. Jourdain. — He ! non, ce n'est pas cela. Ce que nous disons tous deux, le langage que nous parlons a cette heure ? Mad. Jourdain. — He bien^ ? M. Jourdain. — Comment est-ce que cela s'appelle* ? Mad. Jourdain. — Cela s'appelle comme on veut I'appeler. JIf. Jourdain. — C'est de la prose, ignorante.5 Mad. Jourdain. — De la prose? JIf. Jourdain. — Oui, de la prose. Tout ce qui est prose n'est point vers,^ et tout ce qui n'est point vers est prose. Et yoila ce que c'est que^ d'etudier ! (A, Nicole). Et toi, sais-tt bien comme il faut faire pour dire un U ? Nicole. — Comment ? JIf. Jourdain. — Oui, qu'est-ce que tu fais quand tu dis TJ? Nicole, — Quoi ? JIf. Jourdain. — ^Dis un pen U, pour voir.8 Nicole. — He bien ! U. JIf. Jourdain. — Qu'est-ce que tu fais? Nicole. — Je dis TJ. JIf. Jourdain. — Oui, mais quand tu dis TJ, qu'est-ce que tu fais ? Nicole. — Je fais ce que vous me dites. JIf. Jourdain.- — Oli ! I'etrange chose^ que d'avoir affaireio a des betesH ! Tu allongesi2 las levres en dehors, et approchesi3 la machoire d'en haul-' de oelle d'en basis. TJ ! vois-tu ? je fais la moueis ; "g. MoLiEEB (Le Bourgeois GentilTiomme.J 1 d ceiie hettre, at this moment, 2 qu'est-ca que c'est, what is it, 3 he bien, well, i est-ce que cela s'appelle, is that called, ^ 5 ignorante, you ignorant, 6 vers, poetry, 7 et voila ce que c'est d', and that is the result of, 8 pour voir, just to see, 9 Vitrange chose, what a funny thing it is, 10 d'avoir affaire, to have to do with, , 1 1 Utes, fools, 12 allonges les Ihires en dehors, protrude your lips, 13 approches, hring nearer, 14 d'en haul, upper, 15 de celle d'en has, to the under one, IS Je fais la moue, I pout. 306 Conseils sur I'art d'Scrire, 26 Novembre 1733. II y a oinq jours, mon cher ami, que je suis dange- reusement malade d'une espece d'inflammation d'entrailles; je n'ai la force ni de penser ni d'eorire. Je viens de recevoir votre lettre et le commencement de votre nouvelle allegorie. Au nom d'ApoUon, tenez-vous-en a votre premier sujet ; ne TetoufiEez pas sous un amas de fleurs etrangeres ; qu'on voie bien nettement ce que vous voulez dire : trop d'esprit nuit quelquefois a la clarte. Si j'osais vous donner un conseil, ce serait de songer a etre K:, ' simple, a purdir votre ouvrage d'une maniere bien f,' ' naturelle, bien olaire, qui ne coute aucune attention a I'esprit du lecteur. N'ayez point d'esprit; peignez avec verite, et votre ouvrage sera oharmant. II me semble que vous avez peine a ecarter la foule d'idees ingenieuses qui se presente toujours a vous ; c'est le defaut d'un homme superieur. Vous ne pouvez pas en avoir d'autre ; mais c'est un defaut tres dangereux. Que m'importe si I'enfant est etouflfe a force de caresses ou a force d'etre battu? Comptez que vous tuez votre enfant en le caressant trop. Encore une fois, plus de simplioite, moins de demangeaison de-briller ; allez vite au but ; ne dites que le necessaire. Vous aurez encore plus d'esprit que les autres, quand vous aurez retranche votre superflu. Voila bieii des conseils que j'ai la hardiesse de vous donner ; mais petimus damusque vicissim.^ Celui qui ecrit est comme un malade qui ne sent pas, et celui qui lit peut donner des conseils au malade. Ceux que vous me donnez sur Adilaide,^ sont d'un homme bien sain ; mais pour parler sans figure, je ne suis guere en etat d'en profiter. On va jouer la piece : jacta est alea.^ Adieu. Dites a M. de Tormont combien je I'aime. Je suis trop malade pour en eorire davantage. Voltaire (Lettre a Cideville). Pourquoi Vhomme nait plus faille que les animaux? L'homme a ete jete nu sur la terre, faible, incapable de voler comme I'oiseau, de courir comme le cerf, de ram- per comme le serpent ! sans moyens de defense au milieu 1 we alternately ask and give 2 Adelaide du Guesdin, a play of Voltaire 3 the die is cast. 3U7 d'ennemis terribles, armesde griffes et de dards ; eans moyens pour braver Tintemperie des saisons, au milieu d'animaux couverts de toisons, d'eoailles, de fourrures ; sans abris, quand cbacun avait sa tanifere, son terrier, sa carapace, sa coquille; sans armes, quand tout se montrait arme autour de lui et centre lui I Eli bien, il a ete de- mander au lion sa caverne pour se loger, et le lion s'est retire devant son regard ; il a depouille I'ours de son pelage, et ce fut la son premier vetement ; il a arrache sa corne au taureau, et ce fut la sa premiere coupe ; puis il a fouille le sol, jusque dans ses entrailles, aiin d'y oh.erch.er les instruments de sa force future; d'une cote, d'un nerf et d'un roseau, il s'est fait des armes, et raigle,qui d'abord, en voyant sa faiblesse et sa nudite, s'appretait h, saisir sa proie, frappe au milieu des airs, est tombe mort a ses pieds, seulement pour lui fournir une plume, comme ornement a sa coiffure ! Parmi les animaux, en est-il un, un seul, qui eiit pu vivre et se conserver a de telles conditions ? Isolons pour un instant I'ouvrier de son oeuvre ; separons Dieu et la nature 1 Eh bien ! la nature a tout fait pour cet insecte et rien pour I'homme ! C'est que Thomme devait etre le produit de I'intelligence, bien plus que celui de la matiere, et Dieu, en lui octroyant ce don celeste, ce jet de lumiere, parti du foyer divin, le crea faible et miserable, pour qu'il eiit a en faire usage, et qu'il fdt contraint de trouver en lui-meme les elements de sa grandeur ! M. X. B. Saintine (Picciola). La bosse de I'art militaire. J'ai connu autrefois un enfant qui annon5ait les plus brillantes qualites militaires ; malheureusement il etait bossu. Enfant aussi, dans ce temps la, je I'accompagnais aux revues, aux parades, a I'exeroice, partout ou le tam- bour battait, ou des uniformes defilaient ; non pas que ces spectacles eussent pour moi un attrait bien vif, mais parce qu' attache a mon camarade, j'aimais a perdre mon temps dans sa compagnie. Ce bossu a'animait done au son des fi^es et des tam- bours ; et quand a cette musique de bruit succedait la musique plus expressive des instruments a vent, je ne sais quelle vehemente impression, venant a remuer son an*— 308 repandait sur ses traits comme un rayon de belHqueuse fierte, de martiale ardeur. Si ensuite les feux de file, le- tonn^rre de I'artillerie retentissaient dans la plaine ; si les regiments; marchant les uns centre les autres, simu- laient I'attaque, la victoire, la retraite et tout le spectacle de la guerre, I'enfant alors, passioiiiie par cette vue, s'elan- 9ait dans les tourbillons de fumee ; il se melait aur tirailleurs, il acoompagnait les pieces, 11 courait sur I'aile des escadrons, s'exposant a chaque instant a etre eorase par les colonnes ou maltraite par les soldats dont il genait les mou Yemen ts. La revue finie il marchait en cadence a cote de la tete du bataillon, les yeux fixes, sur le com- mandant, et simulant, par quelque geste, qu'il obeissait a tons les ordres,, qu'il executait mentalement toutes les' evolutions. Ces manieres le faisaient remarquer de la foule, et les gens riaient a le voir ; mais lui, sous I'empire d'un sentiment serifeux, continuait de marclier en cadence, insensible a la moquerie et ivre d' emotions, de gloire, de patrie et~de batailles. EoBOLPHE TcEPFFER (Nouvellcs GenevoisesJ. L'Incendie de St. Sylvain. Aux approches du hameau, tout n'etait que desordrej. confusion et desolation. Les bestianx, qu'on avait retires des etables, vaguaient au hasard en poussant de longs mugissements. Des meubles h, demi consumes, des banuts de chene, des sacs de grain, des matelas, des courtines de serge verte, jonchaient le sol et encombraient les avenues. Lk, de pauvres femmes trainaient par la main leurs petits en guenilles, desormais sans abri ; ici, toute une famille se lamentait sur les debris fumants de son humble fortune. Quand Claude et Catherine entrerent dans le village, I'incendie avait devore deux maisons ; une troisieme etait en feu. Attroupee devant la porte d'oii la flamme s'echap- pait comme d'un cratere, la foule inoccupee, mais non in- difi'erente, paraissait attendre, dans une anxiete que nous devons renoncer a decrire, le denoiaement d'un drame dont Catherine et Claude n'avaient pu voir le commencement. Tous les coeurs paraissaient profondement emus ; la paleur etait sur tous les fronts, la terreur se lisait sur tous les- visages. 309 " Mod oncle ! oii est mon oncle ? " s'ecria Catherine qui cherohait Francois Paty sans pouYoir le trouver. " Mon oncle estmort ! " ajouta-t-elle en apercevant dans un groups la vieille Marthe, qui se tordait las bras et qu'on etait oblige de retenir pour rempecher de se precipiter dans la fournaise. Voici ce qui s'etait passe : Les maltres dii logis qui brulait n'etant pas encore revenus des champs, on s'etait empresse, aussitot que le feu avait gagne le toit, d'en emporter le mobilier et lea ustensiles, gisant pele-mele sur la place de I'eglise ou on les avait deposes. Tout etait sauve ou a peu pres ; on n'avait guere oublie qu'un enfant au maillot, suspendu par sa lisiere a un clou, le long de la muraille, ainsi que cela se pratique, encore aujourd'hui, pour la commodite des , parents, dans plusieurs villages de la Marche et de la Bretagne. On ne s'etait apergu de cet oubli qu'en enten- dant les oris que poussait le petit malheureux, au milieu du oraquement des poutres et du petillement de la flamme. On voulut courir ; il n'etait plus temps. L'inoendie avait tout envahi, et pas un de I'assistance ne se sentait le courage d' affronter I'element terrible. Une mere seule I'etit ose. Le pauvre petit criait toujours, car sa mere n'etait pas la. C'est alors que, sans songer S, son grand age et ne consultant que son immense charite, Fran9ois Paty, qui s'etait montre partout dans ce desastre, encourageant les uns, dirigeant les autres, consolant les victimes, designant la cure comme un refuge toujours ouvert aux pauvres et aux affliges ; c'est alors, dis-je, que Fran9ois Paty s'etait avance au milieu des flammes, aussi calme, aussi serein que le Christ marchant sur les flots de la mer irritee. Vainement on s'etait eerie de toutes parts qu'il n'allat pas plus avant, qu'il courait a une mort certaine ; vaine- ment son vicaire, M. Noirel et la bonne Marthe s'etaient efforces de le retonir .... on avait vu sa tete blanche s'enfoncer et disparaitre dans le gouffre embrase. Deux minutes, deux siecles s'etaient ecoules, on ne I'avait pas vu reparaltre. Cependant le feu redoublait de fureur. La maisoii s'affaissait et s'ecroulait partie par partie. La toiture menafait a chaque instant de s'effondrer. Les cris de 310 I'enfant avaient cesse ; Ton n'entendait plus qu'un gronde- Boent sourd, pareil au bruit de la tempfite, C'est sur ces entrefaites que Catherine venait d'arriver. En un instant elle apprit tout. Son premier ori fut vers Dieu, le second vers Claude. Dieu, ni Claude ne repon- dirent. Claude s'etait perdu dans la foule. La parole humaine est impuissante a rendre la scene dectirante qui se passa des lors dans ce pauvre village. Egaree, sup- pliante, eperdue, Catherine allait de I'un a I'autre, em- brassant celui-ci, prenant la main a celui-la. " Sauvez mon oncle, sauvez-le ! " disait-elle. "Pas un de vous n'aura-t-il le courage de sauver notre pere a tous ? Que ferez-vous, quand vous ne I'aurez plus ? Cruels, est- ce ainsi que vous nous airaez ? Ne suis-je plus votre petite amie, votre petite vierge, votre petite fee? Dites, parlez, ingrats ! Est-il un seul de vous que nous n'ayons console dans sa peine ? Vous autres, vous m'avez vue naltre et grandir. Vous, vos soeurs sont mes soeurs et vous etes mes freres. Laisserez-vous mourir mon oncle, votre ami, votre vieux pasteur ? " " Mes enfants, mes cliers enfants !" disait a son tour le papa Noirel, " je suis bien pauvre, mais je promets dix bons ecus a celui d'entre vous qui voudra se devouer pour notre cure ; songez que, si nous le perdons, nous ne trouverons pas son pareil. C'est fort heureux," ajouta-t-il mentale- ment, "que mon gueux de fils ne soit pas la, car il y laisserait pour slir son gilet, sa veste et ses ohausses." " Mes amis, mes cbers freres, un peu de bonne volonte ;" disait le vicaire sans trop de bruit, sentant bien qu'au lieu de beaux discours, il aurait d)i pecber d'exemple. " Comment, tas de faineants," criait Marthe en leur montrant les poings, "vous restez la les bras oroises, quand votre pasteur n'a pas craint de se jeter dans ce brasier pour en tirer un de vos enfants ? Vous devriez §tre trop honores, brigands que vous etes, de pouvoir vous faire rotir pour un si brave bomme." Tout cela se disait h la fois, au milieu d'un trouble et d'un tumulte dont rien ne saurait donner I'idee tandis que I'incendie lan9ait a travers les tenebres ses gerbes et ses fusees d'etincellos. On se regardait en silence, d'un air mome et decourage. Eassemblant ce qui lui restait de force et d'energie, la petite vierge appela Claude encore une fois. 311 Claude ne repondit pas. Se sentant abandonnee de tous, Catherine se degagea violemment des bras qui rentouraient et s'elan^a pour idler mourir et s'ensevelir avec son vieil oncle. Mais en cet instant un grand cri partit de tous les cceurs. Claude avait paru sur le seuil, portant entre ses bras le pasteur qui tenait le marmot enveloppe dans les 1am- oeaux de sa soutane, Jules Sandeau (Gatherine). POESIES. L'huitre et les plaideurs. Un jour, dit un auteur, n'importe en quel chapitre, Deux voyageurs k jeun rencontrferent une nuitre ; Tous deux la contestaient, lorsque dans leur chemin La justice passa, la balance k la main. Devant elle k grand bruit ils expliq^uent la cbose, Tous deux avec d^pens veulent gagner leur cause. La Justice, pesant ce droit litigieux, Demande multre, Touvre, et I'avale k leurs yens, Et par ce bel arret, terminant la bataille : " Tenez, voili," dit-elle, " k chacun une ^caille. Des sottises d'autrui nous vivons au palais. : Messieurs, Fbultre 6tait bonne. Adieu ! vivez en paix." BOILEAU. La laitiere et le pot au lait. Perrette, sur sa tete ayant un pot au lait, Bien pos6 sur un coussinet, Pr^tendait axriver sans encombre k la ville. Lf5gfere et court vetue, elle allait k grands pas, Ayant mis ce jour-l&, pour etre plus agile. Cotillon simple et souliers plats. Notre laitifere, ainsi trouss^e, Comptait d6j^ dans sa pensfe Tout le prix de son lait, en employait I'argent, Acbetait un cent d'oeufe, faisait triple couvde • La cbose allait k bien par soil soin dUige 312 "II m'est," disait-elle, "facile D'flever des poulets autour de ma maison ; Le renard sera bien habile S'il ne in'en laisse assez pour avoir un cochon. Le pore k s'engraisser cofttera peil de son : II dtait, quand je I'eus, de grosseur raisonnable ; J'aurai, le revendant, de I'argent bel et bon. Et qui m'empSchera de mettre en. notre Stable, Vu le prix dont il est, une vaclie et son veau Que je verrai sauter au milieu du troupeau ? " Perrette Ik dessus saute aussi, transports : Le lait tombe ; adieu veau, vaohe, coGhon, couvde ! La dame de ces biens, quittant d'un ceil marri Sa fortune ainsi rdpandue, Va s'excuser k son mari. En grand danger d'etre battue. Le rdcit en farce fut fait ; On I'appela le pot au lait. La Fontainb. Le singe qui montre la lanterne magique. Messieurs les beaux esprits, dont la prose et les vers Sont d'vm style pompeux et toujours admirable, Mais que I'on n'entend point, dcoutez cette fable, Et tachez de devenir clairs. Un homme, qui montrait la lanterne magique Avait un singe, dont les tours Attiraient chez lui grand concours ; Jacqueau, c'dtait son nom, sur la corde 61astique, Dansait et voltigeait au mieilx, Puis faisait le saut perilleux, Et puis sur un cordon, sans que rien le soutienne, Le corps droit, fixe, d'aplomb, Notre Jacqueau fait tout au long L'exeroice k la prussienne. Un jour qu'au cabaret son maitre 6tait rest^ (C'dtait, je pense, un jour de fete), Notre singe en liberty Veut faire un coup de sa tete. II s'en va rassembler les divers animaux Qu'il pent rencontrer dans la ville ; Cliiens, chats, poulebs, dindons, pourceaux Arrivent bientOt k la file. " Entrez, entrez, messieurs," criait notre Jacqueau, " C'est ici, c'est ici qu'un spectacle nouveau Vous charmera gratis. Oui, messieurs, k la porte On ne prend point d'argent, je fais tout pour I'honneur.'' 313 A ces mots, chaque spectateur Va se placer, et Ton apporte La lanteme magique ; on ferme les voletsi, Et, par un discours fait exprfes, Jacqueau prepare I'auditoire. Ce morceau vraiment oratoire Fit bMUer ; mais on applaudit. Content de son sneers, notre singe saisit Un verre peint qu'il met dans la lantern e. II sait comment on le gouverne, Et crie, en le poussant : " Est-il rien de pareil ? Messieurs, vous voyez le sole"iI, Ses rayons et toute sa gloire. Voioi pr&entement la lime ; et puis I'histoire D Adam, d'Eve et des animaux. Voyez, messieurs, comme ils sont beaux ! Voyez la naissance du monde, Voyez " Les spectateurs, dans une nuit profonde, EcarquiUaient leurs yeux, et ne pouvaient rien voir L'appartement, le mur, tout ^tait noir. •" Ma foi, disait un chat, de toutes les merveilles Dont il ^tourdit nos oreilles, Le fait est que je ne vois.rien. Ni moi non plus, disait un chien. Moi, disait un dindon, je vois bien quelque chose { Mais je ne sais pour quelle cause Je ne distingue pas tres bien." Pendant tous ces discours, le Cic&on moderne Parlait floqusmment et ne se lassait point. II n'avait oublie qu'un point, C'dtait d'^clairer sa lanteme. Florian. La Jeune Captive. ^' L'^pi naissant mlirit de la faux respects ; Sans crainte du pressoir, le pampre tout I'^t^ Boit les doux pr&ents de I'aurore ; Et moi, comme lui belle, et jeune oomme lui, Quoi que I'heure pr&ente ait de trouble et d'ennui, Je ne veux pas mourir encore. " Qu'un stoique aux yeux sees vole embrasser la mort ; Moi, je pleure et j'espere : au noir souffle du Nord Je plie et releve ma tete. S'il est des jours amers, il en est de si doux ! Hflas ! quel miel jamais n'a laisse de dugouts ? Quelle mer n'a point de tempete 1 314: " L'illusion feconde habite dans mon sein. D'une prison sui moi les murs pfesent en vain ; J'ai les ailes de I'esperance. Echappde anx r&eaux de I'oiseleur cruel, Plus vive, plus heureuse, aux campagnes du ciel Pnilomfele chante et s'^lance. " Est-ce k moi de mourir 1 Tranquille je m'endors, Et tranquille je veille ; et ma veille aux remords Ni mon sommeU ne sont en proie. Ma bienvenue au jour me rit dans tous les yevix : Sur des fronts abattus mon aspect, dans ces lieux, Eanime presque de la joie. " Mon beau voyage encore est si loin de sa fin I Je pars, et des ormeaux qui bordent le chemin J'ai passe les premiers k peine. Au banqviet de la vie k peine commence, Un instant seulement mes Ifevres ont pressd La coupe en mes mains encore pleine. " Je ne suis qu'au printemps, je veux voir la moiason ; Et, comme le soleil, de saison en saison, Je veux achever mon annte, Brillante sur ma tige et I'bonneur du jardin, Je n'ai vu luire encore que les feux du matin ; Je veux achever ma journde. " O Mort ! tu peux attendre : floigne, floigne-toi ; Va consoler les ooeurs que la honte, I'efEroi, Le p^le d^sespoir d^vore. Pour moi Pales encore a des asiles verts ; Le monde, des plaisirs ; les Muses, des concerts : Je ne veux pas mourir encore." Ainsi, triste et captif, ma lyre toutefois S'eveillait. Ecoutant ces plaintes, cette voix, Ces voeux d'une jeune captive ; Et secouant le joug de mes jours languissants, • Aux douces lois des I'ers je pliais les accents De sa bouclie aimable et naive. Ces chants, de ma prison tdmoins harmoiiieux, Feront k quelque amant des loisirs studieux Chercher qtielle fut cette belle : La grace ddcorait son front et ses discours ; Et, comme elle, craindront de voir finir leurs jours Ceux qui les passeront prfcs d'elle. A. CniiNiEit 315 Demiers moments d'un jeune poete. J'ai r^vdle mon cceur au Dieu de I'innocence ; II a TU mes pleiirs penitents ; II gu^rit mes remords, il m'arme de Constance ; Les malheureux sont ses enfants. Mes ennemis, riant, ont dit dans leur col&re : "Qu'il meure, et sa gloire avec lui !" Mais k mon cceur calm^ le Seigneur dit en pire : "Leur haine sera ton appuL" A tes plus chers amis ils ont pret^ leur rage ; Tout trompe ta simplicity. Celui c[ue tu nourris court vendre ton image, Noire de sa mdchancet^. Mais Dieu t'entend gdmir, Dieu vers q^ui te ram&ns Un viai remords, n& des douleurs ; Dieu qui pardonne eufin k la nature humaine D'etre faible dans les malheurs. J'^veiUerai pour toi la piti^, la justice De I'incorruptible avenir ; Eux-memes ^pureront, par leur long artifice, Ton honneur qu'ils pensent temir. Soyez b^ni , mon Dieu ! vous qui daignez me rendre L'innocence et son noble orgueiL ; YoTis qui, pour protdger le repos de ma cendre, Veillerez prfes de mon cercueU ! Au banquet de la vie, infortun^ convive, J'apparus un jour, et je meurs : Je meurs, et sur ma tombe, ou lentement j 'arrive, Nul ne viendra verser des pleurs. Salut, champs que j'aimais, et vous, douce verdure, Et vous, riant exil des bois ! Ciel, pavilion de I'homme, admirable nature, Salut pour la demifere fois ! Ah ! puissent voir longtemps votre beautd sacr^e 'Tant d'amis sourds k mes adieu x ! Qu'ils meurent pleins de jours, que leur mort soit pleurae ! Qu'uu ami leur ferme les yeuxl Gilbert. 316 A une fleur. Que me veux-tu, chire fleurette^ Aimable et charmant souvenir ? Demi-morte et demi- coquette, Jusqu'i moi qui te fait venir? Sous ce cachet envelopp^e, Tu viens de faire un long chemin. Qu'as-tu vu? que t'a dit la main Qui sur le buisson t'a couple • N'es-tu qu'une herbe dess&h^e Qui vient acliever de mourir? Ou ton sein, pret k refleurir, Benferme-t-U Luae pensde? Ta fleur, bflas ! a la blancheur De la ddsolante innocence ; Mais de la craintive esperance Ta feuUle porte la couleur. As-tu pour moi quelque message ? Tu peux parler, je suis disoret. Ta verdure est-elle un secret ? Ton parfum est-U un langage ? S'il en est ainsi, parle bas, Mystdrieuse messagfere ; S'il n'en est rien, ne r^ponds pas ; Dors sur men coeur, fraicbe et Idgere. Je connais trop bien cette maia Pleine de grjlce et de caprice, Qui d'un brin de fil souple et fin A noud ton p&le calice. Cette main-li, petite fleur, Ni Phidias ni Praxitele N'en auraient pu trouver la soeur Qu'en prenant v^nus pour modfele. EUe est blanche, elle est douce et belle, Franche, dit-on, et plus encor : A qui saurait s'emparer d'eUe Elle pent ouvrir un trdsor. Mais elle est sage, elle est s^v&re ; Quelque mal pourrait m'arriver. Fleurette, craignons sa colfere. Ne dis rien, laisse-moi rSver. A DE MUSSKT. 317 Les Chants du CrepusculQ Ceux qui pieusement sont morts pour la patrie Ont droit qu'i leur cercueil la foule vienne et prie. Entre les plus beaux noms leui nom est le plus beau, Toute gloire pr^s d'eux passe et tombe ^ph^mfere ; Et, comme ferait une mfere, La voix d'ua peuple entier les berce en leur tombeau. Gloire k notre France dtemelle ! Gloire k ceux qui sont morts pour elle ! Aux martyrs ! aux vaillanta ! aux forts 1 A ceux qu'enflamme leur exemple, Qui veulent place dana le temple, Et qui mouiront comme ils sont morts ! C'est pour ces morts, dont I'ombre est ici bienvenue,. Que le baut Pantb^on dlfeve dans la nue, Au-dessus de Paris, la viUe aux miUe tours. La reine de nos Tyrs et de nos Babylones, Cette couronne de colonnes Que le soleU levant redore tous les jours ! Gloire k notre Eranoe dternelle ! Gloire k ceux qui sont morts pour elle ! Aux martyrs ! aux vaillanta ! aux forta ! A ceux qu'enflamme leur exemple. Qui veulent place dans le temple, Et qui mourront comme ils sont morts ! Ainsi, quand de tels morts sont couches dans la tombe, En vain, roubli, nuit sombre ou va tout ce qui tombe, Passe sur leur s^pulore ou nous nous inclinona, Chaque jour, pour eux setds se levant plus fidMe La gloire, aube toujours nouvelle. Fait luire leur mdmoire et redore leurs noms I Gloire k notre France dternelle ! Gloire k ceux qui sont morts pour elle 1 Aux martyrs ! aux vaiUants ! aux forts ! A ceux qu'enflamme leur exemple. Qui veulent place dans le temple, Et qui mourront comme ils sont morts ! Victor Huqo. 318 La Feiaille. " De ta tige d^tacWe, Pauvre feuille dessech^e, Oil vas-tu ?" — "Je n'en sais rien : L'orage a bris6 le ctene Qui seul ^tait mon soutien. De son inconstante haleine, Le zephyr on I'aquilon Depuis ce joui me promfene De la forit k la plaine, De la montagne au vallon. Je vais oti le vent me mfene, Sans me plaindre ou m'efErayer ; Je vais ou va toute chose, Ou va la feuille de rose Et la feuille de laurier." Arnault. Image de la vie. " Oi va le volume d'eau Que roule ainsi ce niisseau t" Dit un enfant k sa mfere. " Sur cette rive si clifere D'oii nous le voyons partir, Le verrons-nous revenir 1 " — "Non,mon fils; loin de sasource, Ce ruisseau fuit pour toujours : Et cette onde, dans sa course, Est I'image de nos jours." Mad. Tabtu. Lb Chceur. Tout I'univers est pleia de sa" magnificence: Qu'on I'adore ce Dieu, qu'on I'iavoque k jamais ! Son empire a des temps prdc6d6 la naissance. Chantous, pubUons ses bienfaits. Une Voix. En vain I'injuste violence Au peuple qui le loue imposerait silence : Son nom ne p6rira jamais. Le jour annonce au jour sa gloire et sa puissauce ; Tout I'univers est plein de sa magnificence. Chantons, publions ses bienfaits. Le Chceub. Tout I'univers &c Une Voix. II donne aux fleurs leur aimable peinture ; II fait nattre et miirir les fruits ; II leur dispense avec mesure Et la chaleur des jours et la fraicheur des nuits. Le champ qui les reQut les rend avec usure. 319 Une autre. II commande au soleil d'animer la nature, Et la lurai^re est un don de ses mains. Mais sa loi sainte, sa loi pure Est le plus riche don qu'il ait fait aux humaiiL'i. Une autre. O mont de Sinai, conserve la mdmoire De ce jour k jamais aviguste et renomm^, Quand, sur ton sommet enflamm^, Dans un nuage ^pais le Seigneur enferm^ Fit luire aux yeux mortels un rayon de sa gloire. Dis-nous pourquoi ces feux et ces dclairs, Ces torrents de fumte, et ce bruit dans les airs, Ces trompettes et ce tonnerre Venait-il renverser I'ordre des ^Idments t Sur ses antiques fondements Venait-il ^branler la terre ? Une autre. II venait r^vdler aux enfants des Hdbreux De ses prdoeptes saints la lumifere immortelle. II venait k ce peuple beureux Ordonner de 1 aimer d'une amour ^temeUe. Racine (AtJialie).. Preuves physiques de I'existenoe de Dieu. Oui, c'est un Dieu cach^ que le Dieu qu'il faut croire ; Mais, tout caohd qu'il est, pour r^v^ler sa gloire. Quels t^moins dclatants devant moi rassemblfe ! K^pondez, cieux et mer, et vous, terre, parlez ! Quel bras peut vous suspendre, innombrables ^toiles ? Nuit brillante, dis-nous qui t'a donn^ tes voiles. O cieux : que de grandeur, et quelle majeste ! J'y reconnais un maitre k, qui rien n'a coutd, Et qui dans vos deserts a semd la lumifere, Ainsi que dans nos champs il sfeme la poussiere. Toi qu'annonce I'aurore, admirable flambeau, Astre toujours le meme, astre toujours nouveau, Par quel ordre, 6 soleil ! viens-tu du sein de I'onde ? Nous rendre les rayons de ta clart^ ficonde 1 Tous les jours je t'attends, tu reviens tous les jours : Est-ce moi qui t'appelle et qui regie ton cours ? Et toi, dont le courroux veut engloutir la terre, Mer terrible, en ton lit quelle main te resserre ? 320 Pour forcer ta prison tu fais de vains efforts ; La rage de tes nots expire sur tes bords. Fais sentir ta vengeance k ceiix dont I'avarice Sur ton perfide sein va cliercher son supplice. Helas ! prets k p&ir, t'adressent-ils leurs vceux 1 lis regardent le ciel, secours des malheuTeux. La nature, qui parle en ce p6ril extreme, Leur fait lever les mains vers I'asile supreme : Hommage que toujours rend un cceur effray^ Au Dieu que jusqu'alors il avait oubli^ ! La voix de I'univers k ce Dieu me rappelle ; La terre le publie. "Est-ce moi," me dit-elle, "Est-ce moi qui produis mes riches omements ? C'est celui dont la main posa mes f ondements . Si je sers tes besoins, c'est lui qui me I'ordonne ; Les presents qu'il me fait, c'est k toi qu'il les donne. Je me pare des fleurs qui tombent de sa main ; II ne fait que I'ouvrir, et m'en remplit le sein. Pour consoler I'espoir du laboureur avide, C'est lui qui, dans I'Egjrpte ou je suis trop aride, Veut qu'au moment prescrit le Nil, loin de ses bords, K^pandu sur la plaine y porte mes trdsors. A de moindres objets tu peux le reconnoitre(*) r Contemple seulement Tarbre que je fais croitre Mon sue, dans la racine k peine rlpandu, Du trono qui le regoit k la branche est rendu : La feuille le demande, et la brancbe fidfele, Prodigue de son Men, le partage avec elle. De I'dclat de ses fruits justement enchants. Ne m^prise jamais ces plantes sans beautd, Troupe obscure et timide, bumble et faible vulgaire : Si tu sais d^oouviir leur vertu salutaire, Elles pourront servir k prolonger tes jours. Et ne t'afflige pas si les leurs sont si courts ; Toute plante, en naissant, d&jk renferme en elle D'enfants qui la suivront une race immortelle : Chacun de ces enfants, dans ma f^conditd, Trouve un gage nouveau de sa post&itd." Ainsi parle la terre ; et charm^ de I'entendre, Quand je vols par ces noeuds que je ne puis comprendre Tant d'etres diffdrents I'un k 1 autre encnalnfe, Vers une meme fin constamment entrain^, A I'ordre gdn&al conspirer tous ensemble, Je reconnais partout la main qui les rassemble, Et d'un dessein si grand j'admire I'unitd, Non moins que la sagesse et la simplicity. Racine fils, la Beligion. (*) Old spelling for reconnaiirt. ft.il How to write a Letter in French with the assistance of Hossfeld's English-French Commercial Correspondent. For the direction of persona wishing to correspond in French, we give in the following pages specimens of letters, &c., in Eng- lish, taken from Hossfeld's English-French Commercial Corres- pondent ; these letters, constructed from paragraphs or clauses from this work, have in juxtaposition the exact translation, and, by joining these together, the letter is translated into good French. The smaU figures in these specimens indicate the page of the book on which the paragraph or sentence is to be found ; the translation of it is opposite. The words marked in italics are to be found in the vocabulary given at the end of the Correspondent, and are variations intro- duced in the text, thus enabling the writer to subdivide the phrases to an unlimited extent. Therefore, the pupil who wishes to learn to correspond lu French by this method, has First to select the phrases from the English part of the Cor- respondent, put them together from the beginning to the end, so that they form the letter he wishes to write ; Second to copy the translation of these phrases. By doing so he will have the correct translation of his letter into French ; and, by using the Correspondent in this way daily for a few months, he will be able to correspond in French without further aHfriwtance. French Grammar 1 1 322 London, September 29iA, 18 " Messrs. Eo»er & Son, Marseilles.^ Gentlemen,'* We have the pleasure of informing you that*^ the " Happy" is a fine three-masted vessel,"* constructed and arranged upon the newest principles and those most recommended by experience;" her sails, chains and rigging are entirely new," she is a fine sailer,'" and her accommodation enables her to caxry fowrteen pas- sengers."' She is registered at "Veritas's" 3/3. 1.1., and at " Lloyd's "Al.»» The Captain, Mr. Thompson, is a daring sailor ;^ he passes for an honourable man,'* temperate, active, resolute," omd speaks several languages correctly.'* Placing our services at your disposal," we shall feel flattered should you find frequent occasion to make use of them.''* Believe us to be, gentlemen, your obedient servants,'' W. Brown & Co.*» Liverpool, Octoler 5(h, 18 •» Mr. Jules Gatidin, Bordeaux.'* Sir,'» We regret to have to inform you that*" your ship "The London" became a total wreck at two o'clock this morning.™ She stranded last night at eleven o'clocy" on the rocks of ..."" A heavy sea has swept away all that remained on deck,'"' and already some boxes and casks, belonging to the cargo, have been picked up on the beach.™ The representative of the under- writers has assumed from this day the direction of the salvage.'" The first care has been to set about unloading the vessel"* by em- ploying two steam-cranes.'^ This work is extremely well con- ducted.i'* A good portion of the cargo has not come into contact with the sea- water,"' and it would appear that the cargo has not suffered the serious damage that had been apprehended.'" The goods are temporarily at the wharf, under a tent that we have fitted up expressly. •"* Desirous of serving you in every way possible,'* we should feel greatly obliged by your replying by return of post,™ and have the honour, Sir, to offer you our sincere regards.'" Dormer Brothers. 323 Hambwrg, October 2nd, 18 *" Messrs. Blackwall & Slater, Quebec." Gentlemen,'' We beg to apprise you of the arrival in port,'"' ■with this morning's tide, of your vessel the " Neptune.""^ Detained for two days down the river by the neap tide, she was at length able to make her way last night."' Heavy gales of wind have assailed her on tie passage, and much delayed her arrival.^"^ The princi- pal sails and the topmasts have been carried away by the storm,^'' and a seaman disappeared, washed overboard by a sea.'^ The vessel will have to be repaired before putting to sea again,"' and the opinion of professional men is that"' the repairs will necessitate an outlay of £450, in round numbers."' You will receive from us the most ample information on this subject very shortly.'^ In the hope of a speedy answer,'^ we have the honour to as- wre you of our high esteem.™ Werner & Schrbck.'" Quebec, October Z^th, 18 Messrs. Werner & Schbeck, Hamburg." Gentlemen,'' We duly received your letter of the Znd inst?' on the subject of the " Neptune.'"^ This vessel has already suffered much in her last voyage, she requires a great many repairs, and, in our opinion the best thing would be to sell her." We beg of you therefore (en consequence) to immediately make arrangements for offering the vessel (le navire) for sale in the best way for our interests.'"' The brig " Eole ""^ is just moored at ... quay,"' and is quite ready to take in her cargo ;i^ her loading will o )mmence to- morrow,'" and as (et corrwne) our regular stevedore is very clever at his business'^* she can leave by Saturday at latest.'"" Vessels in our port being wanted, the freight for Hamburg has just again advanced, and everything indicates that this upward tendency will not end here."" Awaiting yo'ir reply,'" we salute you, gentlemen, most cordially,'" Blackwall & Slater." 324 Stettin, October 12*, 18 Messrs. J. H. Meyer & Co., Bremen.* Gentlemen, Referring to my former communications I beg the favour of your taking the necessary steps in order to effect the insurance against all ordinary sea risks oP^ the brig " Carl Heinrich," bound from Stettin for Hmcmnah.™ She has only been built three years, her register at Lloyd's is Al, and that at Veritas's 3/3 1.1. i^' I fix (jefixe) upon the round sum of 75,000 marks as the amount of insurance, to which must be added charges of every kind, pre- miums included.-'^' The insurance is intended to cover the entire voyage, that i.s to say, it is to extend to the discharge in the last-mentioned port.^* Hoping that you will favour me with an early reply,'' I am, gentlemen, with much esteem,"' Adolph Hossfbld. Birmingha/m, October 6th, 18 Messrs. Wyse & Hornsby, London. Gentlemen, We beg you to effect at once, without the least delay, a policy of assurance against all sea risks upon the various goods which we are now shipping on board the ship " The Royal Qeoige,"^^ bound from {en partcmce de) London^^s for (powr) Bombay, and of which you will find annexed a complete inventory, with detailed valuations -.^^ 12 boxes of various tools(*) £172 6 , , „ table-knives 96 2 , , „ pen-knives 40 3 , , „ pocket-knives 36 6 , , „ electro plated table-spoons and forks 120 2 , , „ desert spoons and forks 45 2 , , „ tea-spoons, &c. 38 8 , , „ miscellaneous electro-plated goods 116 60 , , „ rifles 1,560 8 , , „ revolvers 478 £2,701 When shipping these goods you will take care to be insured, regulating your valuation according to the amount on the invoice (*) For all these words see vocabulary. 325 and adding to it 10% and the expenses for freight."" We hope you will do all in your power to arrange matters on the most ad- vantageous terms. ^'^ Trusting that you will reply to us with your usual prompti- tude," we salute you, gentlemen, most cordially.™ /or R. Bbnot & Nephew, C. MORBT.'" Brussels, November 5th, 18 Messrs. Garnet Brothers, Paris. Gentlemen, We have the honour of acquainting you that," according to the arrangements concluded between us,''^ we have taken the liberty to draw upon you a draft for frs.6,350, at 2 months' date, to the order of Mr. A. Rassaerts.'** We recommend this arrange- ment to your good reception,'*' requesting you to give us an early answer,'* orad remain with the most sincere regard,™ p.p. John Beck & Co. D. S. Latard.s' Paris, November Ith, 18.... Messrs. John Beck & Co., Brussels. Gentlemen, We have received your letter of the 5th inst.,^* advising that you have drawn on us at 2 months' date to the order of Mr. A. Rasbaeets, for the sum of frs.6,350. '°' Your drafts shall always meet with prompt protection."' Please to dispose of our services on every occasion., and" ac- cept the expression of our respectful and friendly compliments, '^ Garnet Brothers. 326 Edinhwrgh, October \5th, 18 Messrs. McPherson & Co., Dublin. Gentlemen, We hasten to inform you that" under yesterday's date we have drawn on you the following drafts : £ 840 at 21 days' date to the order of J. Ferrieh. „ 450 at 14 ,, „ „ A. Martin. £1,290 total which we beg you to honour, debiting the same to our account,"' We should feel greatly obliged by your replying by return of post.™ A. McMitLAN & Sons. Dublin October IHth, 18.... Messrs. A. McMillan & SoJS, Edinburgh, Gentlemen, We much regret that we are unable to honour the two drafts drawn upon us to the order of J. Terrier and A. Martin in ac- cordance with your advice of the 15th inst.^** The rules of our house do not permit us to accord our ac- ceptance to your drafts of £1,290,^'' without holding security ;'" if therefore you should be unable to make us remittance at once,'** we shall be compelled to allow your two before-mentioned drafts to be returned under protest."" In any other circumstances we should not hesitate to pro- vide your drafts with our acceptance.^*" We have the honour to remain, yours respectfully,™ McPherson & Co. Eouen, October ZOth, 18... Mr. John Ellis, Dover. Sir, We regret to have to inform you that the bill of frs.3,260. 50c upon Mr. Louis Rotjvenat, which accompanied your letter of the 20th inst. was not paid when due.^"° We were compelled to serve tlie customary protest, whicli we enclose herein, together with the bill in question.^"' The expenses amount to frs.2e 45c. of which please take due note to our credit.'"" Believe us to be always your devoted servants and friends.™ Laoroix & Brousset. Manchester, Qctdb&r V2ih, 18... Messrs. Lyons & Webster, Ipswich. Gentlemen, Scarcely eight days intervene before the maturity of your draft of J375, to the order of Bernard Armstrong, and we have not yet received the promised provision.'^ We beg of you to favour us by completing the provision for this in due time.'*'* We should feel greatly obliged by your replying by return of post."^ Hewit & Hewit. Ipswich, October \Zth, 18... Messrs. Hewit & Hewit, Manchester. Gentlemen, We forward you enclosed in bank notes the sum of £285,'"* in order to complete the necessary provision for our draft to the order of Bernard Armstrong. '«' We remain, with the most sincere regard,™ yours very faith- fully.82 Lyons & Webster. Bristol, Novemher 8th, 18... Mr. John Paget, London. Dear Sir, I remit yon with this two bills upon Messrs. Harrild & Snider of Liverpool at three months' date ;'*"' be so good as to 328 negotiate them at the most favourable exchange, carrying the pro- ceeds to my (mon) credit.''" Should you anticipate an improvement in the rates of ex- change, it would be well to wait.''" Accept, dear Sir, the assurance of my sincere attachment.*' , Gbo. Waldow. 1 Bremen, October 31sf, 18... Messrs. Sluiten & Co. J' Amsterdam. Gentlemen, It is of importance to us to be informed as to the position and responsibility of the house of Messrs. Vandbvter & Mueten of your place.i'^ We have been informed that it has been severely tried by the recent financial disasters, and that it is at present seriously embarrassed.''^ Your opinion on this subject would be of great value to us,'"' vmi we should be very grateful to you if you -would have the kindness to inform us what ground there is for these reports, which, greatly alarm us."' Assuring you that your communication wiU be used with the utmost discretion,"' we should feel greatly obliged by your replying by return of posf NoLTKB & MUNZIG. Amste/rdam, November 3rrf, 18... Messrs. Noltke & Munzig, Bremen. Gentlemen, In reply to your favour of the 31st ult.,'' we beg to inform you thaf the house, concerning which you enquire"* is a wealthy house, no doubt, but not free from a certain amount of disre- pute ;"* while, in a legal point of view, it has hitherto met its obligations, it has the name of having been mixed up in various speculations of a questionable nature, and its good faith appears not to be everything that could be desired."* We will write to you more at length on this subject*' in a few days.M Not having the exact address of our mutual friend Mr. Jor- dan, we rely upon your good ofBces to transmit the enclosed to him," and please accept, with our thanks in anticipation," the expression of our respectful and friendly compliments." Slditen & Co. 329 Rotterdam, December 5th, 18... Mr. Anton Sandmann, Lubeck. Sir, In spite of the alarming news daily put in circulation by certain speculators, the market does not lose its firm aspect,"* Prices are well sustained ; the demand fluctuates ; but confidence in the future is so great that prices undergo no alteration. ''' Certain articles seemed on the point of giving way ; nothing of the kind has occurred, however, and the market has a firm aspect.'^' We are inclined to think, considering the firmness of the market, and the marked increase in the demand, that"' speculators are operating for an advance.™" This circumstance, combined with the regular increase in the consumption at this season of the year, we regard as a sure indication of a rise within a short period.^™ Coffees are firmly held ;^<"' 600 bags of Port Rico coffee have been disposed of at ...^"^ Sugars keep up well f^ there have been sold within the last three days 800 chests of Havannah at ... ; 600 boxes of Java at 2°^ ..., arid about 350 casks of various growths, the prices of which have not transpired.^'" Cocoa is in request, but-"^ molasses are flat.^'^ — ^ lot of 400 pockets of Ceylon cinnamon found a purchaser at ...^'' Rice with difficulty holds its position.'*" 1,500 casks (tierces) have been sold at ...^''' — Barley is also in fair demand ; 1,200 bags of pearl-barley have been purchased in three days for exportation.^"* Placing our services at your disposal, we are,'^ sirs, yours very faithfully.82 Amhoest & Co. Havre, November 4th, 18... Mr. John Evans, Bristol. Dear Sir, I should have had the pleasure of replying sooner to your esteemed note of ...,™ had it not been for our desire to furnish only categorical and precise data.^' Our market has been of late in such a languid condition that, notwithstanding the low rates now ruling, there is a general expectation of a decline in most articles for exportation.^os 3oU In wines, spirits, &c., only insignificant transactions liave l^eon effected. During tlie last fortnight there have been reported no more than 65 hogsheads of Bordeaux, 34 pipes of brandy, and 50 cases of Champagne.-'^ The 3/6 Languedoc, at our market, are ofifered at frs. ... the hectolitre ; buyers are wanting.^'* Superior qualities fetch from ... to ... the hectolitre.2''' As regards rums, there are no arrivals. Martinique from second-hand might be bought at ...^'^ Cognacs continue to decline. Many samples are offered, but the number of transactions remains very restricted, buyers count- ing, rightly or wrongly, upon a still further depreciation, ^i* This week 500 barrels of English beer have been disposed of ; but holders had to make great concessions, ^is I have the honour to be, with great respect, sir, your most obedient servant,'" A. Qtjextix. Frankfoit, November 1th, 18... Messrs. Bordes & Langhoest, Bradford. Gentlemen, I have received the letter you did me the honour of writing the 3rd inst., by which you confirm the transfer that Messrs. Hill & Co. of Bremen have made to my office of your circular letter of credit for marks 12,000 (twelve thousand) in favour of Mr. John Mannees.i'* You also advise me of your circular letter of credit for marks 10,000 (ten thousand) in favour of Mr. Henry Jackson."* I have taken due note of these two letters of credit, in order that they may be duly attended to,"* and I shall repay myself by debiting your a/o, and by sending you the receipts."* Accept, gentlemen, the assurance of my sincere attachment.^ H. SCHROEDEE. London, December 18th, 18... Messrs. P. McCaethy &, Co., Belfast. Gentlemen, You will receive enclosed an order, with all necessary in- formation, relative to the purchase of ...^^^ The utmost price to which we would. go for these goods is ... above this figure nothing could be done.^*- We are willing to 331 treat, in default of better terms, at 60 days ; but this term is very sliort, and it would be more convenient to us to extend it to three months.^" We should feel obliged by your kindly informing us in reply whether these proposals meet your approval.^'' In the hope of a speedy answer,'" believe us to be always your devoted servants and friends.'" J. L. Pearce & Co. London, December 21st, 18... Messrs. J. L. Pearce & Co., London. Gentlemen, Your letter of the 18th inst. has this moment reached us, together with the order to purchase... ^^^ We will comply in every particular with your instructions,235 and will use every means to procure you all the advantages pos- sible ;236 lut in the actual condition of the market, your prices will not be practicable.^''^ We can only advise you,^'" after a careful calculation,^Ho fix a higher price for these goods.2« It wiU accordingly be necessary for you to modify your first conditions in this sense ; otherwise the transaction is manifestly impracticable^** Accept, gentlemen, tne assurance of our %mcere attachment,^' P. MacCartht & Co. BordeaviX, Septsmber ZOth, 18... Messrs. Tann & Co., London. Gentlemen, By the steamer "Ebro," Captain Guerrero, which proceeds to sea to-morrow, for your port, you will receivers 20 hogsheads of Bordeaux, 16 pipes of Brandy, and 90 cases of Champagne.^is If the boxes or casks should have suffered any damage on the way it will be necessary to have them repaired.^' Be so good as to have these 20 hogsheads (barriques) for- warded without delay to Messrs. L. Philips & Son^^^ of your toivn,"" and lodge the (et mettez Us) 16 pipes of Brandy and the (les) 90 cases of Champagne^" in a place of safety until I shall have advised you as to their destination,^' I have the honour to remain, yours respectfully,™ B. David, 332 London, October 14th, 18... Mr. R. David, Bordeaux. Sir, We have just received by the steamer " Ebro," arrived yester- day, your shipment advised by letter of September 30th, and invoice of the same date.^^ Conformably to your directions, we have transmitted to Messrs. L. Philips & Son'"' the (les) 20 hogsheads of Bordeaux.''^' The (les) 16 Pipes of Brandy and 90 cases of Champagne^^' are temporarily at the wharf, under a tent that we have fitted up expressly.^"* Be assured, sir, that on all occasions we shall be happy to receive your orders, and in the meantime we beg you to accept™ our kindest regards.™ Tann & Co. Brest, December 1st, 18... Messrs. L. Brandes & Son, Cardiif. Gentlemen, We beg to inform you that*" for several years the iron in which you principally deal, had been confined to our port by means of specialmarkets.^* To-day, the Minister of Marine, ac- ceding to representations for favouring industry and competition, has decided that this supply shall only be made by contract, un- der sealed tenders.*" As it might be convenient for you to agree to compete for this contract, we offer you our services to represent you and make stipulations in your name.^^ This business is sufficiently fiimiliar to us to make it certain that we could well serve the interests of those who may confide in us.^** The minimum for each year will be ... tons, and the maxi- mum for each year ... tons.^' Requesting you to give us an early answer,'^ we remain, with the most sincere regard,™ yours very faithfully,^^ Allard & Brunei. 333 CIRCULARS Liverpool, November Xith, 18,.. Dear Sir (Dear Sirs), I beg to inform you that I have established a general com- mission business in this town. Having ample means and good commercial connections, I am in a position satisfactorily to attend to any orders that may be entrusted to me. I therefore take the liberty to offer you my services, assuring you beforehand that I shall always devote my best attention to your interest. I subjoin my signature, of which please to take note. I remain, Dear Sir, Your obedient servant,^i W. Santon. References : Liverpool: Messrs. ... London: Messrs. ... London, November 3Qth, 18... Sir ( Gentlemen), We beg to inform you that we have commenced business here under the firm of BROWN, JACKSON & LOMAN. We intend to operate in colonial produce on a large scale, especially in coffee and cocoa. We shall have great pleasure in receiving your business pro- posals or orders to any extent. In requesting you to enter into business relations with us, we beg you will rely on the conscientious care which we shall always give to any transaction confided to us. Please to take note of our signatures at foot, and believe us, Sir (Gentlemen), Yours respectfully,^^ Brown, Jackson & Loman. Mr. Brown will sign ... „ Jackson,, „ ... ,, LoMAN „ „ ... 334 Emieorn, December Slst, 18.... Sir (Gentlemen), I beg leave to mform you that on the first of January next I shall make over my wholesale business in chemicals and drugs to my nephew, Mr. Longwood, who has been in my employ for the last ten years, and to Mr. Allen. The means at the disposal of these gentlemen, added to the capital I shall put into the concern, will enable them to carry on the business satisfactorily. I thank you for the confidence you have had the kindness to show me, and beg of you to transfer the same to my successors, who will do their utmost to deserve the same. I am. Sir (Gentlemen), Yours faithfully,*" James Sullivan. (Annexed to the preceding.) Buncorn, Jarmary 1st, 18.... Sir (Gentlemen), Referring to the annexed circular, we beg to inform you that we have this day taken over the wholesale chemical and, drug business of Mr. James Sullivan. The style of the new firm will be LONGWOOD & ALLEN. We entertain the hope that you will continue to favour us with the same confidence you accorded to our predecessor, and which it shall be our endeavour to prove ourselves worthy of. We request you to take note of our signatures at foot, and remain, Sir (Gentlemen), Your obedient servants,'** Longwood & Allen. Our Mr. Longwood will sign ... „ Allen „ 335 Glasgow, Decemher 15th, 18... Sir {Gentlemen), We beg to inform you that we have taken into partnership Mr. A. Haeper, who has taken an active part in our business for more than ten years. Underneath you will find his signature, of which please take note.3** Lawrence & Co. Mr. A. Harper will sign ... Southampton, December 3lst, 18... Sir {Gentlemen), I have much pleasure in announcing to you that I have taken into partnership Mr. John Saunders, my nephew, who has been brought up in my office, and who has assisted me in the manage- ment of my business since 1865. The style of the new firm will be PARKHURST & NEPHEW. I am, your obedient servant,"*- '*^ W. Parkhubst. Mr. Saunders will sign... Leeds, December Z\st, 18.., Sir {GentleTnien), We beg leave to inform you that we have agreed to amalga- mate into one concern the two houses doing business in this town under the firms of F. Warner and W. Blunt. The new firm, under the style of WARNER & BLUNT, will attend to the liquidation of the above-named two firms.^'^' F. Warner. W. Blunt. Portsmouth, December Zlst, 18... Sir {Gentlemen), We beg to inform you that the partnership existing between W. LoNGTRBB and L. Gardiner having reached the term originally fixed, it has been decided by the co-partners to dissolve the same from this day forward. Mr. LoNSTEEE undertakes the liq^uidation. He will sign as follows :...»«' 336 COMMERCIAL BILLS. DKAFTS.322- 323 No. 397. £443 10s. Vera Cruz, 15ih January, 18... Three months after date, pay this first of exchange (the second and third not paid) to the order of Messrs. Marsala & Co., the sum of Four hraidred and forty -three Pounds ten shillings, at the exchange rate as per endorsement, value received, and which place to the account of Messrs. J. Fernandez & Co., as per advice. To Mr. Banner, Manchester. (Signature.) Payable in London. No. 583. Bvn. 16,600. Ma/rseilles, March 6th, 18... At sight, please pay this second of exchange (the first not having been paid), to Mr. Guerrero, or order, the sum of Rvn. Sixteen thousand six hundred, value received, and place the same to account, with or without further advice, of W. S. Harris & Co. To Mr. J. Sbeeano, Madrid. (Signature.) No. 6,341. F. 19,070. 75cs. Manchester, 2nd March, 18... Two months after date, pay this bill of exchange to our order, the sum of Nineteen thousand and seventy Francs 75c., value received, which place to account as per advice.'^ To Mr.LELONG, Lyons. (Signature.) PROMISSORY NOTES .sai Mim. 3,500. Barcelona, November SOth, 18... One year from this date we promise to pay to Mr. Rovigo, oi order, the sum of Rvn. Three thousand five hundred, value received in cash. L. Aemigo & Co. £460 15s. Dublin, December 17th, 18... Three months after date, 1 promise to pay to Messrs. Maokey & Co., or order, the sum of Four hundred and sixty Pounds 15 Shillings, value received in goods, with interest computed upon the said sum from this day, at five per cent, per annum. Patrick O'Connor. RECEIPTS .326 I/iverpool, Decerriher 31s<, 18 .. Received of Mr. Moeeton the sum of One thousand Pounds Ster- ling, on account of credit opened in my name by Messrs. Milloi Brothers of Rouen, as per their letter of advice of the 27th inst. Henry Parker. Received of Mr. Hayes the sum of Six hundred and fifty Pounds, advanced upon deposits of title deeds. Leeds, November 16th, 18... Salomon Rosenbikg. FEENCH YERBS. REGULAR & IRREGULAR. BY A. P. HUGUENET. CONTENTS. Definitions 3 Formation of the Tenses 5 The auxiliary verb amir, to have 8 The auxiliary verb itre, to be 10 The verb aimer, to love (1st Conjugation) 12 The verb punir, to punish (2nd Conjugation) 13 The verb recevoir, to receive (3rd Conjugation) 14 The verb rendre, to render (4th Conjugation) 15 Compound tenses conjugated ■withamir 16 Compound tenses conjugated with itre 18 Transitive verbs used passively 20 Reilective verbs 21 Conjugation of verbs used negatively 22 Conjugation of verbs used in- terrogatively and inter- rogatively and negatively 23 Irregular and defective verbs— 1st group 24 2nd group 26 Government of verbs 32 Table of the endings of French Verbs (Regular and Ir- regular) 35 LONDON : HIESOHFELD BROS., BREAMS BUILDINGS, FETTER LANE, E.C. THE VERB The verb (Latin, verbum, the word) is so called because it is the most important part of speech. There can be no sentence without a verb. Therefore a perfect knowledge of verbs is neces- sary for any one who wishes to write or to speak a language in a correct and intelligible manner. The simplest definition of the verb is as follows : The verb is the word which expresses the action performed by the subject, or the state of the subject. je travaille, I work; il dort, he sleeps; je suis malade, I am iU. 1. Transitive Verbs in Active Voice. Transitive verbs or active verbs are those which, not expressing by themselves any complete idea, require a word in the acciisative case after them to complete the sense. That word answers the question qui, whom, or que, what ? ]'aime mon pere, I love my father ; je lis le livre, I read the book. 2. Transitive Verbs in Passive Voice. Verbs are in the Passive Voice when the action, instead of iieing performed by the subject, is performed on the subject. Mon pere est aimif, my father is loved. Le verre est easse, the glass is broken. The passive voice is formed with the auxiliary Hre, to be, and the past participle of the transitive verb. 3. Intransitive or Neuter Verbs. Intransitive or neviter verbs are those which generally express a complete sense by themselves. If any word be added to them it never answers the question qui or que, but one of the questions a qui, to wliom, or d quoi, to \\4aat ; de qui, of whom, or de quoi, of what, &c. L'enfant dort,^ the child sleeps ; le livra appartient a mon pere, the book belongs to my father. 4. Reflective, Pronominal, and Reciprocal Verbs. - Reflective and pronominal verbs are used when the action is performed by the subject on itself. II se brUla, he burnt himself; ils se souviennent, they remember. Reflective verbs are transitive verbs which are conjugated with two personal pronouns of the same pi rson, the one in the nominative case, as a subject, and the other in the accusative case, as an object or complement. Pronominal verbs are verbs which can never be used without two pronouns, as se repentir, to repent ; se souvenir, to remember ; se moguer, to mock, &c. Reciprocal verbs are those which, being identi'^al in form to reflective and pronominal verbs, express that the action has been exchanged between two or more persons. lis se saluent, they salute each other. lis se haissent, they hate mie another. Ils s'icrivent, they write to one anotlier. 5. Impersonal Verbs. Impersonal verbs are those which can only be used in the third person singular. llpleut, it raiiis ; il neige, It snows; \i.faii,t, it is necessary. 6. Defective Verbs. Defective verbs are those which are not used in all tenses as g^sir, to lie ; oiiir, to hear ; clore, to close ; sourdre, to spring ; tistre, to weave; &c. TENSES and MOODS. Tenses. Tenses are the inflex,ions of verbs by which they are made to signify that the action took place, takes place, or will take place at a certain time. There are in reality only three tenses, past, present, and future; but a past action may have taken place at a more or less remote time, and a future action could take place sooner or later. This is why there are different past and future tenses, while there is only one present tense. Moods. The moods are inflexions of the verb which indicate in what manner the assertion expressed by the verb is made. There are five moods, as follows : 1. The indicative, which simply expresses an affirmation. II p(i.i-lc fran^ais, he speaks French. 2. The imperative expresses an' order or a prayer. Parlez, speak. Donnez-moi un morceau de pain, give me u, piece of bread. 3. The conditional indicates that the action is subject to a con- dition. Je clianterais si vous le vouliez, I would sing if you liked it. 4. The subjunctive always depends on another verb which pre- cedes it, and which generally expresses an idea of doubt, fear, imcertainty or negation. Je doiite qu'il vienne, I doubt whether he may come. Je Grains qu'il ne soit malade, I fear that he may be ill. II n'est pas sur qu'il parte, it is not sure that he may speak. 5. The infinitive expresses the affirmation in an indefinite manner, without referring to numbers or persons. U est utile A'&udier, it is useful to study. C'est en lisant qu'on s'inJtruit, it is by reading that one becomes learned. Formation of the Tenses of French Verbs. Besides the division of the Verb into simple and compov/nd lenses, which is common to languages in general, French Gram- mar divides the tenses into two categories : — primitive and derivative i The primitive tenses are those which serve to form the others ; they are five in number : The present of the infinitive ; The present participle ; The past participle ; The present indicative ; The past definite. The derivative tenses are, as their name indicates, those which are formed from the primitive tenses. 1. The Infinitive Pkesent forms two teiifaet : a. The future absolute, by the change of r, oir, or re into rai : Rimer : j aime-ra;. punir : je puni-rmt. ri'i'evoiv ; je Tecev-rai, leiidre : je renA-rai. to love : I shall lore, to punish : I shall punish, toreeeive: I shrill rrceive. to render : I shall render. b. The present conditional, hy the change of r, oir, or re into rais: aimer : j aime-roM. punir: je puni-)T(is. recevoh' : je recev-?-./,?' rendre : je rend-rais. to love : I should love, to punish : I shoahl 2nmish. toreeeive; I should receive, to render : I should rerider. 2. The Pbesext Participle forms three, or rathur two and a half tenses : to. The three persons pUiral of tlie present of the indicative, Tiy the change of ant into 07is, ez, ent : loving .■ we love, you love, thmj love. aimant ; nous aini-ojw, vous aim-cs, ils aini-cj;/. piinisSaut : nous puuiss-OHS, vous puniss-cz, ils puniss-fH<. rendaut : nous rend-ojis, vous reud-ci, ils reiid-e«<. punishing : toe •p}inish,you }iuni^li, they punish, rendering : we render, you reiiih:r, they render. • Exception. — Verbs in oir (third conjugation) end in the third person plural of the indicative in oivent, and not in event : recevant : iions recev-o«s, vous recev-62, ils v^r-oirent. receiving : we receive, you receive, . they receive. h. The imperfect of the indicative, by change of ant into ais. aimant ; j'aim-ais. punissant : je puniss-ais. recevant : je recev-ais. rendaut : je rend-ais. loving : I was loving, punishing : I was punishing, receiving : I was receiving, rendering ; I was rendering. The presmt of tlie subjunctive, by the change of ant into « ; aimant ; quej'aim-e. ptfiiissant : que je puniss-c. rendaut : que je rend-c. loving: that I may love, punishing : that I may puni'h, rendering : that I nuiy rendei\ Exception.— Verbs in oir (third conjugation) change evant into oive, in the threie persons singular and the 3rd person plural : reoevant : que je te^-oive... ; qu'ils le^-oivent. 3. The Past Participle forms all the compound tenses, with the help of the auxiliaries avoir (to have) or itre (to be). (*) aime : j ai aime, j avais aime, j'aurai aime, &c. puni: j'anrais puni, que j'aie puni, &c. arrive : je suis arriv^, j'etais arriv^, je serai arrive, &c. tombe : je serai tombe, que je sois tombe,que je fusse tomb^, &c. loved ; I liave loved, I had loved, I shall have loved, ■punished : I should have pimislied, that I may have punished, y the suppression of the pronoims subjects ^e, nous and vous : J aime : aune. nous aimons : aimons. vous aimez : aimez. je punis : pvmis. nous punissons : punissons. vous punissez ; punissez. I love : love (tTwu). we love : let us love, you love : love (ye). I punish : punish (thou), we punish : let us punish, you punish : punish (ye). 5. The Past Definitive forms the Imperfect of the Subjunctive by the addition of se to the 2nd person singular. tu aimas : que j'aimas-.s«. tu J)unis : que je punis-s«. tu re(;us : que je rejus-se. tu rendis : que je rendis-se. / loved; that I might love. I punished: that I might punish. I received : that I might receive. I rendered : that I might render. (*) All active verbs have their compound-tenses formed with the auxiliary avoir. Neuter verbs geTlerally take avoir. The majority of those expressing 710V6- ment take Ure. All reflective verbs take itrt in their compound tenses. 8 The Auxiliary Verb avoir, "to have." Present Indicative (Indicatif Present). j'ai, ITiave. tu as, thou hast. il (elle) a, he (she, it) has. nxms avons, we havf.. vouz avez, you hav. . ils (elles) out, th,ey have. j'avais, I had. tu avais, thou hadst. il (elle) avait, he (she, it) had. Imperfect {Imparfait). nous avions, we had. vous aviez, you had. ils (elles) avaient, they had. Past Definite (Pass^ d^fini). j'eus, 1 had. I nous eumes, we had. tu eus, thou hadst. vous eutes, you had. il (elle) eut, h^ (she, it) had. \ ils (elles) eurent, they had. 1st Future (Futur absolu). j'aurai, I shall or wi.U have. tu auras, thou will have. il ,elle) aura, he (she, it) will have. nous aureus, we shall or will have, vousaui'ez, you will have. ils (elles) auront, they will have. 1st Conditional (Gonditionnel pi-e'senl). j'aurais, I should or would have. tu aurais, thou wouldst have. il (elle) aurait, lie would have. nous aurions, we should or would. vous auriez, you would have[have. ils(elles)aviraieut, they would have. Imperative (Imp^ratif). aie, have (thou). ayons, let us have. ayez, have (ye). Present Subjunctive {Subjonctif present). que j'aie, that I may or should have, that I have, que tu aies, that thou inayest have. qu'il ait, that he may have. que nous ayons, that we may have. que vous ayez, that you may have. qu'ils aient, tliat they may have. Imperfect {Im,parfait). que j'eusse, that Itniyht or should have, that I had . que tu eusses, that thou mightest have. qu'il eut, that he might have. que nous eussions, that we might have. que vous eussiez, that you might have. qu'ils eusseut, that they miyht have. Present Intinitivb (Infiiiitif present). avoir, to have. Present Participle (Participe present). ayant, having. Past Particijile (Participe pass^), eu, had. j'ai eu, I have had. tu as'eu, thou hast had. il a eu, Ae has had. elle a eu, she has had. COMPOUND TENSES. Perfect {Passi ind^fini). nous iivons eu, we have had. vous avez eu, you have had. ,, . ' !■ they have had. elles ont eu, J •^ j'avais eu, J had had. tu avais eu, JAom hadst had. il avait eu, Ae had had. Pluperfect {Plus-que-parfait). nous ayions eu, we had had. vous aviez eu, you had had. ils avaient eu, they had had. j'eus eu, / had had. tu eus eu, thou hadst had. il eut eu, he had had. 2nd Pluperfect {Passe ant&ieur). nous eumes eu, we had had. vous eutes eu, you had had. ils eurent eu, they had had. j'aurai eu, I shall hare had. tu auras eu, thou, wilt have had. il aura eu, he will have had. 2nd Future {Futur antdrieur). nous aurons eu, we shall have had. vous aurez eu, you will have had. ils auront eu, they will have had. 2nd Conditional {Gonditionnel pass4). j'aurais (*) eu, I should havehad. . nBnsavir[onseu,roeshouldhaoehad. tu aurais eu, thou wouldst have had. ' vous auriez eu, you wou-ld have Jiad. il aaxait en, he would have had. ! ils a,ara.ienteu.,they would havehad. Perfect Subjunctive (S' que j'aie eu, that I may have had. que tu aies eu, th^t thou may est have had. qu'il ait eu, that he may have had. que nous ayons eu, that we mMy have had. que vous ayez eu, that you may have had. quMls aient eu, that they may have had. Pluperfect {Plus-que-parfait). que .i'eusse eu, that I might have had. que tu eusses eu, that thon mightest have had. qn'il eut eu, that he might have had. que nous eussigns eu, that we migM have had. que vous eussiez eu, that you might have had. qu'iJs eussent eu, that they might have had. Past Infinitive {Infinitif pass^ ). avoir eu, to have had. Past Participle {Participe passii). ayant eu, having had. C) The imperfect of the subjunctive is often used instead of the conditional of the auxiliary verb : feusse ev, tu eusses eu, il eUt eu, nous cusslons eu, voiis eussitz eu, ils eussent eu. 13 The Auxiliary Verb "tre, "to be-" Present Indicative {Indicatif present). ]e. suis, Tarn. tu es, thou art. (elle) est, he (she, it) is. nous sonimes, we are. vous etes, you are. ils (elles) sont, they are. Imperfect (Imparfait). j'etais, Turns. tn etais, ihoibwast. il (elle) etait, he (she, it) was. nous etions, we were. vous etiez, you were. ils (elles) etaient, they were. je fus, I was. tu fus, thou wast. il (elle) fut, lie (she, it) was. je serai, I shall be. tu seras, thou wilt be. il (elle) sera, he (she, it) will be. Past Definite {Pass^ d4fini). nous fAmes, we were. vous fiites, you were. ils (elles) furent, they were. 1st Future {Futur ahsolu). nous serons, we shall be. vous serez, you will be. ils (elles) serout, Ihey will be. 1st CojTDiiiONAL {Condltionnel pre'sent). je serais, I should be. tu serais, thou wouldsi be. il (elle) serait, he (she, it) would be. nous serions, we should be. vous seriez, you would be. ils (elles) seraiont, they would be. Imperative {Imp&atif}. sois, be (thou). soyons, let us be. soyez, be (ye). Present Subjunctive {Suhjonctif present). que nous soyons, that we may be. ' que je sois, tliat I may be, that I be. que tu sois, that tlimimrnjcst be. qu'il soit, thai he may be. I que vous soyez, that you may he. I qu'ils soient, lliat they may be. que je fusse, that I might or slwuld be, that I were. que tu iusnes,that thou mighlest be. qu'il fut, that hr might be. Imperfect {Imparfait). quenous fussions, thalwemight be. que vous fussiez, that you mightbe. qu'ils fussent, that they might be. Present INFINITIVE {Infinitif pr&ent). etre, to be. Present Participle {Participe present). etant, being. Past Participle ( Participe pass^). et(S, been. 11 COMPOUND TENSES. j'ai ^te, I7iave been. tu as ete, thou hast been. il a ete, he has been. elle a ^te, she has been j'avais et^ / had been. tu avais ete, thou hadst been. il avait ete, he had been. Perfect (Pass^ ind^fini). nou3 avons ^t5, we have been. V0U3 arez ete, you have been. lis ont ete "1 ., , , elles ont kt& j '^'^ ^™« *^««- Pluperfect {Plus-que-parfait). nous avions ete, we had been. . vous aviez ete, you had been. ils avaient ete, they had been. j'eus ete, I had been. tu eu3 kt% thou hadst been, il eut ^te, he had been. 2nd Pluperfect (Pass^ ant^rieur). nous edmes ete, we had been. vous eutes ete, you had been. ils eurent ete, they had been. 2nd Future (Futur ant^rieur). aurai ete, / shall have been. tu auras ete, tlwu wilt have teen. il aura ete, he will have been. nous auron3ete,«)e shall have vouii aurez et^ you will have ils auront ete, they will have 2nd Conditional (Conditionnel passe). j'aurais or j'eusse ete, J should or would have been. tu aurais or tu ensues ete, thou wouldst have been. il aurait or il eut ete, Ac loould have been. nous aurions or nous eussions ete, we should have been. vous auriez <»■ vous eussiez ete, yoii would have been. ils auraieut or ils eusseut ete, tJiey would have been. Perfect Subjunctive {Suijonctif pass^). que j'aie ete, tha,t I may have been. que tu aies ete, thai thou mayest hac, been. qu'il a;t ete, that he may have been. que nous ayons ete, that we ma/y have been. que vous ayez ete, that you may have been. qu'ils aient k\i, that they may have been. Pluperfect (Plus-qiie-parfait). que j'eusse 6t6, that ImightJiave been. que tu eusses ete, that thou micjhtest have been. qu'il eftt ete, that he m,ight have been. que nous eussions ete, that we might have been. que vous eussiez ete, tJiat you might have been. qu'ils eusseut ete, that they might Jiave been. Past Infinitive {Injinitif passe). avoir ete, to have been. Past Participle {Participe pass^). ayant ete, having been. 12 The Four Regular Conjugations. _A11 French verbs end either in er (1st Conjugation), in ir (2nd Conj.) in ai.r (3rd Conj.), or in re (4th Conj.) ; thence four ways of conju- gating regular verbs, or four regular Conjugations. Simple Tenses of aim-cr, to love. (First Cmijugation.) (*) P 4 Present INDICATIVE {Indioatif present). _'aim-e, I love, I am loving. tu aim-es, thou lovesl. il (elle) aim-e, he (she, it) loves. nous aim-ons, we love. vous aim-ez, you love. \ D2 ils (elles) aim-ent, they love. v (*) D 2 Imperfect (Imparfait). aim-ais, I vms loiinq. tu aim-ais, th^)u lovedst. il (elle) aim-ait, he (s-hc, it) loved. P5 j'aini-ai, I loved. tu aim-as, thou lovedst. il (elle) aim-a, he (she, it) loved. nous aim-ions, we loved. vous ajm-iez, yoii loved. ils (elles) aini-aient, thry loved. Past definite (Pagxi- di'fini). nous aim-ames, we loved. vous aim-ates, you loved, ils (elles) aim-erent, they loved. D 1st Future (Futiir absolu). _ 'aim-erai, I shall or will love. tu aim-eras, thou shall love. il (elle) aim-era, he (she, it) shall love. nous aim-erons, we shall love. vous ^im-erez, you shall love. ils (eiles) aim-eront, they shall love. D 1 l8T Conditional {Gonditionnel present). nous aim-erions, we should love. vous aim-eriez, you would love. ils (pljlfs) aim-eraient, they would Jove. _'aim-erais, I should or would love. tu aim-er.ais, thoit, woiddst love. il (el!'?) aim-erait, Ae (sfte, it) woK'jd love. D 4 iMrBRATlvB (Impdratif). aim-9^ love (thou,). aim-ons, let us love. aim-ez, love (ye). D 2 Present Subjunctive {Suhjonctif present). que }\ LTCi-e, that I way love. que to aim-es, that thou may est love. [may love. qu'il (elle) aim-e, that he (she, it) D5 que nous aim-ions,ttai wemay love que vous aim-iez, that you may love. b'tc-y love. qu'ils (elles) aim-ent, that they Impei'fect (Impaifnit). [might love. que nous aim-assions, that we que vous aim-assiez, that you might love. [might love. qu'ils (elles) aim-assent, tfmtthcy que j'aim-asse, t?Lat I '/night tc've. que tu aim-asses, that thoumight- esl love. [it) might love. qu'il (elle) aim -at, that he (she, P 1 Present Infinitive {Infinitif present), aim-er, to love, P 2 Present participle {Participe pre'selit). aim-ant, loving. P 3 Past particij)le (Participe pass^). aim-e, ainiee, loved. (*) P Primitive tenses. D Derivative leiisea. Derivative tenses are marked witli the same number as the primitive tenses from^which they are derived. 13 SIMPLE TENSES of pun-ir, to punish {Second Gonjugation). P 4 Present Indicative (Indicatif present). je]iun-is, I punish, Iain punishing tu pun-is, thou punishest il (elle) pun-it, he (she, it)punishes nous pun-issons, we punish. vous pun-issez, you pwnish, lis elles) pun-issent, t?iey punish. Imperfect (Imparfait). nous pun-issions, i m vous pun-issiez, you punished. ils (elles) pun-issaient, tliey pun- D 2 je pun-issais, I punished, I was pimishing. tu pun-issais, thou punishedst. il (elle) pun-issait, he (she, it) punished. P 5 Past definite {Passe' d(fini). je pun-is, I punished. nous pun-imes, we punished. tu pun-is, thou jmiiishcdst \ished. vous pun-ltes, youpunished. il (elle) pun-it, he (she, it) p)un- ils (elles) pun-irent, J/iej/ ^timisAcrf. D 1 1st Future {Futur absolu). nous pun-irons, we shall punish. nous pun-irez, you will punish. ils (elles) pun-iront, they will je pun-irai, I shall punish. tu pun-iras, thmi, wilt 2'unish. il (elle) pun-ira, he (she, it) will punish. D 1 1st Conditional {Gonditionnel present).. je pun-irais, I should punish. i nous pun-irions, we should punish tu pun-irais, thov,wouldst2ninish. \o\is ■pun-ixiez, you should pv/nish. il'(elle) pun-irait, he (slie, it) ils (elles) pun-iraient, tAej/ sAomW would punish. \ punish. D 2 Imperative {Imp^ratif). 'pvixx-is, punish (thou), pun-issons, let us punish. T^un-issez, punish (ye) D 2 Present Subjunctive {Subjonctif pre'sent). que je pun-isse, that I may punish. \ punish. que tu pun-isses, that thou mayest qu'il (elle) pun-isse, that he (sJie, it) may punish. D que nous pun-issions, that we. might pimish. \punish que vous pun-issiez, that you may qu'ils (elles) pun-issent, that they may punish. Imperfect {Imparfait). que je pun-isse. que -nous pun-issions, hat we might punish. fpunish que vous pun-issiez, that you might qu'03 (elles) pun-issent, that they might punish. Present Infinitive {Injmitif present). pun-ir, to punish. 2 Present participle {Pmrticipe pre'sent). pun-issant, punishing, P 3 Past participle {Participe passe). pun-i, pun-i that I might \est punish que tu pun-isses, that thou might- qu'il (elle) pun-it, that he (she, it) might punish. P 1 14 SIMPLE TENSES of recev-otr, to receive (Third Conjugation.) P 4 Present Indicative (Indicatif present). ]eTe^-ois, I receive, I arn receiving. , dovls rec-evons, we receive, \t\-2 tu re^-ois, thmt receivest. vous rec-evez, you receive, ) il (elle) rej-oit, he (she, it} receives. | ils (elles) rej-oivent, they receive. D 2 Imperfect (Imparfait). je rec-evais, / received, I was re- nous rec-evions, we received. vous rec-eviez, you received. ils (elles) rec-evaient, they received. tu rec-evais, thou receivedst[ceived. U (elle) rec-evait, he (slie, it) re- P 5 je re^-us, / received. tu re9-us, thou receivedst. .il (elle) rsQ-ut, he ( she,it) received. D 1 Past definite {Passi d^fini). nous rei;-(imes, we received. vous Te9-Tites, you received. ils (elles) reg-urent, they received. Ist Future {Futur absolu). je rec-evrai, / shall receive. tu rec-evras, thou wilt receive, il (elle) rec-evra, he (she, it) vnll receive. nous rec-evrons, we shcdl receive. vous rec-evrez, you will receive. ils (elles) rec-evront, they will receive. D 1 1st Conditional {Conditionnel present). je rec-evrais, / should receive. tu rec-evrais, thou wouldst receive. il (elle) rec-evrait, he (she, it) would receive. nous rec-evrions,i«« should receive. vous rec-evriez, you would receive. ils (elles) rec-evraient, th^y would receive. , D 4 Impekative (Imp^ratif). rej-ois, receive (thou), rec-evons, let us receive, rec-evez, receive (ye). D 2 Present Sdbjdnctivb (Subjmictif present). que je re5-oive, that I may receive. que tu re9-oives, that thou mayest receive. qu'il (elle) re9-oive, that he (she, it.) may receive. D 5 Imperfect (Imparfait). que je rey-usse, thxit I might receive. [est receive. que tu ref-usses, that thou might- qu'il (elle) res-lit, that he (she, it), might receive. que nous rec-evions, that we may receive [receive. que vous rec-eviez, that you may qu'Us (elles) rej-oivent, that they may receive. que nous re9-ussions, that we might receive. [might receive. que vous rej-ussiez, that you qu'Us (eUes) re{-ussent, thai they might receive. P 1 Present Infinitivb (Infinitif present). rec-evoir, to receive, P 2 Present participle (Participe present). reo-evant, receiving. P 3 Past participle (Participe passi), rej-u, ref-ue, received. 15 SIMPLE TENSES o-f rend-j-e, to render {Fourth Conjugation), P 4 Present. Indicative {Indicatif present]. je rend-s, 1 render, I am rendering. tu rend-s, thou renderest. il (elle) rend, he (she, it) renders. nous rend-ons, we render. \ vous rend-ez, you render. ID 3 Us (elles) render. rend-ent, they I D 2 Imperfect (Imparfait). je rend-ais, / rendered, I was ren- dcnng. tu rend-ais, thou renderest \dered. il (elle) rend-ait, he (she, it) ren- P5 je rend-is, I rendered. tu rend-is, tho\L renderest. il(elle)rend-it| he (she, it) rendered. nous rend-ious, we rendered. vous rend-iez, yoii rendered. ils (elles) rend-aient, they rendered. Past Definite {Pass^ cUjini). nous rend-Imes, we rendered. vous rend-itos, you rendend. ils (elles) reud-irent,i7i(;!/ rendered. D 1 1st Future {Futur aisolu). je rend-rai, / shall render. tu rend-ras, thou loilt render. il (elle) rend-ra, he (she, it) will fender. D 1 1st Conditional (Gonditionnel present). nous reud-rons, we shall render, vous rend-rez, you will render. ils (elles rend-ront, they will render. je rend-rais, I should render. tu rend-rais, thou wouldst render, il (elle) rend-rait, he (she, it) would render. nous rend-rions, we should render, vous rend-riez, you would render, ils (elles) rend-raient, they would render. D 4 Imperative {Impfyatif). rend-s, render (thou), rend-ons, let us render, rend-ez, render (ye). D 2 Present Subjunctive {Subjonctif prifsent). que je rend-e, that I may render, [render. que tu rend-es, that thou inayest qu'il (elle) reud-e, that he (she, it) may render. D5 que je rend-isse, that I might ren- der, [est render. que tu rend-isses, that thou might- qu'il (elle) rend-it, that he (she, it) might render. PI que nous rend-ions, that we may render. [render. que vous rend-iez, that you may qu'ils (elles) rend-ent, that they may render. Imperfect (Imparfait). que nous rend-issions, that ws might render [might render. que vous rend-issiez, that you qu'ils (elles) rend-issent, that ihey might render. Present Infinitive (Jnfinitif pre'sent). rend-re, to render. P 2 Present Participle {Participe present), reud-aat, rendering. P 3 Past Participle {Participe pass^), rend-u, rend-ue, rendered. 16 D3 COMPOUND TENSES Conjugated with "avoir" (to have). (To this Category belong all the transitive and the nis^ority of the iniransitl iK The Verb AIMER (to love). INDICATIVE MOOD. Perfect (Pass^ ind^fini). j'ai aime, I have loved. tu as aime, thmi hast loved. il a aime, he has loved. nous avoiis aime*, we have loved. vous ajez aime, you hare lorrd. ils ont aime, they have loved. Pluperfect (Plus-que-parfait). j'avais aime, I had loved. tu avais aim^, thou hadst loved. il avait aime, he had loved. nous avions aime, we had loved. vous aviez aime, you had loved. ils avaient aime, they have lined. 2nd Pluperfect (Passe ante'rieur). j'eus aim^ I had loved. tu eus aime, thou hadst loved. il eut aime, he had loved. nous eumes aime, we had loved. vous elites aime, you had loved. ils eurent aime, they had lovrd. .2nd. Future (Fiitur ante'rieur). i'anrai aime, / shall have loved. tu auras aime, thou wilt have loved. il aura aime, he will have loved. nous aiirons aime, we shall have lored. vous aurez aime, you will havr lorn!. ils aurout aime, tJiey will have loved. ' After nvoir, the past participle never agrees with the subject, but agrees with tlie object when preceded by it. Ex. . Nous avons aimS nos parents, we have loved our parents. Les parents i^ue nous avons aitnes, the parents whom we have loved. 17 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 2nd Conditional (*) (Pass^). j'aurais aim^, I should have loved. tu aurais aime, thou, woiildst have loved. il aurait aime, he would have loved. . nous aurions aime, we should have loved. vons aiu'iez aim^, you would have loved. ils auraient aim^, they would have loved, SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Perfect (Passe'). qne j'aie aim^, that I may have loved. que tu aies aime, that thou mayest have loved, qu'il ait'aime, that he may have loved. que nous ayons aime, tTiat we may have loved. que vous ayez aim^, that you may have loved. qu'ils aient aim^, that they mat/ have loved. Pluperfect (Plus-que-parfait). que j'eusse aime, that I m4ght have loved. que tu eusses aime, tliat thou mightest have loved. qu'il eiit aime, that he might have loved. que nous eussions aime, that we might have loved. que Tous eussiez aime, that you might have loved. qu'ils eusseut aime, that they might have loved. INFINITIVE MOOD. Past (Pass^). avoir aime, to have loved. Past Participle (Participe pass^). ayant aime, having loved. (*) The following forms are also used : — J^eussQ aimA, tu eusses aimi, il eM al/mii nous eussions aime, vous eussiez aime, ils eussent aitni. 18 D3 COMPOUND TENSES Conjugated with " etre " (to be). (To this Category belong all the reflective and a few intransilive verls, expressing movement.) The Verb TOMBBB (to fall) : INDICATIVE MOOD. Perfect (Pass^ ind^fini). je STiis tombe or tomb6e,(*) I have fallen. tu es tomb^ or tombfe, thou hast fallen. il est tomb^, he (it) has fallen. elle est tombfe, she (it) has fallen. nous sommes tombfe or tombees, we have fallen. vous etes tombes or tombees, you have fallen. ils sont tombes K^^ ^^.'y^K.^. elles sont tombees J " •^ Pluperfect {Plm-que-parfait). j'etais tombe or tombee, / had fallen. tu etais touibe or tombee, thou hadst fallen. il etait tombe, he (it) had fallen. elle etait tombee, she (it) had fallen. nous etions tombes or tombees,' we had fallen. vous etiez tonibes or tombees, you Itad fallen. ils eti,ient tombes _ \ ^^ j^^ y„„^,,^ elles etaieut tombees j " ■> 2nd Pluperfect ^fosse anterieur). ^■ je fus tombe or tombee, I had fallen. tu I'us tombe or tombee, thou had^t fallen. il fut tombe, he (it) had fallen. elle fut tombee, she (it) had fallen. nous fumes tombes or tombees, we had fallen. vous futes tombes or tombees, you had fallen. il farent tombes _ 1 , j^^ ^^^ elles turent tombees j 2u(l Puture {Futur anterieur). je scvai tombe or tombee, I shall have fallen. tu seras tombe or tombee, fftoM wilt have fallen. il sera tombe, he (it) will have fallen. elle sera tonibee, she (it) will have fallen. nous serous tombfe or tombees, we shall have fallen. vous serez tombes oi- tombees, you shall have fallen. inereirrombees Y^V ^'"^^ ^->"-- (*) After itrtf the past participle agrees with the subject^ 19 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 2nd Conditional (*) (Pass^). je serais tomb^ or tombee, I should have fallen. tu serais tomb^ or tombee, thou wouldst have fallen. il serait tombe, he {it) would have fallen. elle serait tombee, she [it) would Imve fallen. nous serions tombes or tombfes, we should have fallen, Tous seriez tombes or tombees, you would have fallen. ils seraient tombes "1 ,, , , , - „ elles seraient tombees)''^^' «'""''' have fallen. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Perfect (Passe). que je sois tombe or tombee, that I may have fallen que tu sois tombe or tombee, that thou mayest have fallen. qu'il soit tombe, that he (it) Tnay have fallen. qu'elle soit tombee, thMt she {it) may have fallen. que nous soyons tombes or tombees, that we may have fallen. que TOUS soyez tombes or tombees, thMt you may have fallen. qu'ils soient tombes \ ,t, , ti „ i. j. n qu'elles soient tomb&s /*"'* ^^'V "^"^ ^"■^^M^^^- Pluperfect (Plus-que-parfait). que je fusse tombe or tombee, th.at I might have fallen. iiue tu fusses tombe or tombee, that thou mightest have fallen. qu'il fiit tombe, that he {it) might have fallen. qu'elle fflt tombee, that she {it) might have fallen. que nous fussions tombes or tombees, (hat we might have fallen. que vous fussiez tombes or tombees, that you might have fallen. qu;ils fussent tombes _ \^J^^ ^^ ,^ . ^^ Mvefallefn. qu elles lussent tombeesj j i> j INFINITIVE MOOD. Past (Passe). etre tombe or tombee, tombes or tombees, to have fallen. Past Participle (Participe pass^). etant tombe or tombee, tombes or tombees, haviiig fallen. (•) The following form is also used: — je fusse tombe or tombee. tu fusses tombe or tombee. il fflt tombe, elle fut tombee. nous fussions tombes or tombees. vous fussiez tombes or tombees. ils fussent tombes, elles fussent tombees. 20 Conjugation of Transitive Verbs Used Passively. Etre aime, to be loved. Present Indicative {Indicatif present). je snis aime, / am loved. tu es aim6, Hum art loved. il est aime, he is loved. elle est aimee, she is loved. nous sommes aimes, we are loved. vous etes aimes, you are loved. ilssont aimes \ t%ey areloved. elles sont aimees ) " Imperfect {Imparfait). j'etais aime, / runs loved. tu etais aime, thoii wast loved. il itait aime, lie was loved. je fus aime, I was loved. tu fus aime, thoii, wast loved. il fut aime, he was loved. nous etions aimes, we were loved Tous etiez aimes, you were lovd. ils etaient aimes, ihey were loved. Past Definite (Passe d^fini). nous fiimes aimes, loe were loved. vous ffites aimes, you were loved. ils furent aimes, they were loved. 1st Future {Fviur dbsolu). je serai aim^, I shall lie loved. tu seras aimi, thou wilt be loved. il sera aim^, he will be loved. nous serons aimes, we shall be loved vous serez aim&, yoii will be loved. ils seront aimes, tliey will be loved. 1st CoNDlTlONAi, (Gonditionnel present). je serais aim6, I should be loved. tu serais aimi,thou wouldst be loved. il serait aime, he icould be loved. nous serious aimds, we should he loved. \loved. vous seriez aim^s, you would be ils seraient aimes, Oiey would be loved. Imperative (Tmp&atif). sois aime, be loved, soyons aim^s, let tis be loved, seyez aimes, be (ye) loved. Present Subjunctive {Suhjonctif present). , que je sois aimtj, tlmt I may be loved. [be Jo red. que tu sois aimd, that thou mayest qu'il soit aim^, that he may be loved. que nous soyons aimes, tliat we lilay be loved. ''■may ie loved. que vous soyez rimes, 'hcU you qu'ils soient ain.es, thxt they may be loved. Imperfect {Imparfait). que je fusse aim^, that I might be loved. [est be loved. que tu fusses a.imi,that thou might- qu'il fut aime, that he might be loved. Present Infinitive : Present Participle : Past Participle : que nous fussions aimes, that we might be loved, [might be tuxed. que vous fussiez aim&, that you qu'ils fussent aim^s, that they might be loved. etre aime, to be loved, etant aime, being loved, ete aim£, bten loved. 21 Conjugation of Reflective Verbs. Se flatter, to flatter one's self. Present Indicative (Indicatif present). je me fiatte, I flatter mynelf. til te flattes, thou flat/erest thyself. il se flatte, he flatters je nie flattnis, /flattered myself. tu te flattais, thou flatteredst thy- self. il se fiattait, he flattered himself. Imperfect (Imparfait). nous nous Hattons, we flatter nu-r- selves. [selfc-s. vous vous flattez, you flatter your - ilsse flattent, t)iey flatter themselves. je me flattai, I flattered myself. tu te flattas, thou flatteredst thysr.lf. il se flatta, he flattered himself. nous nons flattions, we flattered ourselves. \yourselves. vous vous fiattiez, you flattered ils se flattaient, they flattered themselves. Past Definite {Passe defini). nous nous flattSmes, we flattered, ourselves. {j/oitrsrliix vous vous flattStes, j/om flatte nd ils se flattferent, they flattered themselves. 1st Future [Futur ahsolu). je me flatterai, I shall flatter my self. [thyself tu te flatteras, thou wilt flatter il se flattera, he will flatter him- self. 1st Conditional (Gonditionnel present). nous nous flatterons, we will flat- ter ourselves. [yourselves. vous vous flatterez,2/0M will flatter ils se flatte rent, they will flatter themselves. je me flatterais, / should flatter myself. [ter thyself. tu te flatterais, tho^l wouldst flat- il se flatterait, he would flatter himself. nous nous flatterions, we should flatter ourselves, [ter yourselves. voubvous ?i-i\itiivie7,,y on would flat- ils se flatteraient, they would flat- ter themselves. Imperative (Imperafif). ^Sitte-toi, flatter thyself. \ &attons-Dous,letusflatterourselves. flattez-vous, flatter yourselves. Present Subjunctive (Stihjondif present). que je me flatte, that I may flatter myself. que tu te flattes, that thou mayest flatter thyself. qu'il se flatte, that he may flatter himself. que je me flattasse, that 1 might flatter myself. que tu te flattasses, that thou mightest flatter thyself. qu'il se flattat, that flatter himself. Present Infinitive : Present Participle : Imperfect {Imparfait). que nous nous flattions, that we may flatter ourselves. que vous vous fiattiez, thut you •may flatter yourselves. qu'ils se flattent, that they may flatter themselves. that Past Participle : que nous noUs fiattassions, we might flatter ourselves. que vous vous flattassiez, that you might flatter yourselves. qu'ils se flattassent, thai they might flatter themselves. se flatter, to flatter one's self. se flattant, flattering one's self. flatte, flattered. 22 Verbs can be conjugated in four ways, viz. ; — (a) Affirmatively : je suis, / am. (6) Negativelsr : je ne suis pas, I am not, (c) Interrogatively : suis-je, am/? (d) Negatively & Interrogatively : ne sms-je pas, nmi«o« French Verbs Conjugated Negatively. Ne pas aimer, not to love. Present Indicative (IncUcatif present). je n'aime pas, Z do not love. I nous n'aimous pas, vr dnnot love. tu n'aimes pas, tJbou dost not love. vous n'aimez pas, yoit do not love. il n'aime pas, Jie does not love. ' ils n'aiment pas, thetj do not love. Imperfect {Imparfait). je n'aiinais pas, I do not love. tu n'aimais pas, thou didst not love. il n'aimait pas, ?i£ did not love. je n'aimai pas, / did not love. tun'aimaspas, thou didst not love. il n'aima pas, he did not love. Past Definite {Pass4 d4fi.n1). nous n'aimions pas, wcrfi(i»oiZoi;«.. vous n'aimiez pas, yoii, did not love. ilsn'aiinaientpas,t. — Coj^dttional : II sierait, ils sieraient.— > *■ Present Subjunctive : Qu'ii jiee, :iu'ils sieent. 30 SECOND Present Inkjxitive. Present Pahtioiple. Past Participle. Present Indicative. Past Definite. valoir to be worth valant valu je vaux . je valus voii; to see voyant vu je vois je vis vouloir, to be u-i/li.ir/ 01- to wish voulant voulu je veux je voulus boire, to driiLk buvant bu je boia je bus dire, to say disant dit jedis je dis faire, to make faisant fait je fais jefia prendre, to take prenant pris je prends jepris G RO U F—ConUn DERIVATIVE TENSES. ( Present Indicative : Je vaux, tu vaux, il vaut ; notis valons, nous vale.:, y ils vaJent. — Future: Je vaudrai, tu vaudras, &c. — Conioiiional : Je 1 vaudrais.tu vaudrais,&c. — No Imperative. — Subjunctive: Que je vaille, (. que tu vailles, c[u'il vaille: que iwus valions, que vous valiez, qu'ils vaillent. Future : Je verrai, tu verras, &c. — Conditional ; Je verrais, tu verrais, &c. [Tresent Indicative : Je veux, tu veux, il vent : noxts vozclons, vous voulez, I ils veulent. — Future : Jo voudrai, tu voudras, &c. — Conditional : Je < voudrais, &o. — Imperative: ... .. veuillez. — Present SuB- JUNi riVE : Que je veuille, qu tu veuilles, qu'il veuiUe ; que nous voulions, \ que volts vouliez, qu'ils veuillent. f Present Indicative ; Je hois, tu bois, il ioit ; nous buvons, vous buvez, ils ! boivent. — Present Subjunctive : Que je boive, que tu boives, qu'il ( boive ; que nous bwvions, que vous buviez, qu'ils boivent. Present Indicative : Je dis, tu dis, il dit : nous disons, vous dites, ils disent. — Note. Didire (to retract), midire (to slander), pi\dire (to pre- dict), interdire (to interdict), contredire (to contradict), are written in the 2nd yerson plural of the Present Indicaiive ; vous dedisez, vout nvldisez, vous pr^disez, vous interdiscz, vous contrcdlsez. Jledire, to say \. again, is the only compound of dire, which is entirely conjugated like it. - Present Indicative : Jefais, tu fais, il fait; nous faisons, vous faites, ils font. — Future: Je ferai, tu feras, &c. — Conditional : Je ferais, tu ferais, &c. — Present Subjunctive ; Que je fasso, que tu fasses, &c. {Present Indicative : Je prends, tii prends, il prend ; nous prenons, vous prenez, ils prennent. Present Subjunctive : Que je i)renne, que tu preunes, qu'il prenne, que nous prenions, que vous preniez, qu'ils prennent. 32 Government of Verbs. List of Verbs -vvhich Govern the Preposition absoiidre, to ahsnhv.. s'abstenir, to abdamfrom accuser, to accuse of achever, to finish to aifecter, to affect to s'affliger, to be grieved at ambitionner, to be ambitious to apparteuir, to belong to apprehender, to aj^preliend to avertir, to warn to s'aviser, to hclli.ink one's self of avoir couturae, to be used to blaiiier, to blame for bruler, to long to cesser, to cease to se chagriiier, to vex one's self charger, to cliarge to commander, tt covniiand conjurer, to conjure to consi'iller, to advise to se contcntcr, to be contented with convaincre, to convince convcnir, to agree to •jraindrc, to fear to decider, to decide decourager, to discourage dedaigner, to di^d lin di'fcndre, to forbid to defier, to defy to degriuter, to disgust lemander, to aslc to se dep6cher, to hasten to se desaecoutunier, to disaccustom one's self desesperer, to despair of se deshabituer, to lose the habit of se desister, to desist detourner, to deter differer, to defer to dire, to tell to disoontinuer, to discontinue to disoonvenir, to disagree to dispenser, to dispense with dissuader, to dissuade from, icrire, to write >o s'elforcer, to endeavour to s'effrayer, to frighten at empSoher, to prerent to s'empresser de, to hasten to enjoindre, to enjoin to s'ennuyer, to get tired. entreprendre, to undertake to essayer, to try to s'etonner, to wonder at Stre charme, to be delighted at etre surpris, to be surjirised to etre tentii, to be tempted to eviter, to avoid to excuser, to excuse to exempter, to exempt from feindre, to feign to feliciter, to congratulate upon finir, to finish to se flatter, to flatter one's self for fremir, to shudder se garder, to beware of gagner, to gain se glorifler, to glory in gronder, to scold for se hater, to liasten to s'imaginer, to imagine to s'impatienter, to grow impatient jurer, to swear s'indigner, to grow indignant se lasser, to grow tired manq^uer(»), tofail to mediter, to meditate se mSler, to ineddle with meuacer, to tin-eaten to meriter, to deserve to se moquer, to laugh at negliger, to neglect to offrir, to offer to obliger, to oblige to obtenir, to obtain s'offenser, to be offended a jmettre. to omit to ordonner, to order to onblier, to forget to pardonner, to forgive for a 3 parier, to bet parler, to talk of permettre, to allow persuader, to persuade to se picjuer de, topretend to plaindre, to pity for prescrire, to prescribe to presser, to urge to prier, to request to priver, to deprive professer, to profess projeter, to project promettre, to promise to proposer, to propose to recoiuuiander, to recommend to redouter, to dread refuser, to refuse to regretter, to regret to se rappeler, recollect se rejouir, to rejoice to remercicr, to thank for se repentir, to repent rejirimander, to reprove reprendre, to chide repiodier, to reprqach for resoudre. to resolve to rire, to laugh nt risquer, to risl- to rougir, to bhish In sommer, to sunioaon se soueier, to care fur souffrir, to suffer soup9onner, to sibspect se souvenir, to reiiu-'inber to suggerer, to suggest to supplier, to entreat to t^clier, to endeavoiir to tenter, to tempt trembler, to tremble at se vanter, to boast of Verbs which Govern the Preposition ct. s'abaisser, to stoop to aboutir, to lead to \self to s'accoutumer, to accusiom one's admettre, to admit to s'adonner, to addict one's self to aider, to help to aimer, to like to s'amuser, to amuse one's self with animer, to animate to s'applicjuer, to apjily one's self apprendre, to learn to s appreter, to prepare one's self to s'arrSter, to stop at aspirer, to aspire to s'attendre, to expect to autoriser, to authorise avoir, to have to balancer, to hesitate to se borner, to limit one's self to cberoher, to seek to commencer, to begin to condamner, to condemn to consentir, to consent to cansister, to consist to eontinuer{*), to continue to contraindre, to compel to contribuer, to contribute to Bedeciderii.,tomafeM^ 09ie's mind to demander(*), to ask to depenser, to spend at destiner, lo destine to se determiner, to determine on se devouer, to devote one's self to se disposer, to dispose one's self to donner, to give to employer, to employ to encourager, to eiicourage to engager, to induce to enliardir, to embolden to enseigner, to teach s'etudier, to prepare one's self to §tre, to be s'evertuer, to exert one's self to exceller, to excel to exciter, to excite to exercer, to exercise to exhorter, to exhort to exposer, to expose to forcer, to oblige to former, to train up habituer, to accustom to se liasarder, to venture hesiter, to hesitap: to induire, to induce inviter, to inrnte- to se mettre, io set at montrer, to show to obliger(*), to oblige to 34 s'obstiner, to persist in s'occup(;T(*), to occupy one's self parvenir, to succeed in penser, to think of perdre, to lose to perseyerer, to persevere in persister, to persist in se plaire, to delight in porter, to prompt pousser, to excite to preparer, to prepare to pretendre, to aspire to provoquer, to incite to recommencer, to bfgin again to se refuser, to refuse to renoncer, to renounce to repugner, to be repugnant it se resigner, to be resigned to se resoudre, to resolve to raster, to remain to reussir, to succeed in servir, to serve to songer, to think of se sonmettre, tosuhnitto ta,xAeT[*),to p)oi)tpone, tolovjg siiffire(*), to be sufficirnt travailler, to wm-k tu tendre, to tend 1o tenir, to wish viser, to aim at List op Verbs which require no Preposition before the Infinitive which follows them. aimer mieux, to like belter aller(t), to go avoir beau, to be in vain avouer, to own compter, to intend confesser, to confess daigner, to deign declarer, to declare deposer, to depose dt'sirer, to wish devoir, to owe entendre, to hrar envoyer, to send esperer, to hope faillir. to fail faire, to cause faltoir, to be necessary s'lniaginer, to t/iiagiue In examining the preceding lists, tlie student will notice how frequently French verbs govern a preposition other than the one whicli is the translation of the preposition used in English. Therefore it will be necessary to study tbese lists very carefully, and to refer to them every time the least doubt arises on that veiy ini2>ortant subject. laisser, to l''t nier, to deny oser, to dare paraitre, to appear peuser, to expect pouvoir, to be alle ]ireferer, to pi-efir pretendre, topnicnd savoir, to knoin sembler, to seem souhaiter, to wish souteiiir, to maintain valoir mieux, to be worth mwe vemr(J), to come voir, to see voler, to hasten vouloir, to be willing (*) Verbs marked with an asterisk in tlieselisls sometimes take de, and sonu-tiisies d, according to enpliony : but de must be used iu the passive. Ex. : Je suis oblige de faire eela, 7 am, obliged to do that, (t) In the meaning of io be about to do soiuetliing. Ex. : je vais sortir,i"am going out, (J) Venir, in the meaning of to have just don"., governs the prcjiosition de. Ex. : je viens de rentrer, 1 have just ruiarned. 35 36 EH a o « 00 « ^ -§-s. i § "3 II e S -^ s s .7i •5 3 § ^^ ■3 ■ • * • > • .^ - S 5 a. * ■<>* •'^ n -■ bn «»-* >- B ° Si O s 5 i. > 11 1 "1 s" 5^' 1 1 "^ EONXrNCIATION 1/6 For Leaffiing GERMATW. E ENGLISH-GEEMAN GEAM ' 1e, by Hossfeld's New Method, arranged for Schools, Classes, and io pPrivato Lessons ... ... ,,.. bound 3/- KEY TO THE ABOVE ... '"... 1/- THE CONJUGATION OF GEEMAN EEGULAE & lEEEGULAE VEEBS ... -/6 ENGLISH-GEEMAN COMMEECIAL COEEESPONDENT: or How to Compose any Letter required either in German or English .. . ... ..abound 8/- ENGLISH-GEEMAN DICTIONAEY do. 1,- GEEMAN-ENGLKH DICTIONAEY do. 1/- THE TWO DICTIONAEIES IN ONE VOL do. 2/-, MENGEL'S GEEMAN EXEECISES AND IDIOMS ... .:. 2/6 GEIIMAN EEADER: Shining Lights of Modern Germany, with Copious Notes 2/- SELECT GEEMAN STOEIES, with Chapter on Pronunciation ,.. 1/6 For Learning- SPANISH. THE ENGLISH-SiPANISH GEAMMAE, by Hossfeld's New Method, arranged for Schopls, Classes, and f-ir Private Lessons bound 3/- KEY TO THE ABOVE do. 1/- I./CHE CONJUGATION OF THE S!JUTISH EEGULAE & IREEGULAE VEEBS - /6 !%NOLISH-SPAN[SH COMMEEC \l COEEESPONDENT : or How to Compose ? any Letter required, eithBr in Spanish or English bound 2/- IeNGLISH-SPABISH & SPAinSH-ENGLISH DICTIONAEY, In one vol 2/- Ditto Ditto Ditt > by Velazquez 6/- ' SPANISH EEADEE: A New Graduated Reader, with Foot-notes 2/- GEEMAN-SPANISH EEADEE ; A Graduated Reader with copious Foot-notes, &c. 2/- SPANISH DIaLOGUES, with full vocabularies and Chapter on Pronunciation... 1/6 For Learning ITALIAN. THE ENGLISH-ITALIAN GEAMMAE, by Hossfeld's New Method, arranged for Schools, Classes, and for Private Lessons .. bound 3/- KEY TO THE ABOVE ... ' do. 1/- |tHE CONJUGATION OF THE ITALIAN EEGULAE & lEREGULAE VEEBS... -/6 C3NGLISH-ITALIAN •& ITALIAN-ENGLISH DICTIONAEY, in one vol. ..;. 2/- fiHI_LHOUSE'S ITALIAN DICTIONAEY (New Edition), two vols. ... '... 12/- p.iLIAN REABEK 3/- I HIRSGHFELD BROS., i- BREAMS BUILDINGS. EEIIER LANE, LONDON, E.G. u ;5